Dxa5000 Ifu

Instructions for Use
DxA 5000
For In Vitro Diagnostic Use
B78799AM
August 2022
Beckman Coulter Biomedical GmbH
Sauerbruchstr. 50
81377 Munich
Germany
Instructions for Use
DxA 5000
PN B78799AM (August 2022)
© 2022 Beckman Coulter, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
Trademarks
Beckman Coulter, the stylized logo, and the Beckman Coulter product and service marks mentioned herein
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Beckman Coulter, Inc. in the United States and other
countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
May be covered by one or more patents – see www.beckmancoulter.com/patents.
Find us on the World Wide Web at:

www.beckmancoulter.com
Original Instructions
Contents
Revision History, xix
Warranty and Service, xxv
Safety Notice, xxvii
Introduction, xliii
CHAPTER 1: System Overview, 1-1
System Overview, 1-1
Cybersecurity, 1-2
The System Console, 1-3
System Console, 1-3
Working with Tabs and Pages, 1-4
Dashboard, 1-4
Other Notifications and Alerts, 1-8
Module Consoles, 1-9
Module Console Menu: Configuration, 1-9
Module Controls, 1-9
Module Cover Locks, 1-10
Shut Down Module, 1-10
Subsystem Controls, 1-10
Input Module, 1-11
Decapper, 1-16
Input Regions for Centrifugation, 1-17
Input Output Module, 1-18
Drawer Areas in the Input Output Module , 1-19
Input Output Workflow, 1-20
Input Output Console, 1-24
Decapper, 1-25
Centrifuge Module, 1-26
Centrifuge Profile, 1-32
Centrifugation Logic, 1-33
Rack Builder Module, 1-37
STA R Max , 1-48
Output Module, 1-49
Recapper, 1-53
Storage Module, 1-53
DxA System Racks, 1-54
Standard Racks, 1-55
Distribution Racks, 1-56
Buffer Racks, 1-58
Centrifuge Adapters, 1-60
Storage Racks, 1-62
B78799AM iii
Contents
Customized Trays, 1-63

Direct Track Sampling, 1-65
Transport System, 1-65
CHAPTER 2: Theory of Operations, 2-1
Theory of Operations, 2-1
System Workflow, 2-1
DxA Scheduler , 2-2
Sample Tube Routing, 2-3
Communication Protocols, 2-4
Automated Quality Control, 2-4
CHAPTER 3: System Operational Procedures, 3-1
Prepare for Operation, 3-1
Bar Code Labels, 3-1
Sample Processing and System Limitations, 3-2
Startup and Shutdown Procedures, 3-4
Soft and Hard Restart, 3-5
Startup Checklist, 3-5
Start Up the DxA System, 3-9
Shut Down the DxA System, 3-13
Open Module Covers, 3-14
Close Module Covers, 3-14
Set up the System, 3-15
Set Up User Accounts, 3-15
Set Password Requirements, 3-15
Input Module Procedures, 3-16
Fill and Load Racks, 3-16
Revisit Rack, 3-19
Fill and Load Customized Trays onto Input Drawers, 3-19
Unload Customized Trays from Input Drawers, 3-22
Replace Customized Trays on Input Drawers, 3-24
Remove Racks from Output Drawer, 3-25
Input Module Consumables, 3-25
Input Output Module Procedures, 3-29
Fill and Load Racks, 3-29
Revisit Rack, 3-32
Remove Racks from Output Drawers, 3-32
Fill and Load Customized Trays onto Input Drawers, 3-33
Unload Customized Trays from Input Drawers, 3-36
Replace Customized Trays on Input Drawers, 3-37
Fill and Load Customized Trays onto Output Drawers, 3-38
Unload Customized Trays from Output Drawers, 3-41
Replace Customized Trays on Output Drawers, 3-43
iv B78799AM
Contents
Decapper: Empty the Waste Container, 3-44

Centrifuge Module Procedures, 3-47
Open the Centrifuge Door, 3-47
Output Module Procedures , 3-49
Remove Racks from Output Drawers, 3-49
Fill and Load Customized Trays onto Output Drawers, 3-50
Unload Customized Trays from Output Drawers, 3-53
Replace Customized Trays on Output Drawers, 3-55
Storage Module, 3-56
Output Module Consumables, 3-59
Transport System Procedures , 3-63
Replace a Sample Carrier, 3-64
Sample Search, 3-67
Remove Sample Tube from the System, 3-67
Remove Sample Tube Via the System Console , 3-68
Exchange the Rack on the Drawer, 3-68
Recall Sample Tube, 3-68
CHAPTER 4: System Configuration, 4-1
About System Configuration, 4-1
Features, 4-1
Access Rights for Configuration, 4-2
View and Restore a Previously Active Configuration, 4-2
Draft Configuration, 4-4
About the Draft Configuration, 4-4
Save a Draft Configuration, 4-4
Load a Draft Configuration, 4-5
Export a Draft Configuration, 4-5
View Differences Between the Active and Draft Configurations, 4-6
Discard Changes in the Draft Configuration, 4-6
Discard All Changes, 4-7
Activate a New Configuration, 4-7
Create Named Destinations, 4-7
Error Collection Area, 4-8
Recall Rack, 4-9
Analyzers, 4-9
Storage Rack, 4-12
Connected Storage , 4-12
Storage Sample Management, 4-13
Manage Tests, 4-15
Test Type Priority, 4-16
Configure Disciplines, 4-16
B78799AM v
Contents
Create and Copy a Discipline, 4-17

Renaming a Discipline, 4-17
Deleting a Discipline, 4-17
Configure Sample Container Types, 4-17
Rename Physical Container Types, 4-18
Automatic Disposal Settings, 4-19
Manual Removal Settings, 4-19
Report Types, 4-20
Detailed Report Settings, 4-20
Event Configuration, 4-21
LIS Settings, 4-21
Routing Exceptions, 4-22
Input Module Configuration, 4-24
Input Regions, 4-24
Input Drawer Profiles, 4-26
Map Input Drawer Profiles, 4-30
Map Output Drawer Profiles, 4-31
Input Output Module Configuration, 4-32
Input Regions, 4-32
Input Drawer Profiles, 4-32
Output Drawer Profiles, 4-32
Map Input Drawer Profiles, 4-33
Output Module Configuration, 4-34
Output Drawer Profiles, 4-34
Centrifuge Configuration, 4-39
Centrifuge Profiles, 4-39
Map Centrifuge Profiles, 4-40
Sample Timers, 4-41
CHAPTER 5: Maintenance, 5-1
Introduction, 5-1
Maintenance Safety Notice, 5-1
Maintenance Workflow, 5-2
All Maintenance, 5-3
Maintenance Log, 5-3
Create Entry, 5-3
Information about Cleaning Tasks, 5-4
Maintenance Daily - Input Module, 5-5
Prepare for the Task, 5-5
vi B78799AM
Contents
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Intermediate Drip Shield and

the Tube Clamp Shields, 5-5
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Splash Protection Cover, 5-7
Decapper: Clean and Inspect the Tube Clamps, 5-8
Finish the Task, 5-12
Maintenance Daily - Input Output Module, 5-12
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Intermediate Drip Shield and
the Tube Clamp Shields, 5-13
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Splash Protection Cover, 5-15
Decapper: Clean and Inspect the Tube Clamps, 5-16
5-Day Maintenance - Centrifuge Module, 5-20
Inspect and Clean the Rotor Chamber and Accessories, 5-21
Maintenance Weekly - Transport, 5-24
Inspect Sample Carriers at Transport Exit Lanes and Remove
Defective Ones, 5-25
Inspect and Clean the Transport Components, 5-25
Maintenance Weekly - Input Module, 5-32
Clean the Mirrors and Inner Panels on the Inside of the Housing
of the Robot, 5-33
Inspect and Clean the Camera, 5-36
Inspect and Clean the Gripper Fingers and Mirror, 5-38
Inspect and Clean the Liquid Level Detection Component, 5-39
Clean the Decapper Gripper Fingers and the Bottom Cover, 5-41
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Lower Waste Chute, 5-42
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Cover of the Motor Driver
Board, 5-45
Maintenance Weekly - Input Output Module, 5-48
of the Robot, 5-49
Clean the Decapper Gripper Fingers and the Bottom Cover, 5-56
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Lower Waste Chute, 5-57
B78799AM vii
Contents

Board, 5-60
Maintenance Weekly - Centrifuge Module , 5-63
of the Robot, 5-64
Maintenance Weekly - Rack Builder Module, 5-71
of the Robot, 5-74
Maintenance Weekly - Output Module, 5-78
of the Robot, 5-83
Recapper: Clean and Inspect the Tube Clamps, 5-86
Maintenance Weekly - Storage Module, 5-89
Inspect the Floor on the Inside of the Storage Module for Solid
Contaminants and Liquids, 5-90
Maintenance Monthly - Input Module , 5-91
Clean the Panels on the Inside of the Housing of the Robot, 5-92
Inspect the Gripper Finger Pad, 5-93
Inspect and Clean the Base Frame, 5-94
Inspect and Clean the Drawer Deck, 5-98
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Drawer Deck, 5-100
Inspect and Clean the Cover of the RFID Antenna, 5-102
Inspect and Clean Racks and Trays, 5-103
Board the Photoelectric Sensor, 5-104
Inspect and Clean the Buffer Rack, 5-108
viii B78799AM
Contents

Maintenance Monthly - Input Output Module, 5-109
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Drawer Deck, 5-118
Board the Photoelectric Sensor, 5-122
Maintenance Monthly - Centrifuge Module, 5-127
Clean the Adapter Shuttle Base and the Cover of the Motor
Driver Board, 5-129
Clean the Centrifuge Adapter, 5-130
Maintenance Monthly - Rack Builder Module, 5-132
Maintenance Monthly - Output Module, 5-135
Clean the Nest and Photoelectric Sensor of the Recapper, 5-147
Inspect and Clean the Gripper Fingers and the Bottom Cover of
the Recapper, 5-148
Clean the Funnel of the Recapper, 5-149
Clean the Deck Base and the 3 Upper Waste Chutes of the
Storage Rack Builder, 5-151
B78799AM ix
Contents
Maintenance Monthly - Storage Module, 5-154

Inspect the Gaskets of the Doors of the Storage Module for Gaps, 5-155
Inspect the Floor Below the Drain Tubes of the Storage Module
for Water, 5-155
60-Day Maintenance - Rack Builder Module, 5-156
Clean the Rack Platform of the Rack Transfer Unit, 5-157
Inspect and Clean the Platform Wall of the Rack Transfer Unit, 5-162
Inspect and Clean the Clutch Pins of the Rack Mover of the Rack
Transfer Unit, 5-164
Inspect and Clean the Spacer of the Rack Mover of the Rack
Inspect and Clean the Belt of the Rack Mover of the Rack
Inspect and Clean the Buffer Lane of the Rack Builder, 5-170
Clean the Reflector and the Optical Sensors on the Rack Builder, 5-173
Clean the Support Lanes and their Optical Sensors on the Rack
Builder, 5-177
6-Month Maintenance - Transport, 5-181
Clean and Inspect the Transport Covers, 5-181
6-Month Maintenance - Centrifuge Module, 5-184
Clean the Deck of the Centrifuge Module, 5-185
Replace the Filter in the Centrifuge Drawer, 5-186
6-Month Maintenance - Rack Builder Module, 5-187
Inspect and Clean the Buffer Cover of the Rack Builder, 5-189
Clean the Deck Cover of the Rack Builder, 5-192
6-Month Maintenance - Storage Module, 5-194
Clean the Window on the Service Door, 5-195
2-Year Maintenance - Input Module, 5-196
Replace the Racks, 5-197
x B78799AM
Contents
2-Year Maintenance - Input Output Module, 5-199

Replace the Racks, 5-200
2-Year Maintenance - Centrifuge Module, 5-202
Replace the Centrifuge Adapters, 5-203
2-Year Maintenance - Storage Module, 5-204
DxA 2-Year Maintenance - Storage Module Preparing for the Task, 5-204
Replace the Storage Racks, 5-204
CHAPTER 6: Troubleshooting, 6-1
Introduction , 6-1
Communication Loss Causes the System to Pause, 6-1
A Disabled Instrument Can Display the Incorrect Color Status on the
System Console, 6-1
A Faulty RFID Reader Causes Many Sample Carriers to be Frequently
Routed to Exit Lanes, 6-1
A Sample Tube is Stuck on the Track because the Recapper is Unavailable, 6-2
Stuck Sample Tube at a Stop Position, 6-2
A Timeout Error of the Camera of the Tube Inspection Unit , 6-3
Error Dialog Box While Performing Error Recovery, 6-3
An Unknown Error Dialog Box Displays on the Console Server, 6-3
Do Not Use the Controlled-stop Button during Initialization, 6-4
Sample Tubes Rejected Due to a Classification Error, 6-4
System Cannot Initialize because of an Unrecoverable Axis Error, 6-4
The Module Console is Frozen, 6-4
The System Console is Frozen, 6-5
Handling Sample Tubes after a System Crash, 6-5
Recovering Sample Tubes After Centrifuge Power or Communication
Failure, 6-6
CHAPTER 7: Error Recovery, 7-1
About Error Recovery, 7-1
System Messages, 7-1
Available System Memory is Low, 7-1
Communication Stopped, 7-1
Communication Not Established 1, 7-2
B78799AM xi
Contents

Database Cleanup Failed, 7-3
System Console Communication Failure, 7-4
System Console Software Component Failure, 7-4
Internal System Configuration Could Not Be Updated, 7-4
Racks Ready To Be Removed, 7-5
RealVNC Not Running, 7-5
Report Not Printed, 7-5
Services Provided by PROService Will Not Function, 7-6
Excessive Processor Usage, 7-6
Running Low on Hard Disk Drive Space, 7-7
System Running on Battery Backup, 7-7
System Cannot Connect to REMISOL Advance, 7-7
Tube Cannot Be Routed, 7-8
Tube Not Routed to an Output Area, 7-8
Tubes with Empty Rack Identifier, 7-9
General Processing Errors, 7-9
Communication Failure, 7-9
Insufficient Sample Carriers on the System, 7-9
No Racks Available, 7-9
Power Loss Detected, 7-10
Remove Sample Carriers from the System, 7-10
Tube Missing, 7-10
Axis Needs Maintenance or Repairing, 7-10
Cap Gripping Axis Motion Error, 7-11
Cap Gripping Axis Motion Error 2, 7-12
Close the Covers, 7-15
Covers are Unlocked, 7-15
Communication Failure 1, 7-15
Confirm the Power is Turned On, 7-16
Confirm the Power is Turned On 2, 7-16
Controlled Stop Button is Pressed, 7-17
Cover Locking Error, 7-17
Duplicate Racks, 7-17
Duplicate Sample Carriers, 7-18
Empty Sample Tube, 7-18
EtherCAT Communication Warning, 7-19
Firmware Error, 7-19
Firmware Update in Progress, 7-20
xii B78799AM
Contents
General Communication Failure, 7-20

General Processing Error, 7-20
Gripper Axis Initialization Failed, 7-21
Gripper Failure, 7-23
Gripper Failure Detected, 7-24
Gripper Motion Failure, 7-26
Initialize the Module, 7-27
Inspect the Waste Containers, 7-28
Low Disk Space, 7-28
Motor Driver Board Communication Error, 7-29
Missing or Invalid Sample Tube Data, 7-29
Missing Tube, 7-29
Rack Error, 7-30
Remove Rack, 7-30
Remove Sample Carriers, 7-31
Remove Sample Carriers 2, 7-31
Remove Tube, 7-32
Restart the System, 7-33
Safety Controller Error, 7-33
Sample Carrier Inventory Failed, 7-33
Sample Volume Change Detected, 7-34
Status Light or Control Cabinet Failure, 7-35
System Error, 7-35
System Error 2, 7-35
System Error 3, 7-35
Backup Power Supply Failure, 7-36
System Startup Failed, 7-36
MCL StartUp Failure , 7-36
System Unable to Continue Processing Sample on Route Plan, 7-36
Unable to Initialize, 7-37
Sample Processing Errors, 7-37
Bar Code Errors, 7-40
Liquid Level Detection (LLD) Errors, 7-41
Tube Classification Errors, 7-47
Routing Errors, 7-48
Centrifuge, 7-59
Adapter Handler Error, 7-60
Adapter Handler Error 2, 7-60
Adapter Handler Error 3, 7-62
Adapter Handler Error During Initialization, 7-63
Adapter Handler Motion Failed 1, 7-64
B78799AM xiii
Contents

Adapter Handler Motion Failed Downwards, 7-70
Adapter Handler Timed Out, 7-71
Adapter Handler Timed Out 2, 7-72
Adapter Shuttle Error During Initialization, 7-73
Centrifugation Profile Violation, 7-74
Centrifugation Time Mode Is Incorrect, 7-75
Centrifuge Communication Failure, 7-76
Centrifuge Communication Failure or Error, 7-78
Centrifuge Drive Cycle Count Reaching Limit, 7-79
Centrifuge Door Restart, 7-79
Centrifuge Drawer Open, 7-80
Centrifuge Error, 7-81
Centrifuge Lid Error, 7-82
Centrifuge Rotor Cycle Count Reaching Limit, 7-83
Centrifuge Rotor Imbalance Error, 7-83
Centrifuge Temperature Out of Range, 7-85
Centrifuge Device Error, 7-85
Centrifuge Tube and Adapter Inspection, 7-86
Centrifuge Unable to Complete Processing, 7-87
Configuration Error, 7-88
Drive Cycle Exceeds Safe Limit, 7-89
Electrical Components Overheating, 7-89
Adapter Handler Error During Initialization, 7-90
Imbalanced Adapter Shuttle, 7-91
Platform Drawer Opened, 7-92
Rotor Code Not Recognized, 7-93
Rotor Cycle Count Limit Exceeded, 7-95
Shuttle Motion Failure, 7-95
Spin Failure, 7-95
Decapper, 7-96
Tube Shield Missing, 7-97
Cap Disposal Not Confirmed, 7-97
Cap Error 1, 7-99
Cap Error 2, 7-100
Cap Gripper Axis Motion or Initialization Error, 7-101
Cap Gripper Error 1, 7-103
xiv B78799AM
Contents

Cap Gripping or Initialization Error - Inspect the Gripper
Movement, 7-111
Decapper Failed to Initialize, 7-113
Decapping Not Confirmed, 7-114
Error with the Tube Clamp, 7-115
Failure to Grip a Cap 2, 7-116
Failure to Grip a Cap 3, 7-117
Gripper or Initialization Error - Inspect the Gripper, 7-119
Gripper or Initialization Error - Inspect the Rotation Axis, 7-120
No Cap Detected, 7-121
Tube Clamp Tight Grip Error, 7-122
Direct Track Sampling, 7-123
Analyzer Not Ready to Process Samples, 7-123
Bar Code Reader Failure, 7-124
Sample Aspiration in Progress, 7-124
Analyzer Communication Lost, 7-125
Missing Consumables, 7-125
Missing Reagents, 7-125
Analyzer Initialization Failure, 7-125
Communication Failure with the Analyzer, 7-126
Analyzer Processing Error, 7-126
Sample Error, 7-126
Tube Locator Error, 7-127
Drawers, 7-129
Drawer Latch Sensor Error, 7-129
Could Not Find Rack, 7-130
Waste Container Missing Parts, 7-130
Drawer Open by Force, 7-131
Missing Upper Waste Chute, 7-132
Drawer Profile is Missing, 7-134
Drawer Profile Needs to be Applied to the Drawer, 7-135
Empty the Waste Container, 7-135
Empty the Waste Container 2, 7-138
Rack Builder Analyzers, 7-141
General Events, 7-141
AU5800 Events , 7-149
DxH 900 Events, 7-169
STA R Max Events, 7-194
Recapper, 7-195
Tube Shield Missing, 7-195
Cap Error 1, 7-196
Cap Error 2, 7-197
B78799AM xv
Contents
Cap Error 3, 7-199

Cap Gripper Axis Motion or Initialization Error, 7-200
Cap Gripper Initialization Error, 7-206
Cap Gripping or Initialization Error - Inspect the Gripper
Movement, 7-210
Error with the Tube Clamp, 7-211
Failure to Grip a Cap, 7-212
Gripper or Initialization Error - Inspect the Gripper, 7-214
Gripper or Initialization Error - Inspect the Rotation Axis, 7-215
Oversized Cap or Cap Delay, 7-216
Push Cap Drawer Overfilled, 7-217
Push Cap Feeder Error 1, 7-217
Recapper Error Cap is Missing, 7-221
Recapper Axis Motion Failure 1, 7-221
Recapping Not Confirmed, 7-223
Refill Push Cap Drawer, 7-224
Tube Clamp Tight Grip Error, 7-224
Storage, 7-225
Configuration Mismatch, 7-225
Close the Storage Doors, 7-225
Storage Rack Error, 7-226
Storage Doors are Open, 7-227
Close the Storage Doors and Initialize, 7-227
Critical Storage Temperature, 7-227
Storage Robot Failure, 7-228
No Rack Information, 7-228
PCL Communication Error, 7-228
Rack Detection Error, 7-228
Rack Inserted Too Deep, 7-229
Storage Rack Stuck in the ECSD, 7-229
Storage Module Pump Failure, 7-230
ECSD Refrigeration Unit Error, 7-230
Communication to the ECSD Refrigeration Unit Failed, 7-230
Replace Indicator Board, 7-231
RFID Reading Error, 7-231
xvi B78799AM
Contents
Sample Tube Processing Error , 7-232

Storage Module Communication Failure, 7-232
Storage Module Failure, 7-233
Storage Module Power Loss or Uninterruptible Power Supply
Failure, 7-233
Storage Rack Builder Unit Full, 7-233
Temperature Error, 7-234
Backup Power Supply Activated, 7-234
Tube Positioning Error, 7-234
Transport, 7-235
Sample Carrier Stopper Error, 7-235
Transport Diverter Error, 7-238
Transport Lane Motion Error, 7-241
Unexpected Sample Tube or Other Object Detected Inside
Sample Carrier, 7-243
RFID Not Readable on Sample Carrier, 7-244
Tube Robots, 7-244
Liquid Level Detection Error, 7-244
Tube Inspection Unit Error, 7-246
Tube Inspection Unit Needs Service, 7-247
Counterbalance Rope Is Broken, 7-247
Inspect the Motion of the Tube Robot, 7-248
Inspect Motion of the Tube Robot 2, 7-249
Liquid Level Detection Communication Error, 7-250
Tube Inspection Unit Error - Inspect Gripper, 7-250
Tube Fill Level Exceeded, 7-251
Tube Gripping Error 1, 7-253
Tube Placement Error - Unknown Tube State, 7-258
Tube Placement Error with Tube in Gripper 1, 7-260
Tube Placement Error with Tube in Gripper 2, 7-262
CHAPTER 8: Specifications, 8-1
DxA System Specifications, 8-1
Performance Specifications, 8-4
User-replaceable Parts and Supplies, 8-4
APPENDIX A: Open Source Software Notice, A-1
Open Source Software Notice, A-1
Open Source Software Licenses, A-13
Apache License, A-13
BSD License, A-16
The Code Project Open License (CPOL) 1.02, A-16
B78799AM xvii
Contents
ETHERCAT SLAVE STACK CODE LICENSE, A-20

GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 , A-27
JPEG Group 6b, A-34
Microsoft Public License (MS-PL) , A-40
Mozilla Public License, A-41
The MIT License (MIT), A-54
NTP Copyright Notice and Associated Licenses, A-55
Beckman Coulter End-User License Agreement, A-58
APPENDIX B: DxA Trademarks, B-1
Trademarks, B-1
Glossary
xviii B78799AM
Revision History
This document applies to the latest software listed and higher versions. When a subsequent
software version changes the information in this document, a new issue will be released.
Following are the release dates for the original language English Instructions for Use.
Localized versions have followed at different times but always correspond to the latest
released version of the English-language version of the manual.
B78799AM, August 2022

DxA software version 2.6
Changes:
• Updated the System Overview chapter to include information about the DxI 9000
connection to DxA
• Updated the Theory of Operations chapter with important information about
automated quality control
• Updated the System Operational Procedures chapter to include improvements to the
start up and shut down procedures (turning off and on the PLCs)
• Updated the System Configuration chapter, as follows:
— updated a warning related to analyzer sample aspiration
— added an important note for Routing Exceptions
• Updated the Maintenance chapter, as follows:
— added information about the user name dialog box when creating entries for the
maintenance log
— added new steps to the weekly maintenance task for cleaning the components on
the transport system
— added information on opening and closing DxC 700 AU and DxI 9000 covers in the
correct order
• Updated the Error Recovery chapter, as follows:
— added new alert related to the tube inspection unit (TIU)
— added information to the Communication Failure 3 procedure
— added information on opening and closing DxC 700 AU and DxI 9000 covers in the
correct order
B78799AL, June 2022

Changes:
• Updated the System Overview chapter, as follows:
— added information about the possibility of having up to two connected storage
modules on a DxA 5000 system
— added information about STA R Max manual input tray
• Updated the System Operational Procedures chapter as follows:
— added information on how to remove sample tubes from the system
B78799AM xix
Revision History
• Updated the System Configuration chapter, as follows:

— removed an important note that is no longer valid from the Routing Exceptions
information
— added a step to the monthly maintenance task for cleaning the base frame
• Made minor updates in the Error Recovery chapter to include more precise
instructions about how to open the robot gripper
B78799AK, March 2022

Changes:
— added information about STA R Max RBU and racks
— added safety precautions and special considerations for STA R Max analyzer
• Updated the Theory of Operations chapter with important information about
automated quality control
• Updated the System Configuration chapter to include the following:
— added important information about activating a new configuration
— updated information about cap requirements for sample tubes
— added sample timeout in a STA R Max rack
• Update the Maintenance chapter to include the following:
— information about cleaning STA R Max RBU sensors
— added information about STA R Max rack replacement for the 60-day maintenance
task for the rack builder module
• Updated the Error Recovery chapter to include new alerts related to rack handling
motion errors
• Updated the Specifications chapter with part number for STA R Max racks
B78799AJ, November 2021

Changes:
• Updated cautions and warning throughout the manual to reflect updated risk
mitigation
— updated information about Module controls and Subsystem controls
— added information about the Print Screen feature
• Updated the Theory of Operations chapter
• Updated the System Operational Procedures chapter, as follows:
— improved description of the servers inside the system console cabinet
— added information about replacing sample carriers on the transport system
• Updated the System Configuration Setup chapter, as follows:
xx B78799AM
Revision History
— Minimum Sample Volume is now referred to as Sample Volume

— Short Sample Processing is now referred to as Insufficient Volume Options
— Route to Error Rack is now referred to as Route to error region
— added the correct grease for the 5-day maintenance task of the centrifuge module
— updated information about the correct placement of the centrifuge buckets for the
5-day maintenance task of the centrifuge module
— updated transport system terminology as follows: tube stops is now referred to as
sample carrier stoppers
• Updated the Error Recovery chapter to include the following:
— updated Centrifuge Rotor Imbalance Error with the correct grease
— updated information for resolving transport system errors
— added new alerts related to sample processing
• Updated the Specifications chapter with new part numbers for Clorox Disinfecting
Wipes and the different racks used on DxA
B78799AH, June 2021

Changes:
• Implemented changes throughout the document in accordance with the new In Vitro
Diagnostic Regulation (IVDR) directive
• Updated the REMISOL product name to REMISOL Advance throughout the document
where applicable
• Updated the Revision History to no longer include the latest REMISOL Advance version
• Updated the System Overview chapter to include information about the different types
of racks used on DxA
• Added a new Theory of Operations chapter
• Updated the System Operational Procedures chapter, as follows:
— added information about configuring consecutive sample positions on standard
racks and customized trays
— updated the sample search information
• Updated the System Configuration Setup chapter to include minor changes
• Updated the Maintenance chapter to include replacement procedures for distribution
racks and storage racks
• Updated the Troubleshooting chapter
• Updated the Error Recovery chapter to include new alerts related to the storage
module
• Updated the Specifications chapter to include:
— updated information about performance specification
— updated information about recommended and minimum required clearances
— updated part number for waste bags
• Updated the DxA Open Source Software Notice Appendix
• Updated the Trademarks Appendix
B78799AM xxi
Revision History
B78799AG, December 2020

®
REMISOL software version 2.0
Changes:
• Updated the System Overview chapter to include:
— the possibility of having two output modules
— updated information about samples that are ready for removal in the input output
module
• Updated the System Operations chapter to include:
— new description and minimum distance values for bar code label position
— updated information about a warning related to duplicate IDs
• Updated the Maintenance chapter to include information about the recommended
disinfecting wipes to be used in the United States
• Updated the Maintenance chapter to include updated information about the centrifuge
module 5-day maintenance
• Updated the Maintenance chapter to include the updated part number for the
centrifuge drawer filter
• Updated the Error Recovery chapter to include new alerts related to sample processing
and centrifuge
• Updated the Error Recovery chapter to include updates to the alerts structure
• Updated important notes where needed
• Updated the DxA System Specifications chapter to include:
— the correct height of the small and large storage modules
— updated part numbers for the AU rack identifier labels
— disinfecting wipes name and part number for the United States
• Updated the DxA Open Source Software Notice Appendix to include the NTP copyright
notice and associated licenses
B78799AF, August 2020

®
Changes:
• Added information to include the new input output module
• Added information to include the new customized tray feature
• Added information to include the new rack unloading assistant feature
• Updated the System Overview chapter to include new information on centrifugation
logic
• Updated the System Operational Procedures chapter to include updated information
on the shutdown procedure
• Updated the System Configuration chapter to include new information on the input
and output drawer configuration
xxii B78799AM
Revision History
• Updated the System Configuration chapter to include new information on the Routing
Exceptions procedure
• Updated the Maintenance chapter to include information about the input output
module maintenance
• Updated the Error Recovery chapter to include new alerts related to input output
module
• Updated the Specifications chapter to include information about the input output
module
• Added new cautions and warnings where needed
B78799AE, April 2020

®
Changes:
• Added information to include the new analyzer connection
• Updated the Maintenance and System Operational Procedures chapters to include
updated images
• Updated the System Operational Procedures chapter to include changes to the startup
and shutdown procedures
• Updated the System Operational Procedures chapter to include information on soft and
hard restart options
• Updated the System Operational Procedures chapter to include the Open the
Centrifuge Door procedure
• Updated the System Overview chapter to include new information on analyzer racks
labeling for the DxA system
• Removed the Shut Down the Module Console and the Restart the Module Console
procedures from the System Operational Procedures chapter
• Updated the Error Recovery chapter
• New cautions and warnings added where needed
B78799AD, August 2019

®
Changes:
• Added California proposition 65 to the Symbols Glossary section
• Updated the System Overview chapter to include Windows 10 hardening and
cybersecurity information
• Updated the System Operational Procedures and Error Recovery chapters to include
improved options for shutdown and restart
• Updated the System Configuration chapter to include changes to and new information
about how samples are removed from the system
• Updated the System Configuration chapter to include more information about routing
exceptions
B78799AM xxiii
Revision History
• Updated the Maintenance chapter to include the simplified maintenance workflow

• Updated the Maintenance chapter to include improvements to the Clean the Funnel of
the Recapper task
• Updated the Error Recovery chapter
• Updated the Troubleshooting chapter to include improvements
B78799AC, May 2019

®
Changes:
• Added information to include the new analyzer connections
• Updated the Maintenance chapter
• Updated System Console chapter to reflect changes made to the DxA software interface
• Updated Error Recovery chapter
• Updated the Specifications chapter
B78799AB, February 2019

®
Changes:
• Added information to include the new single centrifuge, small storage, and
Cybersecurity information
• Added the Addendum contents throughout the manual where appropriate
• Updated the Maintenance chapter
• Updated System Console chapter to reflect changes made to the DxA software interface
• Added new topics to the Troubleshooting chapter
• Updated Error Recovery chapter
• Updated the Specifications chapter
Initial Issue, B78799AA, May 2018

®
xxiv B78799AM
Warranty and Service
Warranty
The system is covered by and subject to the provisions of the warranty included in your
contractual agreement for the system or its reagents.
The customer is responsible for routine preventive maintenance procedures. Repairs

arising from the failure to perform these maintenance procedures at the indicated time
intervals are made at the discretion of Beckman Coulter and at the customer's expense.
Service/Coverage
If any problems occur in the system during the warranty period, call your Beckman Coulter
representative. Provide the serial number or system ID number and a complete description
of the problem.
Telephone Service: USA and Canada

For United States and Canada customers, call Beckman Coulter Customer Support toll-free
at 1-800-854-3633. Beckman Coulter Customer Support is available 24 hours a day to
customers in the continental United States, Alaska, Hawaii and Canada.
Telephone Service: International

For international customers, call your local Beckman Coulter Customer Support.
For the Russian Market Only

• The manufacturer guarantees the conformity of manufactured products to
requirements of normative and technical documentation. Safety and quality of
products is guaranteed throughout the entire shelf life.
• The manufacturer is responsible for product defects, except for defects that have arisen
because of violation of the rules of use, transportation and storage conditions, or a
third party or force majeure.
• The manufacturer will replace the product at its own expense, if technical and
functional (consumer properties) do not comply with the regulatory and technical
documentation, if these disadvantages were caused by latent defect in materials or
workmanship by the product manufacturer.
For product quality, please contact the manufacturer's representative in the Russian
Federation.
B78799AM xxv
Warranty and Service
xxvi B78799AM
Safety Notice
Read all product manuals and consult with Beckman Coulter-trained personnel before you
operate the system. Do not perform any procedure before you carefully read all
instructions. Always follow the product labels and the recommendation from the
manufacturer. For more information, contact Beckman Coulter.
Use Statement
This device is intended for indoor use only. Safety protection may be impaired if used in a
manner not specified by Beckman Coulter.
Alerts for Warning, Caution, Important, Note, and Tip
Warning
Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can cause death or serious
injury. Warning can indicate the possibility of erroneous data that could cause an
incorrect diagnosis.
Caution
Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can cause minor or

moderate injury. Caution can also alert against unsafe practices, or indicate the
possibility of erroneous data that could cause an incorrect diagnosis.
Important
Important indicates important information to follow.
Note
Note indicates notable information to follow.
Tip
Tip indicates information to consider.
B78799AM xxvii
Safety Notice
Summary of Hazards
Summary of Hazards
This section describes the possible hazards of the system. The hazards of individual
procedures in this manual are included in the warnings or cautions within the instructions.
Read this section before you operate this system.
Follow the power requirements in the system specifications. Follow the procedures and
safety warnings throughout this manual.
If you use the system in a manner not specified by Beckman Coulter, the protection
provided by the system can be impaired and incorrect results or system failure can occur.
Warning
Always operate the system with all shields and doors in position and secured to avoid
injury.
Warning
Incorrect grounding can cause electric shock and damage the system. Never operate
the system until the power cord is connected correctly to an electrical ground.
Use a three-prong (grounded) power cord to connect the system to a matching three-
wire grounded outlet. Do not use an adapter to connect the power cord to a two-wire
ungrounded outlet.
Warning
Use the safety features of the instrument. Do not compromise the integrity of safety
interlocks and sensors.
Under normal operating conditions, the instrument protects the user from exposure
to moving parts and laser radiation. The front, back, and side access panels are
designed with latches and interlocks to prevent access to these hazards and can only
be opened by requesting access through the software. Never attempt to defeat these
interlocks. Intentionally defeating these safety measures causes a risk of injury from
moving parts.
Warning
Respond to and acknowledge all instrument event and error messages.
Warning
Doors, panels, and covers have sharp edges and hinges with pinch points. Open,
close, remove, and replace doors, panels, and covers with care.
xxviii B78799AM
Safety Notice
Summary of Hazards
Warning
Failure to use the provided power cords can cause risk of electric shock or fire.
• The modules can use standard power cord sets with a rating of 12A or more. The correct
power cord set is provided for each module.
• The transport power module must use the power cord set provided, which uses an
industrial-grade plug.
Warning
Risk of personal injury from electrical shock. Electronic components can cause shock
or injury. To prevent possible injury or shock, do not modify the instrument and do
not remove any components (such as covers, doors, or panels) unless otherwise
instructed in this document.
Warning
Risk of personal injury if electronic equipment is used near fumes or flammable gases.
Avoid this risk by never operating electronic equipment close to fumes or flammable
gases.
Warning
Normal operation might involve the use of solutions and test samples that are
pathogenic, toxic, or radioactive. Such materials require that you take all necessary
safety precautions.
• Handle body fluids with care because they can transmit disease. No known test offers
complete assurance that they are free of micro-organisms.
• Handle all infectious samples according to good laboratory procedures and methods to
prevent spread of disease.
• Because spills might generate aerosols, observe correct precautions for aerosol
containment.
• Some of the most virulent infectious agents - Hepatitis (B and C) and HIV (I-V) viruses,
atypical mycobacteria, and certain systemic fungi - require extra safety precautions.
• Risk Group II materials (as identified in the World Health Organization Laboratory
Biosafety Manual) require biosafe containment. Materials of a higher group require more
than one level of protection.
• Dispose of all waste solutions according to correct environmental health and safety
guidelines.
• Do not centrifuge flammable or explosive vapors, or material capable of hazardous
chemical reactions.
B78799AM xxix
Safety Notice
Summary of Hazards
Warning
California Proposition 65 Warning Statement. This product can expose you to

chemicals known to the State of California to cause Cancer and Reproductive Harm.
For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.
Warning
Each sample tube must have a unique, readable bar code label. The system sends
sample tubes to the error region on the output drawer if any of the following are
true:
• two samples with the same ID are on the system at the same time
• sample has an unreadable or damaged bar code labels
Warning
Risk of injury or equipment damage from flammable liquids and combustible fluids.
Vapors from flammable reagents or combustible fluids can enter the centrifuge air
system and be ignited by the motor. Do not use the centrifuge in the vicinity of
flammable liquids or vapors, or run such materials in the centrifuge.
Warning
Risk of delay in sample processing. In the event of a general system failure, the system
may require restart or even service intervention to recover. Ensure that any urgent
(STAT) samples are processed manually to avoid delays. Beckman Coulter
recommends that you implement a way to visually identify urgent sample tubes.
Warning
Wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, eye shields, and lab coats
when performing any procedure. To avoid injury, observe and follow all the warnings
and cautions throughout this manual. Wash hands thoroughly after contact with
sample media and all maintenance activities. Observe all laboratory policies and
procedures related to the handling of biohazardous materials. Refer to the applicable
sources (such as the Material Safety Data sheets) for specific hazard information.
Warning
While the system is in operation, do not touch or go close to any moving parts. Close
protective guards and covers during operation. Failure to close covers correctly can
cause injury or incorrect results.
xxx B78799AM
Safety Notice
Summary of Hazards
Warning
Do not install software that is not approved by Beckman Coulter on the system. To
prevent virus contamination, only use software that is an original copyrighted
version.
Warning
The use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those

specified in these Instructions for Use may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Tube robots on the system that include liquid level detection contain a class 3B
invisible laser. If the system interlocks are defeated, a user making adjustments to
these tube robots can be exposed to hazardous laser radiation. Follow all instructions
in maintenance and operating procedures to avoid hazardous radiation exposure.
Warning
Risk of injury or equipment damage from flammable liquids and combustible fluids.
Vapors from flammable reagents or combustible fluids can enter the centrifuge air
system and be ignited by the motor. Do not use the centrifuge in the vicinity of
flammable liquids or vapors, or run such materials in the centrifuge.
Warning
Do not load or view the Instructions for Use PDF files onto any computer connected
to the system. Failure to follow this caution can reduce computer processing speed
and system performance.
Warning
Use only the centrifuge rotor, buckets, and adapters provided with the centrifuge, or
replacements provided by Beckman Coulter. The use of any other rotor, buckets, or
adapters can result in damage to the system or personal injury.
Warning
When using the centrifuge, take proper protective measures when handling samples
that are known to be toxic, radioactive, or contaminated with pathogenic micro
organisms.
Warning
If the system requires earthquake safe installation, contact your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
B78799AM xxxi
Safety Notice
Summary of Hazards
Caution
Risk of pinching and biohazard exposure. Before performing any actions at the
aspiration point of a direct track sampling (DTS) analyzer or a rack builder module
(RBU), pause the connected analyzer using the analyzer console.
Caution
The tube robots and rack builder module on the system contain magnets. Use caution
when working around these objects. Magnetic fields can be harmful to pacemaker
wearers and others with medical implants. Keep tools and other metal objects away
from the magnets.
Caution
Mains Disconnect: The appliance inlet and plug on the modules are not accessible, so
a disconnect device to remove power to the modules must be in position as part of
the building installation and readily identified and accessible. The requirements for
these disconnections are contained in the pre-installation requirements.
Important
This device complies with the emissions and immunity requirements as specified in the
EN/IEC 61326 series of Product Family Standards for a "basic electromagnetic
environment." Such equipment is supplied directly at low voltage from public mains
network. This equipment is not intended for residential use.
This device generates, uses, and can radiate unintentional radio-frequency (RF) energy.
If this device is not installed and operated correctly, this RF energy can cause
interference with other equipment. It is the responsibility of the end user to be sure
that a compatible electromagnetic environment for the device can be maintained so
that the device operates as intended.
In addition, other equipment can radiate RF energy to which this device is sensitive. If
one suspects interference between this device and other equipment, Beckman Coulter
recommends the following actions to correct the interference:
• Evaluate the electromagnetic environment before installation and operation of this device.
• Do not operate this device close to sources of strong electromagnetic radiation (for
example: unshielded intentional RF sources), as these can interfere with proper operation.
Examples of unshielded intentional radiators are handheld radio transmitters, cordless
phones, and cellular phones.
• Do not place this device near medical electrical equipment that can be susceptible to
malfunctions caused by close-proximity to electromagnetic fields.
• This device has been designed and tested to CISPR 11, Class A emission limits. In a
domestic environment, this device can cause radio interference, in which case, you need to
take measures to mitigate the interference.
xxxii B78799AM
Safety Notice
Hardware Labels
Important
If you purchased this product from anyone other than Beckman Coulter or an
authorized Beckman Coulter distributor, and it is not presently under a Beckman
Coulter service maintenance agreement, Beckman Coulter cannot guarantee that the
product is fitted with the most current information bulletins concerning the product. If
you purchased this product from a third party and want further information concerning
this topic, contact a Beckman Coulter Representative.
Important
Do not handle broken parts. Report any broken parts to your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
Hardware Labels
The following are the symbols for the hardware labels and their descriptions. These
hardware labels might be on your system. Do not cover or remove the labels. If the labels
are damaged, contact your local Beckman Coulter Representative for replacement.
• Warning labels: Identify areas of the system where hazards exist and where caution
should be taken to avoid serious injury or death.
• Instruction labels: Alert the operator to operate the system correctly at relevant
locations on the system.
• Laser safety labels: Alert the operator of the laser class and hazards from laser beams
at relevant locations on the system.
B78799AM xxxiii
Safety Notice
Hardware Labels
Symbols Glossary
Symbol Description
Caution
This symbol indicates the need for the user to consult the
instructions for use for important cautionary information such as
warnings and precautions that cannot, for a variety of reasons, be
presented on the medical device itself.
ISO 15223-1. Medical devices - Symbols to be used with medical

device labels, labelling and information to be supplied - Part 1:
General Requirements. #5.4.4
Warning; Biological hazard
This symbol indicates a warning of a biological hazard.
ISO 7010. Graphical Symbols - Safety colors and safety signs. #W009
Supplemental Product-Specific Manufacturer Information
This symbol indicates a caution to operate only with all covers in

position to decrease risk of personal injury or biohazard.
This symbol indicates the use of biohazardous materials in the area.

Use caution when working with possible infectious samples.
Wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, eye

shields, and lab coats. Handle and dispose of biohazardous materials
according to your laboratory procedures.
Warning; Laser Beam
This symbol indicates a warning of a laser beam.
ISO 7010. Graphical Symbols - Safety colors and safety signs. #W004
This symbol indicates that there can be laser light radiation in the
area. Take precautions to prevent exposure.
Warning, Hot Surface
This symbol indicates a warning of a hot surface.
ISO 7010. Graphical Symbols – Safety colors and safety signs. #W017
This symbol indicates that there is a hot surface or component (such

as a lamp) in the area that, if touched, can cause a burn.
xxxiv B78799AM
Safety Notice
Hardware Labels
Symbol Description
Manufacturer
This symbol indicates the medical device manufacturer.

This symbol indicates who the legal manufacturer of the product is.
Stop
This symbol indicates the control or the indicator to stop the active
function.
IEC 60417: Graphical symbols for use on equipment - Overview and

application, #5110A
This symbol indicates a stop button.
In vitro diagnostic medical device
This symbol indicates a medical device that is intended to be used as

an in vitro diagnostic medical device.
ISO 15223-1: Medical devices. Symbols to be used with medical

device labels, labelling and information to be supplied. General
requirements, clause 5.5.1
Disconnection, all power plugs
This symbol indicates instructions that all power sources shall be

disconnected before servicing to avoid shock hazard.

application, #6172
Warning; Crushing of hands
This symbol indicates a warning of a closing motion of mechanical

parts of equipment.
ISO 7010. Graphical Symbols for electrical equipment in medical

practices. #W024
Use caution to avoid injury to hands when close to equipment with

moving mechanical parts.
B78799AM xxxv
Safety Notice
Hardware Labels
Symbol Description
Caution, static magnetic field hazard
This symbol indicates areas with potentially hazardous static

magnetic fields and forces in an installation.

application. #6204
This symbol indicates the presence of magnetic fields. Keep metal

objects, pacemakers, and implants away from this area.
Protective earth; protective ground
This symbol indicates a terminal which is intended for connection to

an external conductor for protection against electric shock in case of
a fault, or the terminal of a protective earth (ground) electrode.

application, #5019
RxOnly Symbol
This symbol is recognized by the US FDA as an alternative to the

following statement: Caution: Federal law restricts this device to
sale by or on the order of a licensed practitioner.
21 CFR 801.109(b)(1)
Serial number
This symbol indicates the manufacturer's serial number so that a

specific medical device can be identified.

Catalogue Number
This symbol indicates the manufacturer's catalogue number so that

the medical device can be identified.

Country of Origin Symbol

Made in Country of Origin
This symbol indicates the country that the product was
manufactured in.
xxxvi B78799AM
Safety Notice
Hardware Labels
Symbol Description
Consult instructions for use
This symbol indicates the need for the user to consult the
instructions for use.

Lock
This symbol indicates the locking control. This symbol indicates that
a control is locked. This symbol indicates that the function cannot be
changed or adjusted because its operation is locked. This symbol
indicates the location of a lock.
ISO 7000: Graphical symbols for use on equipment - Registered

symbols, #1656
Unlocking
This symbol indicates on a control that a function is not locked or to

show the unlocked status.

application, #5570
Info for USA only: California Proposition 65 Title of Symbol: California Proposition 65
WARNING
Meaning of Symbol: This symbol indicates that this product can
C26155-AB
Cancer & Reproductive Harm

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov
expose you to chemicals known to the State of California to cause
Cancer and Reproductive Harm. For more information go to https://
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.
Centrifuge Module Emergency Access Labels

Details
The centrifuge and dual centrifuge modules include emergency access keys installed inside
the module. These keys unlock the centrifuge drawer and access the centrifuge device or
B78799AM xxxvii
Safety Notice
Hardware Labels
devices. These keys can be used to open the drawers when drawer opening cannot be
requested using the system console. A pair of labels links the keys and drawers together.
Table 2 Emergency access key and drawer labels
Label Description Location
The label denotes the left Below the access key

emergency access key as (1). The (Centrifuge).
key is used to unlock the drawer
also denoted as (1). Below the left access key (Dual
Centrifuge).
The label denotes the left On the top edge of the drawer
centrifuge drawer as (1). The (Centrifuge).
emergency access key also
denoted as (1) unlocks the On the top edge of the left
drawer. centrifuge drawer (Dual
Centrifuge).
The label denotes the right-hand Below the right-hand access key
emergency access key as (2). The (Dual Centrifuge).
key is used to unlock the drawer
also denoted as (2).
The label denotes the right-hand On the top edge of the right-
centrifuge drawer as (2). The hand centrifuge drawer (Dual
emergency access key also Centrifuge).
denoted as (2) unlocks the
drawer.
Laser Safety Labels and their Locations
Details
This topic describes the laser safety labels on the DxA system, and documents their
locations.
xxxviii B78799AM
Safety Notice
Hardware Labels
Table 3 Glossary of laser safety labels

Symbol Description
Laser Aperture
This symbol indicates an area or opening where the system emits laser
radiation.
IEC 60825: Safety of laser products - Part 1: Equipment classification and

requirements, clause 7.8
Class 1 Laser Product
This label indicates that the product is a Class 1 Laser Product and is in
compliance with international standard and US requirements.
21 CFR 1040
Class 3B Laser Warning
The panel marking indicates that there is Class 3B invisible laser light
radiation beyond the panel it is placed on. Take precautions to prevent
exposure.
IEC 60825: Safety of laser products - Part 1: Equipment classification and

requirements, clause 7.4
Laser Safety Label Locations

Labels on tube robots
The figure displays the locations of the laser safety labels on the tube robots of the input,
output, and centrifuge modules.
Figure 1 Location of Laser Safety Labels
1. Class 3B Laser Warning

2. Laser Aperture
Labels on module frames
B78799AM xxxix
Safety Notice
Hardware Labels
The figure displays the locations of the Class 1 Laser Product label on the input, output, and
centrifuge module frames.
Figure 2 Location of Label on Input Module
1. Class 1 Laser Product label on the module frame, beneath the cover.
Figure 3 Location of Label on Centrifuge and Dual Centrifuge Module
xl B78799AM
Safety Notice
Hardware Labels
Figure 4 Location of Label on Output Module
B78799AM xli
Safety Notice
Hardware Labels
xlii B78799AM
Introduction
Certificates and Marking
Table 4 Table of certificate and marking symbols
Symbol Description
CE Marking
This symbol indicates conformity with the provisions of the

applicable EU directives.
cNRTLus Certification Mark
This symbol indicates recognition by a Nationally Recognized Testing

Laboratory (NRTL) that the system has met the relevant product
safety standards for the United States and Canada.
OSHA, CEC
RCM Symbol
This symbol indicates compliance with the Australian

Communications Media Authority (ACMA) requirements (safety and
EMC) for Australia and New Zealand.
B78799AM xliii
Introduction
Certificates and Marking
Table 4 Table of certificate and marking symbols (Continued)

Symbol Description
RoHS Caution Symbol
This symbol indicates that this electronic information product

制造。
日期 / Mfg. Date
contains certain toxic or hazardous elements, and can be used safely
during its environmental protection use period. The number in the
middle of the logo indicates the environmental protection use
period (in years) for the product. The outer circle indicates that the
product can be recycled. The logo also signifies that the product
should be recycled immediately after its environmental protection
use period has expired. The date on the label indicates the date of
manufacture.
These labels and materials declaration table (the Table of Hazardous

Substance's Name and Concentration) meet People's Republic of
China Electronic Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006 Marking for
Control of Pollution Caused by Electronic Information Products
requirements.
Recycling Symbol
This symbol is required by the Waste Electrical and Electronic

Equipment (WEEE) Directive of the European Union. This symbol
indicates that:
1. The device was put on the European Market after August 13,
2005.
2. The device is not to be disposed of via the municipal waste
collection system of any member state of the European Union.
Customers must understand and follow all laws regarding the

correct decontamination and safe disposal of electrical equipment.
For Beckman Coulter products bearing this label, contact your
dealer or your local Beckman Coulter Representative for more
information on the take-back program that facilitates the correct
collection, treatment, recovery, recycling, and safe disposal of these
products.
EU Directive 2002-96-EC: waste electrical and electronic equipment

(WEEE)
For the Japan market:
This system is considered an industrial waste, subject to special

controls for infectious waste. Before disposal of the system, refer to
the Waste Disposal and Public Cleaning Law for compliance
procedures.
xliv B78799AM
Introduction
Disclaimer
Disclaimer
This system includes RFID modules compliant with the Radio Equipment Directive
(2014/53/EU), FCC Part 15, and Industry Canada RSS-210. Changes or modifications to the
RFID modules not authorized by Beckman Coulter Biomedical GmbH or improper use could
void the Certification and negate your authority to operate this product. The system may be
covered by one or more patents. For more information, see www.beckmancoulter.com/
patents.
REMISOL Advance and REMISOL are trademarks of Normand-Info SAS in the USA and other
countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. REMISOL
Advance is not supplied as a component of the DxA system and must be purchased
separately.
STAGOTM and STA R MAXTM are trademarks or registered trademarks of Diagnostica Stago
SAS. Beckman Coulter, Inc. is neither associated or affiliated with Diagnostica Stago SAS nor
are the company's respective products authorized or endorsed by the other.
SYSMEXTM is a trademark or registered trademark of SYSMEX CORPORATION. Beckman

Coulter, Inc. is neither associated or affiliated with SYSMEX CORPORATION nor are the
company's respective products authorized or endorsed by the other.
Read all cautions and warnings to avoid foreseeable misuse.
Important
The DxA system can be configured to store images of tubes when operational. The
images can capture personally identifiable information (PPI), such as patient date of
birth, patient name, or other information. Do not use DxA as an image processing or
storage system. Store and process any images on a secondary system.
Intended Use/ Intended Purpose

DxA is a high-speed, modular, automated sample handling system that performs pre-
analytical and post-analytical sample processing and storage. The automation system also
sorts, routes, and presents sample tubes to analyzers for analysis. DxA also consolidates a
variety of analytical instruments, such as an immunoassay analyzer, into a unified
workstation on a track system.
For the Russian Market Only

• Contraindications: N/A
• Possible Side Effects: N/A
B78799AM xlv
Introduction
Intended Use/ Intended Purpose
xlvi B78799AM
CHAPTER 1
System Overview
System Overview
DxA 5000
The DxA 5000 system is a high-throughput, modular, automated sample handling system
which can perform the pre- and post-analytical processing of sample tubes.
Depending on the modules used in the specific configuration, throughput, features, and
connected analyzers will vary.
Refer to the Product Specifications document for connection configuration limitations. All
modules and analyzer connections must be validated and installed by Beckman Coulter.
Contact your Beckman Coulter Representative for support.
Figure 5 Basic DxA 5000 System
DxA 5000 can do the following:

• Identify and track samples
• Connect to a single or double centrifuge to perform centrifugation
• Perform sample decapping
• Deliver samples to connected analyzers
• Perform sample recapping
• Sort samples for output to offline storage
• Store samples online in one or two connected storage modules that may be either non-
refrigerated or refrigerated storage
• Automatically retrieve sample tubes from connected storage modules and output
regions (such as offline storage and offline analyzer regions) to perform repeat, reflex,
add-on or previously unavailable tests as directed by REMISOL Advance and
instrument status.
The DxA 5000 system connects to REMISOL Advance software, from which it receives test
order requests and information about test and analyzer availability. The DxA scheduling
software enables the DxA system to manage the workload and tube routing through the
system and to prioritize samples tagged as emergency.
DxA 5000 uses a 4-lane transport system. The two center lanes provide a travel circuit
while the outer two lanes are pull-off lanes for processing. T-sections permit branching
from a main trunk. The transport system connects the system modules, which can include
B78799AM 1-1
System Overview
Cybersecurity
input, centrifuge, rack builder modules (for AU5800 and DxH 900 analyzers), analyzers
with direct track sampling, output, and output with storage. Pre-analytical and analytical
instruments can be attached to either side of the track.
DxA 5000 has a customized tray feature that allows you to use racks from offline analyzers
on the DxA system.
DxA 5000 Fit is another configuration of the DxA 5000 family. Depending on the modules
used in the specific configuration, throughput, features and connected analyzers will vary.
Figure 6 DxA 5000 Fit System
Important
Direct sunlight can interfere with the correct operation of the system and affect bar
code label reading and liquid level detection. Shield the system modules from direct
sunlight.
Cybersecurity
Beckman Coulter has implemented certain Cybersecurity features for DxA 5000 to:
• protect and prevent misuse of sensitive data
• ensure the confidentiality, integrity and availability of the system
The Beckman Coulter Cybersecurity solution includes the following components:
• Windows Firewall: Used to restrict the availability of services, ports and protocols to
only those that are required for the proper function of the systems and applications.
The tool used for this component is the Windows Firewall that comes with the
Windows operating system.
Note
The Windows firewall must be enabled by default.

• Database Encryption: Used to secure databases, which use datasets that include
electronic protected health information (ePHI) data. Any kind of sensitive data that is
physically stored in a database file needs to be encrypted. The tool used for the
database encryption is NetLib Encryptionizer.
1-2 B78799AM
1
System Overview
The System Console
• Application Whitelisting: The mandatory solution used to provide protection from

malicious software. The tool used for the application whitelisting is the McAfee
Application Control software.
• Full Disk Encryption: Used to secure information that is stored on the hard drive. Also
here any kind of sensitive data that is physically stored on a device needs to be
®
encrypted. The tool used for the full disk encryption is BitLocker that comes with the
Windows operations system.
• Windows 10 Hardening: Used to secure the DxA system against malicious attacks.
Beckman Coulter configures the Windows 10 operating system used on the DxA
system and module consoles in accordance with industry best practices.
The System Console
System Console
The DxA screen displays the status of the system at a glance. The following sections
describe the main features of the DxA system console user interface. The module consoles
and their specific features are described in the module overviews.
The Dashboard and Dashboard Indicators
The dashboard is the bar at the top of the page that contains the Home, Menu, Consumables,
and Maintenance buttons, System and Samples dashboard indicators, and Sample Search
bar.
Work Area
Below the dashboard is the work area, which is made up of one or more tabs. This area is
where you perform most tasks.
The system displays information on tabbed pages. You can have multiple tabs open that
display the content of the pages selected from the menu and dashboard. This information
can include system status and configuration, as well as the samples processed by the
system .
System Status Bar
The system status bar at the bottom of the page shows the status of all connected modules
and analyzers.
Color Description
Green: The module or analyzer is running.
Yellow: The module or analyzer is paused or the

module is running with limitations.
B78799AM 1-3
System Overview
The System Console
Color Description
Red: The module or analyzer has an error.
Blue: The module or analyzer is starting up or not

active.
Gray: The module or analyzer is shut down.
Working with Tabs and Pages

Open a New Tab on the DxA 5000 Home Page
In most cases, when you select a menu item or dashboard button, a new tab opens. The tab
remains open until it is closed by the operator.
Close a Tab
Select the X at the top of the tab that you want to close.
Breadcrumb Navigation
Many pages provide breadcrumb trail navigation at the top of the page. The breadcrumb
trail represents the hierarchy of pages in the software. Most of these pages are linked to
parent pages. These might be pages that you have recently viewed, or related pages (such
as the patient history) that can be useful in the task you are working on. Select one of the
links in the breadcrumb trail to go to that page.
Note
Not all items in the breadcrumb trail are linked directly to one another.
Dashboard
The dashboard provides access to system menus and displays status information that you
require immediately.
Home
The home page shows the system layout of the transport system and all connected modules,
subsystems and analyzers. An asterisk next to a subsystem indicates that maintenance is
due.
The status of each module, subsystem, analyzer and transport system segment is indicated
by color. If a part of the system is red, the operator can identify where to take action to
resume full system operation. For definitions of each status color, refer to System Status
Bar.
1-4 B78799AM
1
System Overview
The System Console
Figure 7 Example of System Layout
Menu
The menu provides access to features of the DxA system that are not available through the
dashboard indicators. These options are available in the Menu.
• About: Displays information about the DxA software version.
• Audit Log: The audit log is a summary of all system activity. Refer to Audit Log.
• Module controls: Contains commands for the transport system and direct track
sampling analyzers, including pause, bypass, pause loading, deactivate, reinitialize, and
shut down commands. All other module controls are available on the module console.
These module controls are available: Pause Loading, Deactivate, and Bypass.
Important
If you restart DxA, the only function that remains enabled is Deactivate. If you
want Bypass or Pause Loading to still be enabled after a system restart, you will
need to set this up again after the restart.
— Pause Loading is used for temporary pauses during operations, such as when
loading analyzer reagents. If you select Pause Loading, sample tubes to be
processed in the RBU or DTS analyzer wait in a buffer of another module until
Pause Loading is deselected.
— Deactivate is used for longer system pauses during operations, such as resolving
hardware issues. If you select Deactivate, initialization is skipped for the module
and sample tubes are not routed to the module for processing. Select Deactivate if
the module cannot successfully recover from an error.
Important
If you select Deactivate, you must manually unload all sample tubes from the
module. To continue sample processing, place the sample tubes in the input
module or process the sample tubes offline.
— Bypass is used for long-term system pauses, such as daily analyzer maintenance. If
you select Bypass, sample tubes skip this processing step and move to the next
processing step.
Important
Do not select Bypass when the module is in error handling state.
If Bypass is selected when the module is in error handling state, manually unload
all sample tubes from the subsystem. Then, mark the sample tubes as removed on
B78799AM 1-5
System Overview
The System Console
the system console and place the sample tubes back into the input or process the
sample tubes offline.
• RMS Connector: The connection to ProService, which is set up by a Beckman Coulter
Representative.
• Shutdown: Guides the operator through a checklist of all tasks to shut down the system.
For detailed instructions, refer to Shutdown Procedure.
• Startup: Guides the operator through a checklist of all tasks to start up the system. For
detailed instructions, refer to Startup Procedure.
• System Configuration: Edit general configuration information (only available to system
super users). For a description of the options in system configuration, refer to System
Configuration.
• User Account Management: Set up and manage user accounts. Set password
requirements. These features are only accessible to super users.
• Languages: Selection of all available languages to change the system language.
Audit Log
The audit log is a log of all system activity. You can monitor system activity for all modules
and subsystems. You can filter the audit log to view system events related to a category of
event, subsystem, date or time range, and event initiator.
The log displays the following types of system activity:

• Configuration changes
• System updates
• Updates to the tube database
• User log in and log off attempts
• Maintenance task initiation and completion
• All events that appear on the System page and actions taken (Event Dismissed, Event
Reported)
To save the audit log, you can export it to a file. Select Export. Choose a directory to save the
file to and enter a file name. The file is saved in .CSV format and can be opened in Excel.
Select Refresh log to show the latest activity.
Consumables
Consumables is a dashboard indicator that shows the status of consumables for all modules
and subsystems. This information is also available on the module consoles.
The fill status displayed indicates two critical fill levels:
• Warning level (yellow arrow): Almost empty or full.
• Alert level (red arrow): Empty or full. System cannot continue sample processing.
Maintenance
• Maintenance tasks: Shows all maintenance tasks for the operator to complete,
frequency of the task and next due date.
• Maintenance log: Shows all completed maintenance tasks, task status, user, and date
and time completed.
The operator can filter for a date range to view all tasks completed in this period.
1-6 B78799AM
1
System Overview
The System Console
System
System is a dashboard indicator that shows the number of system events in the log directly
on the dashboard. Select System to go to the page with a list of all current system events.
For a list of all previous system events, refer to the Audit Log. Events are displayed in the list
with the affected subsystem, specific location, category (hardware or software), effect of the
error, description, and the date and time when the event occurred.
Some events are resolved automatically by the system. The operator needs to resolve or
dismiss certain events. Events that can be dismissed do not require operator action and
shall only be acknowledged by the operator. Events to be resolved require operator action,
such as opening covers or initializing a module. When an event is resolved, the number in
the log decreases.
The following list includes some examples of events:

• An error from a module, connected analyzer, or REMISOL Advance
• A REMISOL Advance order failure
For a full list of events, refer to Error Recovery.
Select an event in the list to view detailed instructions on error recovery.
Samples
Warning
Delay in processing urgent (STAT) samples. When the user configured timeouts are
exceeded, the system generates turnaround time (TAT) alerts. Regularly view the
system console to act on errors related to urgent sample processing.
Samples is a dashboard indicator that displays a list of samples that require extra handling
by an operator directly on the dashboard. Select Samples to go to the page that lists all
samples to be processed.
The list of actions includes overdue sample timers that are waiting for an order from
REMISOL Advance, samples routed to an error region, and other samples that require
intervention. If there are STAT samples in the list, the dashboard indicator background is
red. Move the cursor to the icons to refer to the number of STAT results on the Samples
Requiring Actions page.
Select a sample in the list to view more information about the sample.
For samples routed to an error region, click here to view a table where you can find more
information about the alert and how to resolve any issues.
If there is an error, you can view the cause. If you open a drawer and manually remove a
sample from the system, select Dismiss to remove the sample from the Sample Actions list.
Detailed Sample Log
Use the Sample Search to view the detailed sample log. Select Detailed sample log on the
sample tube information page. The system displays a detailed log of tube routing activities.
B78799AM 1-7
System Overview
The System Console
If you manually remove a sample from the system, Mark sample removed is available. Select
this option to confirm that the sample has been removed from the system.
Other Dashboard Elements
Sample Search
Figure 8 Sample search bar
Use the Sample Search bar to search for a specific sample. You can look up the results for a
patient sample if you know the patient ID, the sample ID, or the patient name. For more
information, refer to Sample Search.
Print Screen
Figure 9 Print Screen: Print the current page
Select Print Screen to print the elements displayed on the screen.
Help Button
Figure 10 Help: Access the system help
Select Help to display the help for a page.
User Account
Figure 11 User Account: Shows the user currently logged in
If your laboratory requires you to log on, the system displays your user name on the
dashboard. For more information, refer to Accounts Setup.
Date and Time Fields

The system displays the current date and time in the upper right corner of the screen.
Other Notifications and Alerts

In addition to the notifications provided on the dashboard, the system displays additional
information including error messages and task reminders. The following sections describe
these notification methods in more detail.
1-8 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Module Consoles
Error Messages
The system displays error messages either along the bottom of the page that you are
working on, or in a dialog. Select Dismiss, if available, to acknowledge the message and
dismiss it. For some errors, a link is included in the error message. Select this link to open
the appropriate page to resolve the issue.
Task Reminders Displayed in Configuration Pages
The system displays task reminders during some complex processes (for example,
configuration) to remind you of what you must do to complete a task. These task reminders
are displayed at the bottom of the page that you are working on. When you complete the
associated task, the system removes the reminder message.
Help Links in Lists

Some Event and Maintenance lists include links to the system help. Select the link to display
instructions about related tasks.
Module Consoles
Each DxA system module has a touch screen which is referred to as the module console. The
module console provides access to processing and configuration options specific to that
module.
For an overview of the specific features of each module console, refer to:
• Input Module
• Input Output Module
• Centrifuge Module
• Rack Builder Module
• Output Module
Module Console Menu: Configuration

On the consoles of the input module, the input output module, and the output module, you
can access the Configuration option by selecting Menu. Select Configuration to map drawers
from available profiles defined in the system configuration. Mapping drawers allows the
operator to decide what types of racks a drawer will contain. Remapping drawers will
depend on the lab workflow.
Refer to:
• Map Input Drawer Profiles
• Map Output Drawer Profiles
Module Controls
Module controls provide different options to perform module level actions on DxA modules.
For more information on the specific options and controls, refer to Module controls in the
following sections:
B78799AM 1-9
System Overview
Module Consoles
• Input Module
• Output Module
Module Cover Locks

Module cover locks shows the status of all module covers. Select Unlock module covers to
open the covers and access parts inside the module, for example to complete preventive
maintenance tasks.
Shut Down Module

Confirm that all processing cycles are complete and the module is ready to be shut down.
After the software is shut down, turn off the module power.
Subsystem Controls
Subsystem controls provide different options to perform subsystem level actions on DxA
modules. For more information on the specific options and controls, refer to Subsystem
controls in the following sections:
• Input Module
• Output Module
1-10 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Input Module
Input Module
The input module is used for loading sample tubes onto the system.
Figure 12 Input Module
1. Status light : This light indicates the status 7. Decapper robot

of the module. 8. Output drawer
2. Controlled-stop button: This button is 9. Rack distribution region
used to safely stop the module in certain 10. Input drawers
error situations. 11. Decapper drawer
3. Input console 12. Module power switch
4. Distribution tube robot 13. Cap waste container
5. Input tube robot
6. LED drawer-status light with drawer open
sensor button
Input Console
The following options are available on the input console:
• Home
B78799AM 1-11
System Overview
Input Module
— Manage drawer profiles

— Monitor the drawers
— View racks and samples on the racks
• Menu
— Configuration: Map drawers from available profiles defined in the system
configuration.
— Module controls: Deactivate or initialize the module.
Important
If you restart DxA, Deactivate remains enabled.
Deactivate is used for longer system pauses during operations, such as resolving
Important
— Module cover locks: Unlock the module covers for access.
— Shut down module
— Subsystem controls: Bypass a subsystem. If you select Bypass, sample tubes skip
this processing step and move to the next processing step.
Important
• Consumables: Shows the level of all consumables in the subsystem. The illustration
demonstrates where to refill the consumables.
• Maintenance:
— Maintenance tasks: Shows all maintenance tasks for the operator to complete,
— Maintenance log: Shows all completed maintenance tasks, task status, user, and
date and time completed.
• System: Shows all system alerts about events that can interfere with system operation.
Some events require the operator to follow steps on screen to resolve the issue.
• Samples: Shows all samples in the module that require action.
For instructions on operating the input console, refer to Input Module Procedures.
1-12 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Input Module
Input Tube Robot
Warning
Operator loading errors can cause delays in sample processing. The system cannot
process STAT samples with the necessary urgency if sample tubes are not loaded to
the correct input region. Load STAT sample tubes to an input region that is defined
with priority 1.
When a new rack or tray is introduced to the system, the system registers the RFID of the
rack or tray and the input tube robot moves to this position to pick up the tubes. The input
tube robot includes the tube inspection unit (TIU) and liquid level detection (LLD). The TIU
camera takes a picture of the tube and recognizes the sample container type, cap type and
cap color. The TIU also reads the bar code label. The DxA system calculates the tube volume
and weight based on the characteristics detected by the LLD component and tube
characteristics saved in the DxA tube database.
Each input region on the input drawers is assigned a level of priority, which determines the
order in which tubes are picked up. Samples with the highest priority are selected first and
followed by second priority. Within each priority, samples are picked up in the sequence of
the racks introduced in the system. The robot works from left to right and from the back to
the front across the rack.
The system assumes that new racks or trays introduced to the input drawers contain tubes.
If the input tube robot does not find tubes in several consecutive positions (the number is
defined in the system configuration), the input tube robot assumes the entire rack is empty
and moves on to the next rack.
When tubes are introduced to the system in the input module, these components execute
the following tasks:
• Measure sample tube size.
• Identify sample container type, cap type, and cap color.
• Measure sample volume. The tube weight is calculated using the fill level, and the tube
property is to allow for weight-balancing the centrifuge.
• Read the bar code label.
Important
Using transparent caps can lead to failure to recognize the cap color if the cap is
discolored by the sample.
Important
sunlight.
B78799AM 1-13
System Overview
Input Module
Distribution Tube Robot

After the input tube robot captures the tube data and places the tubes to the rack
distribution region, the distribution tube robot sorts the tubes to placement destinations:
• Centrifuge adapters for tubes to be sent to the centrifuge
• Transport if tubes are pre-spun or no centrifugation is required
• Sample in question region on the output drawer due to an error
REMISOL Advance sends test orders and level of urgency (e.g. STAT, ROUTINE) to the
system. The system compares all information sent by REMISOL Advance with the tube type
to ensure compatibility. The highest priority, STAT, is given to a tube determined by
REMISOL Advance information. Samples are selected for processing by sample priority,
arrival time, processing capability, and availability of downstream processes. Centrifuge
adapters are loaded so that the centrifuge rotor is balanced.
Drawer Areas and Racks
Note
Operators cannot access the rack distribution region when the system is running.
The input module has three input drawers and the rack distribution region. The operator
can load input racks with any mixture of sample tubes (CLSI Standard Auto 1, Sarstedt
tubes, tubes from 12x65 to 16x100mm in size ) onto the input drawers. Drawers are
divided into regions. An input region comprises whole racks. Initially, there are 2
distribution racks in the system.
The input tube robot sorts samples to racks in regions in order of priority for processing,
for example a region can be STAT with a high priority. Output drawer regions can include
whole racks, multiple racks, or a fraction of a rack. RFID tags identify and locate racks on
the drawer. Each drawer can hold any of the following combinations of rack sizes, among
other combinations:
• Two 6x14 racks (168 tubes per drawer)
• Four 6x6 racks (144 tubes per drawer)
• Customized trays of varying capacities
1-14 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Input Module
Figure 13 Distribution Racks
The available drawer profiles that define the types and combinations of racks on a drawer
are defined in the system configuration.
Input regions are given a priority and can also have assigned characteristics or process
instructions. All samples within a region take on the traits of the region. For example, a
process instruction can:
• Skip certain processes for samples, for example centrifugation.
• Route samples to predefined destinations, such as storage. If an input region has the
process instruction Storage, the system queries the host for all tests assigned to the
sample, routes the sample to the analyzers for the necessary testing and then routes
the sample to storage. If no test requests are open, the system routes the sample
directly to storage.
If a sample is reintroduced to the input module, the system resumes sample processing.
Note
The robot only picks up a sample that is reintroduced to the system if the system
detects a rack at a new position. Alternatively, the operator can select Revisit rack on
the input console.
Output Drawer on the Input Module

The input module contains an output drawer which can be configured for laboratory needs.
The system assumes that all racks placed by the operator on the output drawer do not
contain any tubes. The system assumes that all positions on racks stay the same when racks
remain in the same position on a drawer after the drawer is opened. An output drawer can
be configured in the input module for the following reasons:
• To remove individual samples or racks from the system
• To dispose of samples or racks
B78799AM 1-15
System Overview
Input Module
• To process on unconnected analyzers

• Samples in question: To correct issues that cause the rejection of sample tubes
Samples in question can be rejected for the following quality or processing reasons, among
others:
• Unreadable or defective bar code label
• Insufficient sample volume
• Tube type is not supported
• Cap type is not supported
• No test configured for the bar code in REMISOL Advance
• Physical dimensions are inconsistent with the dimensions assumed by the system
• Exceeded maximum fill level
• Incompatible test for tube type
• Unavailable processing step or analyzer test
Select the error region to see all samples in this region. Expand the error region on the
input console to view the reasons for rejection. Monitor the events on the system console
and select System to open information on error recovery.
Decapper
The decapper removes caps from sample tubes for analysis.
Figure 14 Decapper Components
1. Decapper robot 3. Waste chute

2. Tube clamp with tube clamp shields
1-16 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Input Module
Warning
Do not remove the decapper tube clamp shield cover when operating the system.
This cover provides protection from cross contamination when tubes stick to the
clamp due to residue.
Figure 15 Decapper Tube Clamp Shield Cover in Clear Plastic
The decapper is located in the input module or in the input output module. The decapper
has the following features:
• Decaps sample tubes with rubber caps, plastic lift off or push caps, or plastic screw
caps.
• Drops caps into the cap waste container.
• Detects errors when decapping sample tubes, such as:
— The cap could not fully be removed from the tube.
— The cap was lost on the way to the waste chute.
— The decapper could not unscrew a screw cap that was too tight.
• Supports any mixture of tube sizes.
• Includes tube clamp shields that can be removed for replacement or cleaning. These
shields prevent splashes or spillage of tube content.
• Includes waste chute that can be removed for replacement or cleaning.
• Automatically detects waste fill level and indicates the level on screen. When the waste
container is full, the operator is notified.
Input Regions for Centrifugation

You can load sample tubes into specific input regions, depending on centrifugation needs.
To create input regions on the system, refer to Create Input Regions.
The input regions for centrifugation:

• Centrifuge if needed: Sample tubes in this region are sent for centrifugation or not
based on the test order and the centrifugation state of the sample tube. Load most
sample tubes into this input region for centrifugation. No pre-sorting required.
Examples of sample tubes with test orders that require centrifugation:
B78799AM 1-17
System Overview
Input Output Module
— Pre-spun sample tubes with gel: Sample tubes skip centrifugation.

— Pre-spun sample tubes without gel: Sample tubes are sent for centrifugation,
because they could be sedimented.
— Unspun sample tubes with gel: Sample tubes are sent for centrifugation.
— Unspun sample tubes without gel: Sample tubes are sent for centrifugation,
unless they were previously centrifuged on a DxA system.
• Skip centrifuge: Sample tubes in this region are not sent for centrifugation. They can
either be pre-spun or they might not require centrifugation.
Note
If the test order requires the sample tubes to be spun, any unspun sample tubes in
the Skip centrifuge region are either sent to the error region or sent for
centrifugation.
Examples of sample tubes with test orders that require no centrifugation:

— Pre-spun sample tubes with gel: Sample tubes skip centrifugation.
— Pre-spun sample tubes without gel: Sample tubes skip centrifugation, unless the
serum volume is below the ratio check percentage, in which case the sample goes
to the error region.
— Secondary tubes (open sample tubes, push cap sample tubes, or aliquots) without
historical data: Sample tubes skip centrifugation. Set the ratio check at 90% or
higher.
— Quality control (QC) sample tubes without gel: Sample tubes skip centrifugation.
• Force centrifuge: Sample tubes in this region are sent for centrifugation. You can use
this input region for sample tubes that were poorly centrifuged or their processing was
accidentally interrupted.
Warning
The process instruction Force centrifuge ensures all tubes that are loaded to this
region are centrifuged. Use Force centrifuge with care to prevent tubes being
centrifuged more than once.
Note
If the test configuration requires sample tubes to be unspun, the centrifuge

process instruction Force centrifuge is overruled.
Input Output Module

The input output module is a two-in-one module that performs both input and output
module functions as part of the DxA 5000 Fit system configuration. A connected single-
centrifuge module is optional.
The input output module is used for the following:
1-18 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Input Output Module
• Loading sample tubes onto the DxA system and distributing them to their target
destination.
• Collecting sample tubes for removal from the system, either for manual disposal or
offline processing.
Figure 16 Input Output Module
1. Status light : This light indicates the status 8. Decapper robot

of the module. 9. Input drawers with LED drawer-status
2. Input output console lights and blue drawer open sensor
3. Controlled-stop button: This button is buttons
used to safely stop the module in certain 10. Output drawers with LED drawer-status
error situations. lights and white drawer open sensor
4. Input output tube robot buttons
5. Distribution drawer 11. Module power switch
6. Blue base frames for the input drawers 12. Cap waste container
7. Black base frames for the output drawers
Drawer Areas in the Input Output Module
Note
Operators cannot access the rack distribution region when the system is running.
B78799AM 1-19
System Overview
Input Output Module
Warning
Do not load filled racks onto an output drawer. Robot errors caused by sample tube
collision can lead to sample spillage.
To help you distinguish the input drawers from the output drawers, the input output
module has:
• Blue base frames for the input drawers, with blue drawer open sensor buttons
• Black base frames for the output drawers, with white drawer open sensor buttons
The IOM drawer configuration can be one of the following:
• one distribution drawer, 3 input drawers (blue), and 3 output drawers (black)
Figure 17 Input Output Module Drawer Configuration (3+3)
• one distribution drawer, 2 input drawers (blue), and 4 output drawers (black)
Figure 18 Input Output Module Drawer Configuration (2+4)
Input Output Workflow

The input output module has a decapper robot and an input output tube robot that
performs both input and output functions. Racks and customized trays with sample tubes
are loaded into the system. The tube robot captures sample tube data, then it sorts the
1-20 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Input Output Module
sample tubes to their respective destinations for processing. The decapper robot removes
caps from sample tubes which are then sent to analyzers for analysis.
After sample tube analysis is completed, sample tubes return to the input output module
and are placed in the output drawer for removal from the system.
Any sample tubes that require reprocessing are retrieved from the output drawers for
further testing (repeat, reflex, add-on).
Sample Tubes and Rack Sizes

You can load input racks with any mixture of sample tubes (CLSI Standard Auto 1, Sarstedt
tubes, tubes from 12x65 to 16x100mm in size) into the input drawers. You can load
customized trays that can contain only one type of analyzer rack into the input drawers.
Drawers are divided into regions. An input region includes whole racks. The available
drawer profiles that define the types and combinations of racks on a drawer are defined in
the system configuration.
Each drawer can hold any of the following combinations of racks and trays, among other
combinations:
• Customized trays of varying capacities
Input Region Priority and Process Instructions

Each input region on the input drawers is assigned a level of priority, which determines the
order in which tubes are picked up. Within each priority, samples are picked up in the
sequence of the racks introduced in the system. The tube robot works from left to right and
from the rear to the front across the rack. Refer to Input Regions.
Warning
Operator loading errors can cause delays in sample processing. The system cannot
process STAT samples with the necessary urgency if sample tubes are not loaded to
the correct input region. Load STAT sample tubes to an input region that is defined
with priority 1.
Input regions are also assigned process instructions. A process instruction can:
• Skip certain processes for samples, for example centrifugation. Refer to Input Regions
for Centrifugation.
• Route samples to pre-defined destinations.
Capturing Sample Tube Data

When you introduce a new rack or tray to the system, the system registers the RFID of the
rack or tray and the tube robot moves to the rack or tray position to pick up the tubes. If the
tube robot does not find tubes in several consecutive positions on the rack, it assumes the
entire rack is empty and moves on to the next rack. If a sample is reintroduced to the input
output module, the system resumes sample processing.
B78799AM 1-21
System Overview
Input Output Module
Note
If a drawer is opened and closed, the system assumes that sample tube positions have
not changed for the racks that are in the same drawer positions as before.
Note
The tube robot only picks up a sample that is reintroduced to the system if the system
detects a rack at a new position. Alternatively, you can select Revisit rack on the
module console.
The tube robot includes the tube inspection unit (TIU) and liquid level detection (LLD)
component. These components execute the following tasks:
• Measure sample tube size.
• Identify sample container type, cap type, and cap color.
• Measure sample volume. The system calculates the tube volume and weight based on
the characteristics detected by the LLD component and tube characteristics saved in
the DxA tube database. This information allows for weight-balancing the centrifuge
rotor.
• Read the bar code label.
Important
Using transparent caps can lead to failure to recognize the cap color if the cap is
discolored by the sample.
Important
sunlight.
REMISOL Advance sends test orders and level of urgency (for example STAT, ROUTINE) to
the system. The system compares all information sent by REMISOL Advance with the tube
type to ensure compatibility. The highest priority, STAT, is given to tubes determined by
REMISOL Advance information. Samples are selected for processing by sample priority,
arrival time, processing capability, and availability of downstream processes.
Sorting Destinations
After the tube robot captures the tube data, it places the sample tubes onto the rack
distribution drawer, then sorts the sample tubes to one of the following destinations:
• Centrifuge adapters (sample tubes to be sent for centrifugation)
• Transport (pre-spun sample tubes or sample tubes with no centrifugation required)
• Error regions on output drawers (sample tube error)
1-22 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Input Output Module
Error Regions
Samples in question are sent to error regions on the output drawers. They can be rejected
for the following quality or processing reasons, among others:
• Unreadable or defective bar code label
• Insufficient sample volume
• Tube type is not supported
• Cap type is not supported
• No test configured for the bar code in REMISOL Advance
• Physical dimensions are inconsistent with the dimensions assumed by the system
• Exceeded maximum fill level
• Incompatible test for tube type
• Unavailable processing step or analyzer test
Select the error region to see all samples in this region. Expand the error region on the
module console to view the reasons for rejection. Monitor the events on the system console
and select System to open information on error recovery.
Samples for Removal

After sample processing on the DxA system, the output drawers collect sample tubes for:
• Manual disposal
• Offline processing
• Offline storage
Output drawer regions can include whole racks, multiple racks, or a fraction of a rack.
Customized trays must have only one output drawer region defined. While the sample tube
is still on the system, the system can perform sample reprocessing. For more information
on output drawer configuration, refer to Output Drawer Profiles.
If no sample tubes arrive at an output rack within the configured amount of time, a green
dot is displayed in the upper right corner of the rack on the module console. The green dot
indicates that the rack is ready for removal. Adding more sample tubes to an output rack
resets the waiting time for that rack. The likelihood of a necessary reprocessing of sample
tubes within this rack is low.
Figure 19 Rack Ready for Removal
The system assumes that all racks and customized trays you place on the output drawers
are empty of sample tubes. You can manually transfer the racks from output drawers to
offline storage.
B78799AM 1-23
System Overview
Input Output Module
Sample Centrifugation
If your system is configured with a connected centrifuge, refer to Input Regions for
Centrifugation.
Input Output Console

The following options are available on the input output console:
• Home
• Menu
configuration.
Important
Important
Important
• Maintenance:
1-24 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Input Output Module
Decapper
The decapper removes caps from sample tubes for analysis.
Figure 20 Decapper Components
1. Decapper robot 3. Waste chute

2. Tube clamp with tube clamp shields
Warning
Do not remove the decapper tube clamp shield cover when operating the system.
This cover provides protection from cross contamination when tubes stick to the
clamp due to residue.
B78799AM 1-25
System Overview
Centrifuge Module
The decapper is located in the input module or in the input output module. The decapper
has the following features:
• Decaps sample tubes with rubber caps, plastic lift off or push caps, or plastic screw
caps.
• Drops caps into the cap waste container.
• Detects errors when decapping sample tubes, such as:
— The cap could not fully be removed from the tube.
— The cap was lost on the way to the waste chute.
— The decapper could not unscrew a screw cap that was too tight.
• Supports any mixture of tube sizes.
• Includes tube clamp shields that can be removed for replacement or cleaning. These
shields prevent splashes or spillage of tube content.
• Includes waste chute that can be removed for replacement or cleaning.
• Automatically detects waste fill level and indicates the level on screen. When the waste
container is full, the operator is notified.
Centrifuge Module
There are two types of centrifuge modules available:
• a single centrifuge module containing one centrifuge device
• a dual centrifuge module containing two centrifuge devices
1-26 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Centrifuge Module
The centrifuge device is temperature controlled and it spins liquid samples at high speed.
Figure 22 Single Centrifuge Module
1. Status light : This light indicates the status 3. Centrifuge console

of the module. 4. Adapter handler robot
2. Controlled-stop button: This button is 5. Centrifuge tube robot
used to safely stop the module in certain 6. LED drawer-status light with drawer open
error situations. It only stops the tube sensor button
robots in the centrifuge module. The 7. Centrifuge drawer
centrifuge rotor continues to spin. 8. Centrifuge module power switch
B78799AM 1-27
System Overview
Centrifuge Module
Figure 23 Dual Centrifuge Module
1. Status light : This light indicates the status 6. Left centrifuge: LED drawer-status light
of the module. with drawer open sensor button
2. Controlled-stop button: This button is 7. Right centrifuge: LED drawer-status light
used to safely stop the module in certain with drawer open sensor button
error situations. 8. Centrifuge module power switch
3. Centrifuge console 9. Left centrifuge drawer
4. Adapter handler robot 10. Right centrifuge drawer
5. Centrifuge tube robot 11. Storage drawer
Centrifuge Console
The following options are available on the centrifuge console menu:
• Home:
— View centrifuge performance data (spin time remaining, spin force, spin speed,
temperature)
— Cancel spin
• Menu
1-28 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Centrifuge Module
Important
Important
— Subsystem controls: Bypass
If you select Bypass, samples skip this processing step and move to the next
processing step.
Important
— Subsystem controls: Deactivate
The Deactivate feature is only available for the left centrifuge. You can use the
Deactivate feature if the module cannot successfully recover from an error.
If you select Deactivate, initialization is skipped for the subsystem and sample
tubes are not routed to the subsystem for processing.
To deactivate the left centrifuge, do the following:
1. Select Deactivate.
2. If there is an adapter in the swap position on the left centrifuge, move the
adapter back to the empty position on the left centrifuge shuttle or into the
left centrifuge.
B78799AM 1-29
System Overview
Centrifuge Module
Figure 24 Moving the Adapter Back to an Empty Position on the Left Centrifuge
Shuttle or into the Left Centrifuge
3. Remove all sample tubes from the centrifuge adapters on the left centrifuge
shuttle and in the left centrifuge.
4. Push the left centrifuge shuttle back to the input position on the right side.
• Maintenance:
Centrifuge Adapters
The centrifuge adapters are devices that hold sample tubes for centrifugation.
The system balances the sample tube load automatically by distributing sample tubes
between the adapters in the rotor buckets. For more information, see Centrifuge Adapters.
Rotor Buckets and Centrifuge Load Balancing

For correct load-balancing in the centrifuge device, it is important that the rotor chamber
buckets are placed correctly in the centrifuge device. As sometimes the weight of the
buckets can vary slightly, incorrect placement can cause an imbalance in the centrifuge
device. The rotor chamber buckets in the centrifuge device have their weight engraved on
1-30 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Centrifuge Module
the bottom. Buckets of equal weight (plus or minus five grams) must be placed across from
each other.
Figure 25 Rotor Buckets Showing the Engraved Weight
1. Engraved weight on the bottom of the bucket.

2. Buckets of the same weight (plus or minus five grams) must be placed across from each
other.
Centrifuge Adapter Shuttle

The centrifuge adapter shuttle moves the centrifuge adapters from the input area to the
centrifuge. The adapter handler robot loads and unloads the centrifuge adapters into the
centrifuge. After centrifugation, the centrifuge tube robot loads the tubes into a sample
carrier on the transport for processing. The centrifuge chamber is refrigerated so that
samples can be spun at recommended temperatures.
B78799AM 1-31
System Overview
Centrifuge Module
Figure 26 Centrifuge Deck on a Dual Centrifuge Module
1. Adapter shuttle that provides centrifuge adapters to the right centrifuge

2. Adapter shuttle that provides centrifuge adapters to the left centrifuge
Centrifuge Profile
Operators can edit the centrifuge profile according to laboratory requirements. Global
recommendations for centrifugation can vary widely. Beckman Coulter recommends the
following centrifuge profile settings for use with the DxA system based on internal studies.
Warning
Validate all centrifugation profiles before usage.
Important
When changing the centrifugation profile, the change will be displayed correctly, but it
will not be applied without a system restart. Restart the system after changing the
centrifugation profile.
Parameter Recommended value

Spin force (g) 4,000
Time (minutes) 4*
Acceleration profile 9
Deceleration profile 9
Cooling set point (°C) 20
1-32 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Centrifuge Module
Note
* The time includes the time required for acceleration (about 30 seconds). The
centrifuge spins for about 3 minutes and 30 seconds at 4,000g. The time required for
deceleration (about 30 seconds) is not included in the 4 minutes specified here. The
total spin time from start to stop is about 4 minutes and 30 seconds.
Centrifugation Logic
The DxA system decides whether to send sample tubes for centrifugation considering the
following:
• Which input region is the sample tube in?
• Does the sample tube have a gel separator?
• Which is the spun state of the sample tube?
• Which spun state does the test order require?
Centrifugation Decision Criteria
When a sample tube is introduced into the DxA system for the first time, the system makes
a centrifugation decision for the sample tube based on the following:
• Input region: Centrifuge if needed, Skip centrifuge, or Force centrifuge. For more
information, refer to Input Regions for Centrifugation.
• Centrifugation state: Without historical data from a previous run on the system, the
liquid level detection (LLD) component or the configured ratio check detect the
centrifugation state of the sample tube.
— Sample tubes with gel: If a gel layer separates the serum from the clotted blood,
the sample tube is pre-spun. If the gel layer is at the bottom of the sample tube, the
sample tube is unspun.
— Sample tube without gel: The ratio check for the serum percentage determines
the centrifugation state of the sample tube. For more information on how to
configure the ratio check for each tube type, refer to Evaluate ratio check without
historical data? in Configure Sample Container Types.
• Test order: You can configure how many times a sample tube must be centrifuged for
each specific test. For more information, refer to Required Centrifugation State in
Manage Tests.
When a sample tube is reintroduced into the DxA system, the system makes a
centrifugation decision for the sample tube based on the same criteria listed, except that
the centrifugation state information for the sample tube is known. This information is part
of historical data from the previous run on the system.
Safety Instructions
B78799AM 1-33
System Overview
Centrifuge Module
To achieve correct centrifugation of sample tubes, consider the following safety

instructions:
Warning
A reliable centrifugation state detection for spun sample tubes with gel separator can
be performed only if a sample draw volume is equal to or larger than the gel
separator volume. Sample tubes where the sample draw volume is less than the gel
separator volume might be detected as unspun. To avoid recentrifugation, load pre-
spun samples where the sample draw volume is lower than the gel separator volume
to the Skip centrifuge region.
Warning
The DxA feature for centrifugation state detection can be used with the following
manufacturer's tube types:
• Becton Dickinson (BD)
• Greiner
All other tube types should be loaded to Force centrifuge or Skip centrifuge regions.
Warning
An unspun sample tube might be falsely detected as pre-spun due to incorrect label
placement. In this case, an unspun sample tube will not be centrifuged. Confirm that
the bottom area of the sample tube containing gel is not covered by labels.
Alternatively, for any unspun sample tubes with labels covering the bottom area
containing gel, only use a configured Force centrifuge region.
Note
Only sample tubes that are sealed with the original cap can be centrifuged on the DxA
system.
Examples of Centrifugation Decisions
The following tables show different sample tube scenarios and the corresponding
centrifugation decisions:
Table 7 Sample Tubes With Gel (First Time on the System)
IF... THEN...
Sample is in the Spun state at loading is Test order requirements Sample is routed
following input region to
Centrifuge if needed Unspun 1X (spun once) Centrifugation
Centrifuge if needed Pre-spun (1X offline) Unspun Error region
1-34 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Centrifuge Module
Table 7 Sample Tubes With Gel (First Time on the System) (Continued)
IF... THEN...
Sample is in the Spun state at loading is Test order requirements Sample is routed
following input region to
Centrifuge if needed Pre-spun (1X offline) 1X (spun once) No centrifugation.

System assumes
offline processing
was 1X.
Centrifuge if needed Pre-spun (1X offline) 2X (spun twice) No centrifugation.

System assumes
offline processing
was 2X.
Force Centrifuge Pre-spun (1X offline) 1X (spun once) or 2X (spun Centrifugation (1X)
twice)
Table 8 Sample Tubes With Gel (Reintroduced)

IF... THEN...
Sample is in the Spun state at loading is Test order requirements Sample is routed to
following input region
Centrifuge if needed Pre-spun (1X tube 1X (spun once) No centrifugation

history)
Centrifuge if needed Pre-spun (2X tube 1X (spun once) No centrifugation

history)
Centrifuge if needed Pre-spun (1X tube 2X (spun twice) Error region

history)
Centrifuge if needed Pre-spun (2X tube 2X (spun twice) No centrifugation

history)
Skip centrifuge Pre-spun (1X or 2X tube 1X (spun once) or 2X (spun No centrifugation

history) twice)
Force centrifuge Pre-spun (1X tube 2X (spun twice) Centrifugation

history)
Centrifuge if needed Pre-spun (1X or 2X tube Unspun Error region

or Skip centrifuge history)
B78799AM 1-35
System Overview
Centrifuge Module
Table 9 Sample Tubes Without Gel (First Time on the System)

IF... THEN...
Input region Centrifugation state Test order

(from ratio check)
Centrifuge if needed Pre-spun 1X (spun once) or 2X (spun Centrifugation

twice)
Skip centrifuge Pre-spun 1X (spun once) or 2X (spun No centrifugation

twice)
Centrifuge if needed Unspun 1X (spun once) or 2X (spun Centrifugation

twice)
Skip centrifuge Unspun 1X (spun once) or 2X (spun Error region

twice)
Centrifuge if needed Unspun Unspun No centrifugation

or Skip centrifuge
Centrifuge if needed Pre-spun Unspun Error region

or Skip centrifuge
Table 10 Sample Tubes Without Gel (Reintroduced)

IF... THEN...
Input region Centrifugation state Test order

(from historical data)
Centrifuge if needed Pre-spun 1X (spun once) No centrifugation
Centrifuge if needed Pre-spun 2X (spun twice) Centrifugation
1-36 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Rack Builder Module
Rack Builder Module

The rack builder module (RBU) connects the transport system to analyzers that process
sample tubes in racks. There are two rack builder types and each one is shown in the
images below.
Figure 27 Rack Builder Module for the AU5800
1. Cover, back 5. Rack buffer

2. Status light 6. Rack transfer unit
3. Rack builder console 7. Rack builder power switch
4. Rack builder tube robot
B78799AM 1-37
System Overview
Rack Builder Module
Figure 28 Rack Builder Module for the DxH 900
1. Cover, back 5. Rack buffer

2. Status light 6. Rack transfer unit
3. Rack builder console 7. Rack builder power switch
4. Rack builder tube robot
1-38 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Rack Builder Module
Figure 29 View of Components inside Rack Builder Module for AU5800
1. Rack transfer unit

2. Rack buffer
Figure 30 Inside Rack Builder Module for AU5800
Warning
Do not place sample tubes manually in the rack builder. Always introduce tubes in
racks to the input module for processing. If there are tubes in the system that have
not been processed through the input module, the system can place an open tube
into another tube and cause a sample spill. This can result in a biohazard risk, cross
contamination or a loss of the sample.
Rack-based analyzers cannot be connected directly to the transport system and they
require a rack builder. The rack builder tube robot removes sample tubes from the sample
tube carriers and places them into analyzer-specific racks, each having a unique identifier
bar code. The available analyzer racks are as follows:
RBU Type Number of Rack Positions in Rack Buffer
AU5800 27
DxH 900 24
STA R Max 24
The rack transfer unit within the rack builder moves the filled racks from the rack buffer
lanes to the input lane (shown below) of the connected analyzer. The rack bar code label is
read by the bar code reader on the rack transfer unit and by the analyzer.
B78799AM 1-39
System Overview
Rack Builder Module
When the rack is processed and sample aspirations are completed within the analyzer, the
rack is moved to the output lane of the analyzer. The rack transfer unit retrieves the
processed rack from the output lane of analyzer and moves it to a rack buffer lane. During
the rack transfer from the output lane (shown below) of the analyzer to the rack buffer
lane, the rack bar code label is read again to confirm the samples in the rack. The processed
samples remain in a buffer lane until the analytical results are available. The waiting time in
the buffer lanes contributes to high system throughput by minimizing tube routing
activities for repeat, reflex and add-on testing. The waiting time for the results can be
configured.
If a particular sample requires repeat, reflex or add-on testing, the rack builder tube robot
picks up that particular sample tube from the processed rack and places it in a rack
destined for the analyzer. If no repeat, reflex or add-on testing is ordered, the rack builder
tube robot picks up the sample tube from the processed rack and places it in a sample
carrier.
Figure 31 Input and Output Lanes of the AU5800 Rack Builder Module
1-40 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Rack Builder Module
Figure 32 Input and Output Lanes of the DxH 900 Rack Builder Module
1. Input lane: Tubes going into the analyzer

2. Output lane: Tubes coming out from the analyzer
B78799AM 1-41
System Overview
Rack Builder Module
Figure 33 Input-Output Lane of the STA R Max Rack Builder Module
Note
The STA R Max analyzer has only one lane which doubles as the input and output lane
for sample processing. The STA R Max RBU also has one input-output lane and does not
feature a dedicated rack pusher robot component. The extended pusher pin move racks
from the RBU to the analyzer.
1-42 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Rack Builder Module
Analyzer Rack Types

There are different analyzer racks used for the different analyzer types. The images below
show the analyzer racks and the identifying labels for each.
Figure 34 Rack Identifier on an AU5800 Rack
Note
The numbers of the bar code labels on AU racks must correspond to the correct rack
builder module (RBU). For one RBU (RBU1), use labels in the range 101 to 140. For a
second RBU (RBU2), use labels in the range 201 to 240.
Figure 35 Rack Identifier on a DxH 900 Rack
B78799AM 1-43
System Overview
Rack Builder Module
Note
Duplicate identifiers on any of the analyzer racks create errors in the system. Be careful
not to use the same identifiers on any of the racks.
Figure 36 Rack Identifier on the STA R Max Rack
Note
Use only DxA-labeled racks, as shown in the image above on the left. The DxA label
should not cover any part of the rack ID number.
Workflow Identification for Analyzer Racks
Warning
Risk of spillage or delay when using the wrong analyzer rack type. Only use analyzer
racks that are identified for use on DxA.
1-44 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Rack Builder Module
The rack builder module (RBU) must only contain analyzer racks with the DxA label.
Analyzer racks for manual analyzer workflow should not have the DxA label.
Figure 37 AU5800 Analyzer Racks Labeling for DxA
1. AU5800 analyzer rack for manual analyzer workflow (analyzer-only intended use)
2. AU5800 analyzer rack for automation workflow (DxA intended use)
Figure 38 DxH 900 Analyzer Racks Labeling for DxA
1. DxH 900 analyzer rack for manual analyzer workflow (analyzer-only intended use)
2. DxH 900 analyzer rack for automation workflow (DxA intended use)
B78799AM 1-45
System Overview
Rack Builder Module
Figure 39 STA R Max Analyzer Racks Labeling for DxA
1. STA R Max rack for manual analyzer workflow (analyzer-only intended use)
2. STA R Max rack for automation workflow (DxA intended use)
Emergency Samples (STAT)

If a sample is tagged as emergency (STAT) in REMISOL Advance, the rack builder tube robot
places the sample in an emergency rack. Emergency racks are loaded onto the analyzer
with priority.
Rack Builder Console

The following options are available on the rack builder console:
• Home: View the status of analyzer racks in process.
• Menu
— Module controls: Contains commands to deactivate or initialize the module and
pause loading to the module.
Important
If you restart DxA, the only function that remains enabled is Deactivate. If you
want Pause Loading to still be enabled after a system restart, you will need to
set this up again after the restart.
Pause Loading is used for temporary pauses during operations, such as when
loading analyzer reagents. If you select Pause Loading, sample tubes to be
1-46 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Rack Builder Module
processed in the RBU or DTS analyzer wait in a buffer of another module until
Pause Loading is deselected.
Important
Important
• Maintenance:
B78799AM 1-47
System Overview
Rack Builder Module
STA R Max
STA R Max analyzer connects to DxA through the rack builder module (RBU). This section
includes useful information to consider before you begin maintenance and error recovery
procedures when a STA R Max analyzer is connected to DxA.
Caution, Warning and Important Notes

Follow the safety precaution and important notes stated below:
Caution
While the system is in operation, do not put your hands into the transfer lane of the
RBU. Any form of collision with the rack can lead to injury or sample spillage. Stay
clear of the transfer lane between the RBU and STA R Max analyzer.
Warning
Risk of delay in sample processing due to samples sitting inside the analyzer. As the
STA R Max analyzer uses the standard lab interface protocol (ASTM protocol),
Beckman Coulter recommends:
• Regularly checking the analyzer console for missing consumables or other maintenance
issues.
• Consulting the delay list on the Remisol Advance dashboard.
Important
Risk of damaging the extended pusher pin. A damaged pusher pin can lead to rack
positioning error, delay in sample processing, and the module may require service
intervention to recover. Ensure that the pusher pin is fully retracted while manually
moving the RTU along the X-axis.
Important
Do not attempt to load sample tubes directly on the input-output lane. Beckman
Coulter recommends that you use the manual input tray. For more information about
how to use the manual input tray, refer to the STA R Max user manual.
DxA Communication with STA R Max

DxA uses the standard communication protocol for all information exchange with STA R
Max. For more information, refer to Communication Protocols.
To acknowledge unreasonable delay, do the following:

• Monitor maintenance issues such as depletion of test kits and general consumables
directly on the analyzer console.
• Monitor the STATUS beacon of the analyzer.
• Check the REMISOL Advance dashboard regularly to view delayed tests.
1-48 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Output Module
Special Considerations for Error Recovery

• The STA R Max RBU does not feature a dedicated rack pusher robot component. The
extended pusher pin move racks from the RBU to the analyzer.
• STA R Max has only one lane which doubles as the input and output lane for sample
processing. The STA R Max RBU also has one input-output lane, refer to the overview of
the Rack Builder Module.
Note
Errors on one of the modules (for example, input module, centrifuge, RBU, and output
module) can only be resolved on the module console.
Output Module
The output module unloads sample tubes from the system to the connected storage module
or to output destinations for manual offline processing.
Figure 40 Output Module with Storage
1. Status light : This light indicates the status 6. Output drawers

of the module. 7. Recapper deck with push cap feeder
2. Controlled-stop button: This button is 8. Storage rack builder and tube waste
used to safely stop the module in certain disposal
error situations. 9. Recapper push cap drawer
3. Output console 10. Sample waste containers
4. Recapper 11. Storage module
5. Output tube robot
A single DxA system can have up to two output modules. Each output module may have one
connected storage module.
The output module can be configured in the following ways:
B78799AM 1-49
System Overview
Output Module
• One recapper and 8 output drawers. No storage module connected.

• One recapper, one storage module, and 5 output drawers. In this configuration, three of
the drawers are replaced by the storage rack builder, which includes sample tube
disposal chutes.
The output tube robot also unloads expired samples from storage racks for disposal.
Samples can be disposed of at a set time automatically to a waste container. For more
information, refer to Storage Sample Management
If no sample tubes arrive at an output rack for a certain amount of time, a green dot is
displayed in the upper right corner of the rack on the module console. The green dot
indicates that the rack is ready for removal. Adding more sample tubes to an output rack
resets the waiting time for that rack.
Figure 41 Rack Ready for Removal
For samples intended for offline (non-DxA) storage, drawers can be defined as ambient,
refrigerate, freeze or deep freeze storage. You can then manually transfer the racks from
drawers to offline storage. The output module can be connected to an environmentally
controlled storage device by a storage rack builder unit. The samples can be retrieved from
storage, placed onto the warm-up positions (if necessary before analysis), and routed on
the transport system for further testing.
1-50 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Output Module
Figure 42 Placing Sample Tubes on Buffer Racks
Warning
Beckman Coulter recommends storing samples with caps as best practice.
Figure 43 View Inside of the Output Module and Storage Rack Builder
1. Buffer positions for samples 3. Tube waste disposal chutes of the storage
2. Warm-up positions for samples that are rack builder
retrieved from the storage module
Output Console
The following options are available on the output console menu:
B78799AM 1-51
System Overview
Output Module
• Home:
• Menu
configuration.
If you select Deactivate, initialization is skipped for the module and sample tubes
are not routed to the module for processing. Select Deactivate if the module cannot
successfully recover from an error.
Important
If you select Deactivate, manually remove all storage racks from the storage
rack builder unit (SRBU) and manually unload all the sample tubes from the
module except the sample tubes in the ECSD. To continue sample processing,
place the sample tubes in the input module or process the sample tubes
offline.
— Subsystem controls: Bypass
If you select Bypass, samples skip this processing step and move to the next
processing step.
Important
— Subsystem controls: Deactivate
The Deactivate feature is only available for the storage. You can use the Deactivate
feature if the module cannot successfully recover from an error.
If you select Deactivate, initialization is skipped for the subsystem and sample
tubes are not routed to the subsystem for processing.
Important
If you select Deactivate, manually remove all storage racks from the storage
rack builder unit (SRBU) and manually unload all the sample tubes from the
module except the sample tubes in the ECSD. To continue sample processing,
1-52 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Output Module
place the sample tubes in the input module or process the sample tubes
offline.
• Maintenance:
For instructions on operating the module console, refer to Output Module Procedures .
Recapper
The recapper places caps on sample tubes before the system routes them to a location
configured for capped sample tubes. Recapping prevents spills, helps to avoid sample
contamination and reduces evaporation. The push cap feeder provides the push caps to the
recapper robot.
Storage Module
The storage module is an environmentally controlled storage device (ECSD) with a
controlled temperature range between 4°C and 12°C.
There are two types of storage module available:

• a small storage module with a maximum capacity of 65 racks (6825 sample tubes)
• a large storage module with a maximum capacity of 130 racks (13650 sample tubes)
B78799AM 1-53
System Overview
DxA System Racks
The storage module also provides access to storage racks for the operator to move racks to
an offline storage location.
Figure 44 Small Storage
DxA System Racks

DxA system racks hold sample tubes upright for access by the robots. This section describes
the racks used for sample tube processing on the DxA system:
• Standard Racks
• Distribution Racks
• Buffer Racks
• Centrifuge Adapters
• Storage Racks
• Customized Trays
1-54 B78799AM
1
System Overview
DxA System Racks
Standard Racks
Standard racks are used in the input module to introduce tubes into the system. There are
two types of standard racks used for sample processing on the DxA system:
• 6x6 standard rack, shown in the image below (1)
• 6x14 standard rack, shown in the image below (2)
Figure 45 Standard Racks
Each input drawer can hold various combinations of standard racks, such as:
• Two 6x6 racks and one 6x14 rack (156 tubes per drawer)
You can load standard racks into the following modules:
• Input module
• Output module
• Input output module
The input tube robot picks up sample tubes from left to right, starting with position 1A on
the standard rack. If no sample tubes are detected in three consecutive positions, the input
tube robot assumes the entire rack is empty and moves on to the next rack. For more
information on how to load racks, refer to Fill and Load racks.
B78799AM 1-55
System Overview
DxA System Racks
Figure 46 Standard Rack Orientation
1. Position 1A on the rack. The input tube robot begins picking up sample tubes from this
position.
2. Point of contact on the base frame. This indicates the correct orientation and that the rack
is correctly placed on the base frame.
Lifespan of Standard Racks

The average lifespan of a standard rack is two years. It is recommended to replace the
standard racks on your system after two years. Refer to Replace the Racks.
Distribution Racks
Distribution racks are located in the input module. When you place a standard rack with
sample tubes into the input module, the input tube robot takes the sample tubes from the
standard rack and places them into the distribution racks.
The distribution tube robot takes the sample tubes from the distribution racks and sort
them according to the test order. Sample tubes are sorted to one of the following
destinations:
• Transport
• Error region
• Centrifuge shuttle
1-56 B78799AM
1
System Overview
DxA System Racks
Figure 47 Distribution Rack
Figure 48 Distribution Racks in the Input Module
The input module is designed to accommodate only two distribution racks.
Note
Do not remove distribution racks from the module. They are considered internal buffer
racks.
B78799AM 1-57
System Overview
DxA System Racks
Lifespan of Distribution Racks

The average lifespan of a distribution rack is two years. It is recommended to replace the
distribution racks on your system after two years. Refer to Replace the Racks.
Buffer Racks
Buffer racks are temporary storage racks with a capacity of six sample tubes. You can find
buffer racks on DxA in the following locations:
• Input module: at the end of the input drawers
Figure 49 Input Module Drawer showing the Buffer Rack
• Input output module: at the end of the input and output drawers
Figure 50 Buffer Racks in the Input Output Module
• Centrifuge module: behind the adapter shuttle
1-58 B78799AM
1
System Overview
DxA System Racks
Figure 51 Buffer Rack in the Centrifuge Module
• Output module: at the end of the output drawers and behind the storage rack builder
unit (SRBU)
Figure 52 Buffer Rack in the Output Module
1. Buffer positions for samples

2. Warm-up positions for samples that are retrieved from the storage module
Sample tubes are placed in the buffer rack for the following reasons:
• no racks are available
• output racks are full
• to avoid blocking the transport
• to hold samples after removal from storage to warm up in preparation for sample
processing
• sample tube present in tube robot during initialization when no tube is expected
B78799AM 1-59
System Overview
DxA System Racks
Lifespan of Buffer Racks

The average lifespan of a buffer rack depends on the volume of sample processing. It is
recommended to replace the buffer racks on your system after:
• Five years for low-volume to medium-volume sample processing
• Two and a half years for high-volume sample processing
Refer to Inspect and Clean the Buffer Rack for the maintenance procedure.
Centrifuge Adapters
The centrifuge adapters are racks that hold sample tubes for centrifugation. The system
balances the sample tube load automatically by evenly distributing sample tubes between
the centrifuge adapters in the rotor buckets located in the centrifuge device. Centrifuge
adapters are located on DxA as follows:
• Single centrifuge: 8 centrifuge adapters
• Dual centrifuge: 16 centrifuge adapters
• Inside the centrifuge device: 4 centrifuge adapters per device
Figure 53 Centrifuge Adapters in a Dual Centrifuge Module
1-60 B78799AM
1
System Overview
DxA System Racks
Orientation of the Centrifuge Adapters
Figure 54 Centrifuge Adapter: Sides
You might have to remove the centrifuge adapter from the system during error recovery, for
example. When you place the centrifuge adapter back onto the adapter shuttle or into the
centrifuge device, confirm that the sides face in the correct orientation:
• The arrows must face right and the plain side must face left when you place the
centrifuge adapter onto the adapter shuttle.
Figure 55 Centrifuge Adapter with Plain Side Facing Left on the Adapter Shuttle
• The arrows must face outward and the plain side must face inward when you place the
centrifuge adapter into the centrifuge.
B78799AM 1-61
System Overview
DxA System Racks
Figure 56 Centrifuge Adapter with Plain Side Facing Inward in the Centrifuge
Note
If the centrifuge adapter is placed the wrong way around, the positions of the tubes
become unknown and an error occurs.
Lifespan of Centrifuge Adapters

The average lifespan of a centrifuge adapter is two years. It is recommended to replace the
centrifuge adapters on your system after two years. Refer to Replace the Centrifuge
Adapters.
Storage Racks
Storage racks are located in the output module and the connected storage module. Each
storage rack can hold up to 105 sample tubes.
Storage racks are used for storing sample tubes in the connected storage module. The
storage rack builder (SRBU):
• loads and unloads sample tubes from the storage racks
• moves storage racks to and from the connected storage module
You can also move storage racks from the connected storage module to an offline storage
location.
1-62 B78799AM
1
System Overview
DxA System Racks
Figure 57 Storage Rack
1. Top view of the storage rack 3. Operator handle

2. Correct orientation: Insert this side first
into the output module and ECSD
Lifespan of Storage Racks

The average lifespan of a storage rack is two years. It is recommended to replace the
storage racks on your system after two years. Refer to Replace the Stoarage Racks.
Customized Trays
A customized tray comprises a DxA-specific tray and analyzer racks. Customized trays are
an interface between the DxA system and offline analyzers, allowing you to introduce
analyzer racks into the DxA system.
If you take full analyzer racks from offline analyzers and place them one-by-one into a
compatible DxA-specific tray, you create a customized tray that you can load onto the input
B78799AM 1-63
System Overview
DxA System Racks
drawers on the DxA system. You can also take a customized tray from the output drawer on
DxA, remove the analyzer racks, and load them into an offline analyzer directly.
Figure 58 Customized Tray Examples and their Components
1. Tray
2. Tray door
3. Analyzer racks
The drawer functionality is the same for both customized trays and standard racks. Each
tray type has a unique RFID tag that DxA uses to distinguish between customized tray
types, even for trays of the same size.
Important
Some tray types look identical, but each tray has an identifying label on its door. Ensure
that you correctly identify tray types and load trays with their corresponding analyzer
racks.
You can load customized trays into the following modules:

• Input module
• Output module
• Input Output module
DxA accepts customized trays only on pre-defined drawer positions.
Note
Before using customized trays on the DxA system, map the correct drawer profiles.
Refer to Map Input Drawer Profiles or Map Output Drawer Profiles.
To fill, load, and unload customized trays, refer to the following procedures:
• Fill and Load Customized Trays onto Input Drawers
• Fill and Load Customized Trays onto Output Drawers
1-64 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Direct Track Sampling
• Unload Customized Trays from Input Drawers

• Unload Customized Trays from Output Drawers
To add sample tubes to the customized trays that have finished processing, refer to the
following procedures:
• Replace Customized Trays for Input Drawers
• Replace Customized Trays for Output Drawers
Lifespan of Customized Trays

Follow the recommendation from the manufacturer to replace analyzer racks in the
customized trays. Replace a defective customized tray with a new tray.

Analyzers can connect to the transport system for direct track sampling (DTS). Analyzers
transfer samples directly from sample tubes in the sample carrier on the DxA transport
system for testing. After the analyzer transfers the sample fluid, the sample tube continues
to the next processing step in the DxA system.
The following analyzers are able to connect to the DxA system via DTS connection:
• DxI 600/800/9000
• ACL TOP
• DxC 700 AU
®
• DiaSorin LIAISON XL
Transport System
The transport system is a series of connected transport segments that convey sample
carriers with sample tubes. Sample tubes are loaded into sample carriers with RFID for
tracking through the system. The sample bar code label is oriented in a manner so that it
can be read by connected analyzers without further tube motion or rotation.
The transport system has 4 lanes in total which move the sample carriers to modules and
analyzers to perform their functions. The two center lanes are travel lanes (for
transporting the sample tubes to their next destination) and the outer two lanes are
process lanes (for sample tube processing and moving between DxA modules).
T-sections permit branching from a main trunk. Pre-analytical and analytical instruments
can be attached to either side of the track.
The transport operator covers are the plexiglass covers that protect the transport system
from contamination and physical interference during operation.
B78799AM 1-65
System Overview
Transport System
Figure 59 The Transport Covers
The transport system:

• Moves sample carriers between connected modules
• Stops and positions samples for connected modules and analyzers to perform their
function
• Provides short-term buffer lanes (queues) that hold samples while waiting for
processing instructions
• Has sensors that detect if sample carriers are holding a sample tube and a bar code
reader to read sample tube bar code labels
Warning
Do not reach into the transport system or touch the sample carriers when the system
is in operation. Handling the transport system components during operation can
cause sample spills and erroneous results.
The transport system includes the following components:

• Diverters that route sample carriers to a track lane.
• Tube clamps that hold sample tubes in position for decapping or recapping.
1-66 B78799AM
1
System Overview
Transport System
• Tube locators for sample carriers with uncapped samples tubes. The tube locators are
used for direct track sampling and they center the tube for aspiration by the analyzer.
• Module controls on the system console
Figure 60 Sample Carriers in the Sensor Area Along the Transport System
B78799AM 1-67
System Overview
Transport System
1-68 B78799AM
CHAPTER 2
Theory of Operations
This section includes useful information about the following concepts around the use of the
DxA 5000 system:
• System Workflow
• DxA Scheduler
• DxA Sample Tube Routing
• Communication Protocols
System Workflow
DxA manages the system workflow in a way that is similar to how airports manage arriving
and departing flights. Before a plane leaves the gate, the entire flight path is planned
through to its final destination. All connections must be available at the correct timing
points along the route before takeoff is allowed.
The same principle applies for DxA. When a sample tube is introduced in the DxA input
module, the input tube robot places the sample in the distribution buffer. From there, a
sample tube is only placed on the transport or in a centrifuge adapter when all processes up
to the next scheduling buffer are able to accommodate the sample tube at the predicted
time when the sample tube reaches the process.
It is normal system behavior for some sample tubes to wait in the distribution buffer before
they are placed on the transport or in a centrifuge adapter system for processing.
When downstream regions or processes are considered unavailable, sample tubes might
wait in buffer areas for several reasons. Here are some reasons why sample tubes can wait
in buffer areas:
• Analyzer is busy
• Analyzer is paused
• Offline region full or absent
• Error region missing
• ECSD still initializing
• Offline storage missing
• Drawer open
• Consumable empty
• Waste full or waste drawer open
If you notice sample tubes waiting in buffer areas for a longer period, verify all downstream
processes are working properly and in the correct state.
Consider monitoring the following downstream processes on a regular basis:

• Centrifuge availability
• Correct state of modules
• Analyzer online
• Loading status of reagents
B78799AM 2-1
• Calibration status
• Quality control has passed
• Availability of offline racks to accept samples
• Defined error region
• Availability of storage space
DxA Scheduler
When a sample tube is introduced in the DxA input module, the input tube robot places the
sample in the distribution buffer after having identified the sample tube type and after
having read the bar code. At this point, DxA queries and receives information about the
sample request and its route (the required sequence of processes of its way through the
system). With this, the DxA scheduler software calculates the best starting point to execute
the route for samples through the system based on centrifugation and analyzer/ test
availability while optimizing the workload of the analyzers.
The DxA scheduler does the following:

• Manages a smooth flow of samples through the system
• Evaluates the sample priority
• Minimizes STAT turn-around times
• Maximizes system throughput
• Balances the workload across the available analyzers
• Distributes carriers to transport positions where they are needed to avoid slowing
down the processing rate
Depending on the test request, configuration and availabilities, a route plan is created and
the sample is placed on the transport or in centrifuge adapters to begin processing.
If an analyzer becomes unavailable, the DxA software is notified, and DxA routes the sample
tube to an alternative available region. In case there is no alternative region available, the
sample tube is sent to the region specified in the DxA configuration. Refer to the Routing
Exceptions settings for more information.
If a sample remains at a location in the system for longer than the expected time plus the
configured timeout value, a sample turnaround time (TAT) alert is generated. For more
information, refer to Sample Processing Timeout in Sample Timers.
DxA updates REMISOL Advance after every process, so sample processing progress is
always up to date. Route plans are stored in the sample tube history in REMISOL Advance
and can be reviewed in this window if required. Refer to Sample Search.
Scheduling Priority and Load Balancing

DxA picks higher input loading priority sample (1, 2, 3) and first in, first out (FIFO) within a
priority. The scheduler sends samples to a processing site at a rate that ensures that its
queue will stay at the target level to ensure that the workload remains balanced. The queue
size is only large enough to ensure a gapless, continuous analyzer processing, but short
enough to keep the TAT low in case a STAT sample is added to the queue. Hence, a short
queue in front of an analyzer is not an indication for low throughput or performance, but
rather the proof that the scheduling algorithm works as expected. In contrary, a long queue
2-2 B78799AM
2
in front of a process or analyzer is rather an indicator that the process or analyzer is not
working with its normal performance.
Once the samples are placed on the transport, the samples are treated the same. This
means there is no possibility for samples to overtake or bypass others on the transport. The
one exception is if there are any STAT samples currently in the rack builder module (RBU),
these are given priority. When a STAT sample enters the RBU, it is processed ahead of any
routine samples currently in the RBU buffer. A STAT sample loaded into the RBU analyzer is
also prioritized by the analyzer.
Scheduling Buffer
The principle of the scheduler is based on the utilization of scheduling buffers. Sample
tubes are scheduled into scheduling buffer to buffer or from the current location to the next
buffer.
There are two types of scheduling buffer:

• Long-term scheduling buffer: A sample can stay in this buffer without blocking other
samples (e.g. the distribution buffer or the ECSD). The scheduler periodically reviews
the route plans of samples waiting in buffer locations to determine if a new route plan
can be created. This is based on changes in the availability of system resources.
• Short-term scheduling buffer:
A sample should leave this buffer as fast as possible in order to not block other samples
(e.g. centrifuge adapters after the spin cycle: In case a sample tube cannot be scheduled
in time, the next spin cycle might be delayed due to the need for entirely emptied
centrifuge adapters.
Sample Tube Routing

Depending on the test ordered for a sample tube, DxA routes the sample tubes through a
succession of DxA modules and analyzers:
• Centrifuge
• Decapper
• Analyzer via the rack builder module (RBU) (such as an AU5800 or DXH)
• Analyzer via direct track sampling (such as a DxI, ACL TOP® - IL, DxC 700 AU or
LIAISON XL - DiaSorin® )
• Recapper (to recap the sample tube)
• Output module (to be loaded into a storage rack or offline rack, or error)
• Storage module (ECSD-refrigerated storage)
As the sample tube moves from one module/analyzer to the next for sample processing,
DxA continues to update the route plan to keep the journey optimized for the best possible
turnaround time (TAT).
DxA creates a route plan based on:

• DxA system configuration settings
• Test orders from REMISOL Advance
B78799AM 2-3
• Process instructions availability sent by DxA server

• Test availability/analyzer status sent by REMISOL Advance via Data Manager interface
between the console server and REMISOL Advance
Route Configuration
The routing logic can be configured in the system configuration by defining the priorities of
the connected analyzers. Within the same priority group, the selected analyzers are
configured to support higher priority tests.
Any of the Named Destination options can have an assigned routing priority. Refer to Create
Named Destinations. Region types, such as an online analyzer, offline analyzer or error
collection area can be configured.
Communication Protocols
DxA communicates with connected analyzers via REMISOL Advance using different
communication protocols.
REMISOL Advance uses the following types of communication to manage information from
DxA and connected analyzers:
• Standard communication analyzer: based on the ASTM protocol, the analyzer and
REMISOL Advance use the host/query communication model. Analyzers query Remisol
Advance and REMISOL Advance uses this protocol to send test orders to the analyzers.
The analyzers send results back to REMISOL Advance using this protocol.
• Dynamic communication analyzer: protocol used for communication between
REMISOL Advance and Beckman Coulter analyzers. This communication type is able to
provide more information about the state and details of the analyzers, such as Analyzer
Status and Test Status. With this information, DxA can analyze and optimize the
scheduling. This allows for workflow optimization in case an analyzer goes offline,
runs out of a supply, fails QC or calibration.
Automated Quality Control

This section contains an overview of important considerations to run laboratory quality
control (QC) sample types on the DxA 5000 system. The automated quality control feature
is intended to offer a more convenient solution for running QC for connected analyzers. For
setup information, contact your local Beckman Coulter Service Representative, refer to the
REMISOL Advance Instructions for Use (IFU), and relevant sections of the DxA IFU. For
effective implementation, review and follow the manufacturer's instructions in the QC
material package insert before using automated quality control.
Beckman Coulter recommends that the workflow in the laboratory be analyzed to

determine if automated quality control is appropriate for the laboratory's quality
procedures and requirements. Due to the volatility of some QC materials, not all QC
materials are suitable for running in an automated method. QC material must be clear and
transparent (like water) for appropriate detection by the liquid level detection (LLD)
2-4 B78799AM
2
component. If you have questions about the QC material itself, contact the manufacturer of
the QC material.
Automated Quality Control Requirements

Consider the following requirements to set up automated quality control for your
laboratory:
• Sample tubes and manually applied caps must be compatible with the DxA.
• Use a sample tube found in your DxA tube database and a Sample Tube Type not
currently used for patient samples that does not use gel or other additives. If you want
to use a sample tube not currently found in your tube database, contact your Beckman
Coulter Representative.
Refer to Sample Tubes in Sample Processing and System Limitations for more
information about compatible sample tubes.
• Follow the instructions in the DxA IFU for sample tubes and tube type configuration.
Note
Only one Fluid Type can be assigned to one sample tube type. Therefore, to run
multiple QC material types (for example, plasma, serum, urine, and so on), setting
up several unique Sample Tube Types, each with their own Fluid Type may be
required.
• Automated quality control triggers are provided by REMISOL Advance. Refer to the
REMISOL Advance IFU for more information about configuring QC trigger protocol
configuration. Check with your REMISOL Advance Representative that you have the
compatible version of REMISOL Advance.
Special Considerations for Bar Code Labels

Consider the following preconditions for using bar code labels on QC materials:
• Bar code label information for QC sample tubes loaded onto the DxA must be entered
into REMISOL Advance before loading QC sample tubes into a DxA Input region. If the
QC sample tube is loaded before DxA can receive the order from REMISOL Advance, a
routing exception occurs. Depending on your configuration, the QC sample tube is sent
to either an error region or temporarily to the environmentally controlled storage
device (ECSD).
• Bar code labels applied to sample tubes for QC materials must be compatible with both
REMISOL Advance and DxA bar code label requirements, refer to Bar Code Labels for
guidelines.
Supported Analyzers
The following Analyzers are supported for running Automated Quality Control:
B78799AM 2-5
• DxI 600/800/9000
• DxC 700 AU
• AU5810/AU5811
Note
The use of automated quality control on an AU analyzer with more than one module
depends on your configuration. Contact your Beckman Coulter Support Representative
for automated quality control for multi-module AU analyzers.
Loading Sample Tubes with QC Materials

Automated quality control works with both the DxA 5000 and the DxA 5000 Fit systems.
Load sample tubes filled with QC material in the same manner as you would for a patient
sample tube. Refer to Fill and Load Racks.
Note
STAT patient samples have higher priority.
QC materials are not recommended to be centrifuged and the DxA, by default setting, will
not centrifuge QC materials. In some instances, QC materials can be loaded onto the DxA
before a QC test order is received.
Therefore, Beckman Coulter recommends not to include centrifugation for the sample tube
type that will be used for QC materials. If QC materials are accidentally centrifuged,
Beckman Coulter recommends that the centrifuged QC samples be discarded.
For more information, refer to Configure Sample Container Types.
Recapping QC Sample Tubes Using the DxA Output Recapper
Note
The information in this section applies to DxA 5000 only.
To minimize potential spillage, the DxA recapper can recap a QC sample tube before routing
it to a location configured for receiving capped QC sample tubes. The DxA recapper uses
vented push caps. While these caps minimize evaporation, evaporation will occur over time,
potentially altering the stability of the QC materials over time. If you have questions about
the effect of evaporation on QC materials, contact your QC material manufacturer before
storing QC sample tubes with DxA push caps.
Storage
Note
Temperature-controlled storage via an ECSD applies to DxA 5000 only.
2-6 B78799AM
2
A single sample tube type is currently limited to a single storage expiration date. This
causes all QC sample tubes of the same container type having the same auto-disposal
settings, including duration length.
ECSD
Capped QC materials can be routed to an online ECSD. You can set up automatic disposal
under the Sample Tube Type for QC materials. Refer to Automatic Disposal Settings for more
information.
To prevent storage in the ECSD and to assign storage to another configured storage
destination, select Do Not Store Here for samples to be returned to an output rack. Refer to
Storage Sample Management.
Output Module
The output module is not temperature controlled. QC materials returned to an output rack
must be returned to a temperature-controlled storage environment according to the
timeframe specified by the manufacturer.
To prevent QC sample tubes from intermixing with patient sample tubes in the same output
rack, refer to Storage Rack for information on how to send a sample tube type to a specific
rack.
QC Routing Workflow
There are various potential workflow or routing options that can be configured for QC
materials. Refer to the REMISOL Advance IFU for more information.
Consider the workflow described below:

• Ensure that QC materials are correctly thawed and mixed according to the
manufacturer's QC material package insert and instructions.
• The QC material should be manually pipetted into sample tubes that are available in
the DxA tube database. Select a tube type different from those used for patient
samples.
• Bar code labels should be generated and affixed to the outside of the QC sample tubes.
The bar code label IDs and QC information should be entered into REMISOL Advance
(for example, Sample ID, Lot #, Level, Target value, SD, Expiration, and so on) and a
Trigger QC Protocol setup (for example, by time, by volume, EWMA out-of-control, and
so on).
• Upon receipt of information from REMISOL Advance, a route plan is generated to route
the QC sample tubes to analyzer.
• Upon reaching an analyzer, the analyzer reads the bar code label on the QC sample tube
and host queries REMISOL Advance for test order information.
• When the analyzer receives the order, the QC material is run. When testing is complete,
the results are transmitted to REMISOL Advance and processed in accordance to how
QC is configured in REMISOL Advance.
• After testing by the analyzer is completed, the QC sample tube is routed to the next
destination in the route plan. The next destination can be the recapper, ECSD (for DxA
5000 only), or output.
For the output drawers, refer to Output Drawer Profiles. If the QC sample tube is returned
to an output drawer, the QC sample tube should be manually retrieved. Upon retrieval, the
B78799AM 2-7
QC sample tube can be discarded, or manually capped and stored according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
Note
If the QC material remains in the sample tube and it is meant for further use, Beckman
Coulter recommends that the lot, sample level, and open vial date are documented on
the sample tube for better visual inspection.
Note
Ensure that bar code labels are readable and correctly affixed to the QC sample tubes.
Limitations
If an analyzer test has drifted out of acceptable quality control range of your laboratory, the
DxA may not support routing a patient or QC sample to that instrument for analysis. To
resolve the issue, the operator should consider the following:
• Follow the procedure for resolving out-of-range QC samples in your laboratory.
• Go to the analyzer and resolve the issue manually. This can include manually rerunning
QC on the analyzer following the protocols of the analyzer and by front-loading the QC
material on the analyzer.
Note
If running QC on the analyzer does not resolve the out-of-range QC issue, follow the
troubleshooting procedures for your analyzer and your laboratory procedures to resolve
the issue.
2-8 B78799AM
CHAPTER 3
System Operational Procedures
Prepare for Operation
Beckman Coulter installs your DxA 5000 system, configures it to your laboratory
environment, and performs initial testing. Contact your Beckman Coulter representative for
additional information regarding your installation and verification.
Bar Code Labels
Label position
Labels need to fit within the positions shown in the diagram.
Figure 61 Bar Code Label Position on Sample Tube
Note
Figure is not to scale.
Number Description Minimum distance
1 Minimum distance between 6.35 mm

bar code label and upper
edge of label
2 Minimum distance between 6.35 mm

bar code label and lower edge
of label
3 Minimum distance between 9 mm

lower edge of label and tube
bottom
B78799AM 3-1
Supported characters
Warning
Each sample tube must have a unique, readable bar code label. The system sends
sample tubes to the error region on the output drawer if any of the following are
true:
• two samples with the same ID are on the system at the same time
• sample has an unreadable or damaged bar code labels
Note
For any parameters not outlined here, refer to CLSI guidelines for bar code labels.
DxA supports the following characters on bar code labels:

• Alphanumeric characters: A to Z, 0 to 9
Important
DxA only supports upper case letters. Lower case letters are incompatible with the
connected analyzers.
• Space
• Special characters:
—-
—.
—$
—/
—+
—%
Sample Processing and System Limitations

Follow these guidelines to prepare samples for successful processing on the DxA
automation system.
Warning
Confirm that sample tubes are not damaged before processing. If the sample tube is
damaged, of insufficient quality, or coated in residue, the sample may be
compromised.
3-2 B78799AM
3
Warning
Avoid placing sample tubes in a horizontal position that have been recapped. The
recapping process can create a bubble in the top of the sample tube. This can cause
an aspiration error when these sample tubes are processed by an analyzer.
Mixing of blood samples
Warning
Do not use glass tubes on the DxA system.
• Tubes that contain an additive which either accelerates (e.g. BD PlasticSSTTM contain a
silicate material) or inhibits clotting (specific anticoagulant e.g. BD PSTTM), require
mixing immediately after collection.
• Tubes can have different surface tensions and additives. For this reason, BD SSTTM and
Plus Plastic Serum Tubes that contain a silicate material to enhance the clotting
mechanism require mixing. If the initial mixing is not done, there is great potential for
silicate material to remain in the serum layer.
• Always refer to the product insert or package labeling from the sample tube
manufacturer for specific product guidelines.
Clotting time before centrifugation

• Allow the blood to clot thoroughly before centrifugation. If clotting time is inadequate,
latent fibrin formation can cause clogging of sample probes and flow cells.
Sample Tubes
DxA has a tube database that contains hundreds of standard sample tubes. To use a sample
tube type that is not contained in the tube database, contact your Beckman Coulter
representative. Sample tubes with the following physical properties are supported.
B78799AM 3-3
Startup and Shutdown Procedures
Figure 62 Physical Properties of Sample Tubes
1. 13.8-24.4 mm 6. Minimum 3 mm. Inner diameter range of

2. 14.9-18.5 mm 10.32-13.64 mm at open top end of tube.
3. 12-16 mm 7. Maximum 20 mm
4. Minimum 56 mm 8. 65-100.6 mm
5. 16 x 100 conical urine collection tube. 9. Maximum 108.5 mm
Outer diameter at cone to tube transition
14.9-15.3 mm.
During system shutdown, you have the option to keep the samples or remove the samples.
3-4 B78799AM
3
• Keep Samples: Samples remain on the system. If you select this option, you can select to
restore or discard the sample location data during system startup. If you restore the
data, sample processing continues after restart. Do not remove the sample tubes from
the system.
• Remove Samples: Sample processing stops immediately. Manually remove all sample
tubes from the system or module and the sample location data from the system is
permanently discarded.
During system startup, if you selected Keep Samples during shutdown, you have the option
to restore or discard the sample location data from the previous run.
• Restore Data: The system can continue sample processing when startup is complete.
• Discard Data: Manually remove all samples from the system, according to the startup
checklist.
Soft and Hard Restart

Restarting the DxA system means performing a system shutdown, followed by a startup.
You can perform two types of system restart:
• Soft restart: A restart of the system where you only turn off the DxA server and the
console server in the server cabinet to refresh the system memory. Scenarios for a soft
restart:
— Troubleshooting
— Error recovery
• Hard restart: A complete restart of the system where you turn off the servers and
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) in the server cabinet and the power to all
modules. Scenarios for a hard restart:
— System technical intervention by field service engineers (FSEs)
— Recovery from an unexpected error where a soft restart did not solve the issue
Startup Checklist
If you selected Remove Samples during shutdown or Discard Data during startup, complete
all the tasks in this startup checklist before you initialize the system.
Warning
Perform the startup checklist to prevent system errors, hardware damage, sample
tube breakage, and operator exposure to biohazard conditions. For maintenance or
error recovery not contained in this manual, contact your local Beckman Coulter
Service Representative.
Centrifuge
For an overview of centrifuge components, refer to Centrifuge Module.
B78799AM 3-5
1 Remove any sample tubes left on the centrifuge adapters and buffer rack, including the
adapters in the centrifuges and the tube robot gripper.
2 Confirm that each adapter shuttle is equipped with 8 centrifuge adapters.

3 Confirm that each centrifuge is equipped with 4 empty adapters.
4 Confirm that the adapters are correctly positioned. The arrows must face outward and
the plain side must face inward when you place the centrifuge adapter into the
centrifuge.
Figure 63 Centrifuge Adapter with Plain Side Facing Left on the Adapter Shuttle
Figure 64 Centrifuge Adapter with Plain Side Facing Inward in the Centrifuge
5 Turn on centrifuge power.

6 Close all drawers.
7 Confirm that the Controlled Stop button is not pressed.
8 Confirm that all the covers are closed.
3-6 B78799AM
3
Input
1 Remove all racks from all drawers.

2 Remove any sample tubes left in the rack buffers and tube robot gripper.
3 Place empty distribution racks in the rack distribution region.

7 After startup, add empty racks to the output drawer.
Rack Builder
1 Remove any analyzer racks left in the rack transfer unit, analyzer input, and output
lanes. Place removed racks into the empty rack buffer area.
Note
The rack buffer area can only contain analyzer racks. The use of standard white
racks can cause operating errors. Only use DxA-supplied racks.
2 Remove any samples left in the analyzer racks, tube robot gripper or park position.
3 Confirm that all the analyzer racks are completely inserted into the rack buffer lanes.
4 Confirm that the rack mover is under the rack buffer.
5 Manually move the rack builder tube robot to a position above the transport system.
6 Place the analyzer in the ready state.
Note
AU analyzers must be in "Measure 1". Press Start on the AU analyzers.
Output
1 Remove all racks from all drawers.

2 Remove any sample tubes left in the rack buffers and tube robot gripper.
B78799AM 3-7
3 Remove any caps from the recapper area.


7 After the module has started, place empty racks to configured output regions.
Transport and Direct Track Sampling (DTS)
1 Remove any tubes left in the sample carriers.

2 Confirm that all DTS analyzers are in Ready state.
Note
If an analyzer is unavailable for any reason, the relevant DTS analyzer must be
deactivated on the system console under Menu > Module controls for the analyzer
to initialize successfully.
3 Confirm that a queue of sample carriers, which might block a lane gate, has not built up
in any of the track lanes.
4 Confirm that no sample carriers are in a diverter or exit sensor along the transport
system.
Figure 65 Sample Carriers in the Sensor Area Along the Transport System
3-8 B78799AM
3
Storage Check List
1 Remove all racks from the storage rack builder.

2 Move the sample tubes from the storage rack to an input rack. To reprocess the sample
tubes on the DxA system, introduce the samples in the input module. Refer to Fill and
Load Racks.
Warning
A storage module hardware failure can affect the processing time of samples on
the system. After manually removing samples from storage, you need to reprocess
the samples on the system.
3 Remove the rack from the rack handler if possible.

4 Add the empty racks into the storage module if needed.
5 Leave the filled storage racks in the storage module.
6 Close all doors.
7 Turn on the storage power.
Start Up the DxA System

Follow these steps to start up the DxA system. If you are performing a soft restart, proceed
to step 3b.
Note
Confirm that the connected analyzers are in the correct state.
B78799AM 3-9
1 Turn on the local power to each module. Wait until the module consoles have started.
2 Open the cover of the console server cabinet.
Figure 66 System Console with Server Cabinet
3-10 B78799AM
3
3 Open the covers of the DxA server, Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs), and console
server. Turn on the power to the servers starting from the bottom and moving up.
Figure 67 Servers Inside the System Console Cabinet
1. PLCs: Programmable Logic 2. DS: DxA server

Controllers 3. CS: Console server
a. Turn on the power to the PLC. Your system can have one or more PLCs.
Note
To turn on the power to the PLC after a shutdown, wait for 10 seconds, then
shortly press and release the red button.
B78799AM 3-11
Figure 68 Red Button to Turn the PLC On and Off
b. Wait until the PLC is running (green LED illuminates). If the PLC does not start (you
do not see the LED and/ or you do not hear the fan running) shortly press the red
button again.
c. Turn on the power to the DxA server.
d. Turn on the power to the console server.
4 Log on with your account. Enter your user name and password.
5 If you are restarting the system and you selected Keep Samples during shutdown, you
can restore or discard sample processing data from the previous run. Select the desired
option in the dialog box:
• Restore Data: Existing sample processing data is restored and sample processing
can continue. This process can take several minutes.
Important
Confirm that you have not moved or removed any sample tubes from the
system after shutdown. If you have moved or removed sample tubes from the
system, discarding data from the previous run is recommended.
• Discard Data: The sample processing data is permanently removed from the system.
Warning
Risk of sample collision. If you select this option, remove all sample tubes
from the system to prevent sample tube collision.
6 On the Startup screen, confirm that all modules are turned on and have a green check
mark ( ). If any red X mark ( ) is displayed, go to System on the dashboard for more
information and error recovery steps.
7 Confirm that you completed the startup checklist in the Manually prepare the system
section. Select each box, if enabled, to confirm that the task is complete.
3-12 B78799AM
3
8 Select Initialize System.

If you previously selected Discard Data, a dialog appears asking you to confirm that you
removed all samples.
9 If errors occur:
a. Perform error recovery and initialize the module.
b. On the system console, select Initialize System.
10 Confirm that you have performed the task.

On the system console Home screen, the module and subsystem buttons turn green
indicating that the system is initialized and running.
Shut Down the DxA System

Follow these steps to shut down the DxA system.
Warning
Risk of delay in sample processing. Shut down the entire system only after the system
has finished processing all samples on the input module drawers and in all other
system modules to avoid manual intervention.
1 On the system console, in the bottom left corner of the page, select the pause button
to pause the entire system.
2 On the system console, select Menu > Shutdown.
3 Select Initiate Shutdown.
4 Select one of the following shutdown options in the dialog box:

• Keep Samples: Samples remain in the system and sample processing continues after
you restart the system. Do not remove the sample tubes.
• Remove Samples: Sample processing stops immediately. After shutdown, remove all
sample tubes before restarting the system to prevent sample tube collision.
5 Select OK in the dialog box to confirm shutdown.
6 Follow the instructions on the system console and module consoles. All modules will be
in shutdown state after you resolve all open system events.
Important
You must first perform all error recovery steps for any alerts. This ensures that the
system is in a safe state before completing the system shutdown.
B78799AM 3-13
7 Wait for the DxA server to turn off automatically. Select the Shut down option from the
Windows Start menu to turn off the console server.
Important
Do not manually turn off the DxA server, as the existing sample data will be lost and
you will not be able to restore it during startup.
8 If you are performing a soft restart, shutdown is complete.

If you are performing a hard restart:
1. Turn off the Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) by shortly pressing and
releasing the red button on the front of the PLC and wait until the lights go off. If all
the lights do not go off, shortly press the red button again.
Figure 69 Red Button to Turn the PLC On and Off
2. Turn off the local power to each module.
Refer to Soft and Hard Restart.
Open Module Covers

Follow these steps to open the covers of any system module.
Select Unlock covers. Open the module cover.
Close Module Covers

Follow these steps to close the covers of any system module.
Close the module cover.
3-14 B78799AM
3
Set up the System
Set up the System
Set Up User Accounts

Follow these steps to set up and manage user accounts for laboratory operators to access
the system console. You can define what options each user is authorized to access.
Important
You need authorization to manage users to access the User Account Management
page.
1 On the system console, select Menu > User Account Management.
2 Select Create user account at the bottom of the page to create a user account.
3 Enter a User name and Password for the new account.
Note
The password is only a temporary password. When an operator logs in for the first
time, the operator is prompted to create a password that fulfills the password rules
for the system.
4 Check all of the relevant boxes for authorizations for this user account. The operator is
authorized to complete all tasks of each category selected.
5 If an operator forgets their password, select Reset to create a password.
6 If a user account is locked, select Unlock to unlock the account.
7 Select Save at the bottom of the page to apply all changes.
Set Password Requirements

Follow these steps to set what the password requirements are when users set their
password.
Important
You need authorization to access the User Account Management page.
1 On the system console, select Menu > User Account Management.
2 Select Set Password Requirements at the bottom of the page.
B78799AM 3-15
Input Module Procedures
3 Select all of the relevant boxes for the password requirements you want to set. The
operator is then required to set a password according to these guidelines.
4 Select Done at the bottom of the page to apply all changes.
Fill and Load Racks

Follow these instructions when preparing racks for processing on the DxA system.
Warning
Open and close drawers with care. Do not use excessive force. If not careful during
opening, the drawer can come off the slides of the drawer and samples will be
compromised. During closing, open samples can spill.
Warning
Do not force drawers open during system operation. This may cause a sample tube
collision or spillage. Use the drawer open sensor button and wait until the red
flashing light has stopped flashing.
Warning
Drawers left open can cause processing delays. When closing the drawer, ensure the
LED switches off. If the LED remains on, confirm that the drawer is closed.
1 Confirm the quality of all tubes to be processed before loading tubes onto the system.
Sample tubes should be in good condition and conform to the configured tube settings.
Warning
Do not introduce samples that are filled above the acceptable limit according to
the tube manufacturer or the safe fill level according to DxA specifications.
3-16 B78799AM
3
Warning
Confirm that sample tubes are not damaged before processing. If the sample tube
is damaged, of insufficient quality, or coated in residue, the sample may be
compromised.
2 Inspect the bar code labels on the tubes before filling racks:
— Confirm that the bar code labels are fully affixed to the tube. The edges of the bar
code labels must not be peeled off or detached from the tube.
— Each tube cannot have more than 3 layers of labels attached.
3 When filling racks with tubes, confirm that all tubes are seated in the rack. Insert the
tubes as far as possible into the rack. Do not place empty tubes into racks to be
introduced to the system. Empty tubes are not sent to an analyzer.
Warning
Always load tubes starting from the back left position, filling up row 1, row 2, and
so on. The input tube robot picks up tubes from left to right, starting with the 1A
position. If no tubes are detected in several consecutive positions, the input tube
robot assumes the entire rack is empty and moves on to the next rack.
Figure 70 Examples of Correct and Incorrect Sample Positions on Standard Racks
Warning
Confirm that the tubes are positioned correctly in the rack. Tube spillage will
cause loss of the sample. Do not use excessive force to position a rack while
handling a rack with tubes.
B78799AM 3-17
4 Fill racks with tubes in line with your laboratory configuration:

a. If you pre-sort tubes according to priority, fill all high priority or STAT tubes into
one rack.
b. If you pre-sort tubes depending on centrifugation, fill all tubes needing
centrifugation into one rack.
Important
Do not load non-centrifuged samples onto an input drawer region that is

defined for pre-centrifuged tubes. The liquid level detection identifies these
sample tubes as erroneous and the system sorts these samples to the error
region.
5 Open the drawer.

6 Load the filled racks onto the input drawers in line with your laboratory configuration.
Load racks with the rack bar code label facing the front of the drawer. Confirm the
configured drawer regions on the module console screen.
Warning
racks to the input module for processing. If there are tubes in the system that
have not been processed through the input module, the system can place an open
tube into another tube and cause a sample spill. This can result in a biohazard
risk, cross contamination or a loss of the sample.
Warning
Do not use excessive force to position a rack on the drawer. The racks should fit
securely onto the base frame. Handle racks with care to prevent sample spillage.
Avoid any impact to a drawer while it is extended.
Warning
Risk of sample spillage. Do not open or close the covers when filled sample racks
are placed on the module shelf. Load filled sample racks onto the input drawer.
7 Load empty racks only onto the output drawer.
Warning
Do not load filled racks onto the rack distribution region or an output drawer. This
will cause sample tube collision that can lead to sample spillage.
3-18 B78799AM
3
Important
Do not leave an output region or rack distribution region empty. This may slow
system processing when sample tubes are unable to continue processing.
8 Push the drawer back into the module until the self-closing device closes the drawer.
The red light turns off, and the sensor light illuminates.
9 Confirm that the module console screen displays the racks loaded onto the input
drawers. If a rack is not detected, open the drawer, confirm that the rack is positioned
correctly and close the drawer.
Warning
If the system does not detect racks loaded on to the input drawers, the system
cannot process samples within the expected sample processing time. Confirm that
the system has detected a rack by referring to the input module console.
For more information on the types of racks used on the DxA system, refer to DxA System
Racks.
Revisit Rack
If you open an input drawer while the tube robot is processing samples on a rack and
change the order of samples on the rack or place new samples into a rack, select Revisit rack
to process all samples on this rack again. The tube robot continues picking up samples and
then returns to the first position of the rack.
1 Confirm that the rack is on the same position on the drawer.

2 On the module console, select the rack on the drawer on the Home screen.
3 Select Revisit Rack.
Fill and Load Customized Trays onto Input Drawers
Warning
Warning
Risk of spillage and cross-contamination. Do not load or unload multiple analyzer

racks at the same time. Only remove and replace analyzer racks one at a time.
B78799AM 3-19
Warning
Risk of spillage. Always use two hands when carrying the trays to and from the DxA
system.
Consider the following when filling and loading customized trays:

• Customized trays for the input drawer do not have to be full of analyzer racks.
• When you load a customized tray into an input drawer, the customized tray must have
a minimum of one analyzer rack with one sample tube in the correct position.
• The number of required consecutive sample positions is configured during system
installation. If the tube robot does not find sample tubes in the configured number of
consecutive positions, it assumes the rest of the analyzer rack is empty and moves on
to the next analyzer rack in the tray. The figure below shows examples of customized
trays with 3 consecutive sample positions configured. Processing attempts at empty
positions will reduce the throughput at the input. You can change this value to optimize
sample tube processing turnaround time (TAT). If you want to change this value, please
contact your Beckman Coulter Representative for assistance.
Figure 71 Examples of Correct and Incorrect Sample Positions on Customized Trays
1. Correct: Customized tray with only 2 positions, while one analyzer rack is
analyzer racks. The analyzer racks have empty.
sample tubes present in the first 3 3. Incorrect: Customized tray with no sample
consecutive positions. tubes present in the first 3 consecutive
2. Correct: Customized tray full of analyzer positions of the analyzer racks containing
racks. Some analyzer racks have sample sample tubes.
tubes present in the first 3 consecutive
Follow these steps to fill and load customized trays onto the input drawers on the system.
3-20 B78799AM
3
1 Confirm that you have a compatible tray and analyzer rack type and that you mapped
the correct regions in the drawer. Refer to Map Input Drawer Profiles.
2 Confirm that the tray is empty and on a secure surface, then open the tray door by
pushing down on the lock.
Figure 72 Open Tray Door
3 Place the analyzer racks with sample tubes in the tray.
Figure 73 Place Analyzer Rack with Sample Tubes in Tray
4 Close the tray door and confirm that it is securely closed.

You hear a clicking sound that indicates the tray door is securely closed.
B78799AM 3-21
5 Carry the customized tray to the input drawer and place it on the module shelf.
Figure 74 Customized Tray with Sample Tubes
6 Open the input drawer.

7 Load the customized tray onto the corresponding drawer region and in the correct
position.
8 Close the input drawer.
Unload Customized Trays from Input Drawers
Warning
3-22 B78799AM
3
Warning

Warning
system.
Follow these steps to unload customized trays from the input drawers on the system.

2 Unload a customized tray from the input drawer and place it on the module shelf.
4 Confirm that the tray is on a secure surface, then open the tray door by pushing down
on the lock.
B78799AM 3-23
5 Remove the empty analyzer racks from the tray. Process the analyzer racks according to
your laboratory procedures.
Figure 76 Remove Empty Analyzer Racks from Tray

Replace Customized Trays on Input Drawers
Warning
Warning

Warning
system.
After customized trays are finished processing on the input drawers, the analyzer racks on
the trays become empty. Follow these instructions to replace the empty customized trays
with customized trays containing sample tubes.
3-24 B78799AM
3
1 Fill an empty tray with analyzer racks containing sample tubes. Refer to Fill and Load
Customized Trays onto Input Drawers.

3 Remove a customized tray with empty analyzer racks from the drawer and place it on
the module shelf.
4 Load the customized tray containing sample tubes onto the corresponding drawer
region and in the correct position.
Note
Optionally, you can reuse the same customized tray by refilling it with analyzer racks
containing sample tubes. If you reuse the same customized tray, confirm that you
load the refilled customized tray onto the same drawer position, then select Revisit
Rack on the Home screen.
Remove Racks from Output Drawer
1 Open the drawer.

2 Remove the rack you need from the drawer. Process the rack according to your
laboratory procedures.
Input Module Consumables
Decapper: Empty the Waste Container
Follow these instructions to empty the waste container of the decapper. The module
console indicates the fill level of the cap waste container and alerts you to empty the cap
waste container on the Consumables page.
Warning
Maintenance procedures can expose you to biohazards. Wear appropriate Personal

Protective Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, eye shields, and lab coats. Handle and
dispose of biohazards according to laboratory procedures.
B78799AM 3-25
Important
Monitor the fill level of the cap waste container before and after routine peaks. The
system cannot decap any tubes while you empty the waste container; this can interrupt
your laboratory routine.
Material Required
• Waste bags C62616
1 On the module console, select Consumables. On the Consumables page, the diagram
shows you which drawer to access for the cap waste.
2 Open the waste container drawer.

a. Select the drawer open sensor button; wait until the red flashing light has stopped
flashing.
b. When you see a solid red light, pull on the handle to open the drawer.
c. Completely extend the drawer.
3 Remove the lid of the waste container.
Figure 77 Remove Lid of Waste Container
3-26 B78799AM
3
4 Attach the lid upside down to the clip on the right side of the waste container.
Figure 78 Attaching Lid to Clip
5 Remove the bag of cap waste from the waste container. Dispose of the cap waste
Important
Flatten any folds of the new waste bag after you have lined the waste container with it. A
smoothly lined waste container prevents the ultrasonic sensor from detecting a false fill
level.
6 Replace the waste bag.
Figure 79 Placing a New Waste Bag in an Empty Waste Container
B78799AM 3-27
7 Put the lid of the waste container securely back in position. Insert the metal guides
inside of the waste container. These guides keep the bag flat against the sides of the
waste container. Confirm that the biohazard label is facing the front of the drawer.
Figure 80 Replace the Lid of the Waste Container
Figure 81 Biohazard Label Facing the Front of the Drawer
8 Close the drawer.
3-28 B78799AM
3
Input Output Module Procedures
Fill and Load Racks

Follow these instructions when preparing racks for processing on the DxA system.
Warning
Warning
Do not force drawers open during system operation. This may cause a sample tube
collision or spillage. Use the drawer open sensor button and wait until the red
flashing light has stopped flashing.
Warning
Drawers left open can cause processing delays. When closing the drawer, ensure the
LED switches off. If the LED remains on, confirm that the drawer is closed.
1 Confirm the quality of all tubes to be processed before loading tubes onto the system.
Sample tubes should be in good condition and conform to the configured tube settings.
Warning
Do not introduce samples that are filled above the acceptable limit according to
the tube manufacturer or the safe fill level according to DxA specifications.
Warning
Confirm that sample tubes are not damaged before processing. If the sample tube
is damaged, of insufficient quality, or coated in residue, the sample may be
compromised.
2 Inspect the bar code labels on the tubes before filling racks:
— Confirm that the bar code labels are fully affixed to the tube. The edges of the bar
code labels must not be peeled off or detached from the tube.
— Each tube cannot have more than 3 layers of labels attached.
B78799AM 3-29
3 When filling racks with tubes, confirm that all tubes are seated in the rack. Insert the
tubes as far as possible into the rack. Do not place empty tubes into racks to be
introduced to the system. Empty tubes are not sent to an analyzer.
Warning
Always load tubes starting from the back left position, filling up row 1, row 2, and
so on. The input tube robot picks up tubes from left to right, starting with the 1A
position. If no tubes are detected in several consecutive positions, the input tube
robot assumes the entire rack is empty and moves on to the next rack.
Figure 82 Examples of Correct and Incorrect Sample Positions on Standard Racks
Warning
Confirm that the tubes are positioned correctly in the rack. Tube spillage will
cause loss of the sample. Do not use excessive force to position a rack while
handling a rack with tubes.
4 Fill racks with tubes in line with your laboratory configuration:

a. If you pre-sort tubes according to priority, fill all high priority or STAT tubes into
one rack.
b. If you pre-sort tubes depending on centrifugation, fill all tubes needing
centrifugation into one rack.
Important
Do not load non-centrifuged samples onto an input drawer region that is

defined for pre-centrifuged tubes. The liquid level detection identifies these
sample tubes as erroneous and the system sorts these samples to the error
region.
5 Open the drawer.
3-30 B78799AM
3
6 Load the filled racks onto the input drawers in line with your laboratory configuration.
Load racks with the rack bar code label facing the front of the drawer. Confirm the
configured drawer regions on the module console screen.
Warning
racks to the input module for processing. If there are tubes in the system that
have not been processed through the input module, the system can place an open
tube into another tube and cause a sample spill. This can result in a biohazard
risk, cross contamination or a loss of the sample.
Warning
securely onto the base frame. Handle racks with care to prevent sample spillage.
Avoid any impact to a drawer while it is extended.
Warning
Risk of sample spillage. Do not open or close the covers when filled sample racks
are placed on the module shelf. Load filled sample racks onto the input drawer.
7 Load empty racks only onto the output drawer.
Warning
Do not load filled racks onto the rack distribution region or an output drawer. This
will cause sample tube collision that can lead to sample spillage.
Important
9 Confirm that the module console screen displays the racks loaded onto the input
drawers. If a rack is not detected, open the drawer, confirm that the rack is positioned
correctly and close the drawer.
Warning
If the system does not detect racks loaded on to the input drawers, the system
cannot process samples within the expected sample processing time. Confirm that
the system has detected a rack by referring to the input module console.
B78799AM 3-31
For more information on the types of racks used on the DxA system, refer to DxA System
Racks.
Revisit Rack
If you open an input drawer while the tube robot is processing samples on a rack and
change the order of samples on the rack or place new samples into a rack, select Revisit rack
to process all samples on this rack again. The tube robot continues picking up samples and
then returns to the first position of the rack.
1 Confirm that the rack is on the same position on the drawer.

2 On the module console, select the rack on the drawer on the Home screen.
3 Select Revisit Rack.
Remove Racks from Output Drawers
Warning
Warning
Tubes recapped with DxA universal push caps cannot fully and permanently seal
tubes or hold sample liquid inside. Do not lay the tubes in a horizontal position. Do
not use for send-out testing.
1 Open the drawer.

3 Replace removed racks with empty racks on the drawer.
Warning
Do not load filled racks onto an output drawer. Robot errors caused by sample
tube collision can lead to sample spillage.
3-32 B78799AM
3
Important
Fill and Load Customized Trays onto Input Drawers
Warning
Warning

Warning
system.
Consider the following when filling and loading customized trays:

• Customized trays for the input drawer do not have to be full of analyzer racks.
• When you load a customized tray into an input drawer, the customized tray must have
a minimum of one analyzer rack with one sample tube in the correct position.
• The number of required consecutive sample positions is configured during system
installation. If the tube robot does not find sample tubes in the configured number of
consecutive positions, it assumes the rest of the analyzer rack is empty and moves on
to the next analyzer rack in the tray. The figure below shows examples of customized
trays with 3 consecutive sample positions configured. Processing attempts at empty
positions will reduce the throughput at the input. You can change this value to optimize
sample tube processing turnaround time (TAT). If you want to change this value, please
contact your Beckman Coulter Representative for assistance.
B78799AM 3-33
Figure 83 Examples of Correct and Incorrect Sample Positions on Customized Trays
1. Correct: Customized tray with only 2 positions, while one analyzer rack is
analyzer racks. The analyzer racks have empty.
sample tubes present in the first 3 3. Incorrect: Customized tray with no sample
consecutive positions. tubes present in the first 3 consecutive
2. Correct: Customized tray full of analyzer positions of the analyzer racks containing
racks. Some analyzer racks have sample sample tubes.
tubes present in the first 3 consecutive
Follow these steps to fill and load customized trays onto the input drawers on the system.
the correct regions in the drawer. Refer to Map Input Drawer Profiles.
2 Confirm that the tray is empty and on a secure surface, then open the tray door by
pushing down on the lock.
3-34 B78799AM
3
3 Place the analyzer racks with sample tubes in the tray.
Figure 85 Place Analyzer Rack with Sample Tubes in Tray

5 Carry the customized tray to the input drawer and place it on the module shelf.
Figure 86 Customized Tray with Sample Tubes
B78799AM 3-35
position.
Unload Customized Trays from Input Drawers
Warning
Warning

Warning
system.
Follow these steps to unload customized trays from the input drawers on the system.

2 Unload a customized tray from the input drawer and place it on the module shelf.
on the lock.
3-36 B78799AM
3
5 Remove the empty analyzer racks from the tray. Process the analyzer racks according to
Figure 88 Remove Empty Analyzer Racks from Tray

Replace Customized Trays on Input Drawers
Warning
Warning

Warning
system.
After customized trays are finished processing on the input drawers, the analyzer racks on
the trays become empty. Follow these instructions to replace the empty customized trays
with customized trays containing sample tubes.
B78799AM 3-37
1 Fill an empty tray with analyzer racks containing sample tubes. Refer to Fill and Load
Customized Trays onto Input Drawers.

3 Remove a customized tray with empty analyzer racks from the drawer and place it on
the module shelf.
4 Load the customized tray containing sample tubes onto the corresponding drawer
Note
Optionally, you can reuse the same customized tray by refilling it with analyzer racks
containing sample tubes. If you reuse the same customized tray, confirm that you
load the refilled customized tray onto the same drawer position, then select Revisit
Rack on the Home screen.
Fill and Load Customized Trays onto Output Drawers
Warning
Warning

Warning
system.
Warning
Risk of sample loss and analyzer malfunction. Visually inspect the cap state of the
sample tubes before loading analyzer racks from the DxA output drawers into an
offline analyzer.
3-38 B78799AM
3
Note
Refer to the cap requirements for analyzers.
When you load a customized tray onto an output drawer, the customized tray must be full of
empty analyzer racks.
Figure 89 Examples of Correct and Incorrect Customized Trays for Output Drawers
1. Correct: Customized tray full of empty 3. Incorrect: Customized tray containing a

analyzer racks. sample tube.
2. Incorrect: Customized tray missing an
analyzer rack.
Follow these steps to fill and load customized trays onto the output drawers on the system.
the correct regions in the drawer. Refer to Map Output Drawer Profiles.
on the lock.
B78799AM 3-39
3 Place the empty analyzer racks in the tray.
Figure 91 Place Empty Analyzer Rack in Tray

5 Carry the customized tray to the output drawer and place it on the module shelf.
Figure 92 Customized Tray Full of Empty Analyzer Racks
6 Open the output drawer.
3-40 B78799AM
3
position.
8 Close the output drawer.
Unload Customized Trays from Output Drawers
Warning
Warning

Warning
system.
Warning
offline analyzer.
Note
Follow these steps to unload customized trays from the output drawers on the system.

2 Unload a customized tray from the output drawer and place it on the module shelf.
B78799AM 3-41
on the lock.
5 Carefully remove the analyzer racks with sample tubes from the tray. Process the
analyzer racks according to your laboratory procedures.
Figure 94 Remove Analyzer Rack with Sample Tubes from Tray
Warning
Risk of delay in sample processing. If your laboratory process requires STAT

prioritization, manually sort the STAT sample tubes in the analyzer rack before
loading the analyzer rack onto the offline analyzer.

3-42 B78799AM
3
Replace Customized Trays on Output Drawers
Warning
Warning
Warning

Warning
system.
After customized trays are finished processing on the output drawers, the analyzer racks on
the trays become full of sample tubes. Follow these instructions to replace the full
customized trays with customized trays containing empty analyzer racks.
1 Fill an extra tray with empty analyzer racks. Refer to Fill and Load Customized Trays
onto Output Drawers.

3 Remove a customized tray with sample tubes from the drawer and place it on the
module shelf.
4 Load the customized tray full of empty analyzer racks onto the corresponding drawer
Note
The customized tray must be full of empty analyzer racks before placing it in the
output drawer.
B78799AM 3-43
Warning
Note
Optionally, you can reuse the same customized tray by refilling it with empty
analyzer racks. If you reuse the same customized tray, confirm that you close and
open the drawer before loading the same tray onto the same drawer position.
Decapper: Empty the Waste Container

Follow these instructions to empty the waste container of the decapper. The module
console indicates the fill level of the cap waste container and alerts you to empty the cap
waste container on the Consumables page.
Warning

Important
Monitor the fill level of the cap waste container before and after routine peaks. The
system cannot decap any tubes while you empty the waste container; this can interrupt
your laboratory routine.
Material Required
1 On the module console, select Consumables. On the Consumables page, the diagram
shows you which drawer to access for the cap waste.

flashing.
3-44 B78799AM
3
5 Remove the bag of cap waste from the waste container. Dispose of the cap waste
Important
level.
B78799AM 3-45
3-46 B78799AM
3
Centrifuge Module Procedures
8 Close the drawer.
Open the Centrifuge Door
Important
The manual centrifuge access procedure is only necessary after a power or

communication failure. During regular maintenance, access the centrifuge using the
user interface screen.
Warning
Do not unlock or open the centrifuge door unless the centrifuge rotor has stopped.
Visually confirm that the centrifuge rotor has stopped spinning by shining a light into
the centrifuge lid through the centrifuge deck.
B78799AM 3-47
Warning
To open the centrifuge door, do the following:

• If the centrifuge device has power, press the DOOR button on the device console.
Figure 100 Centrifuge Device Console
1. START button 3. Display

2. Function knob (turn and 4. STOP button
press to select a function) 5. DOOR button
• If the centrifuge device has no power, remove the automatic release cap from the
right side panel. Pull the release cap and attached string, and reinsert the cap.
Figure 101 Position of the Release Cap
3-48 B78799AM
3
Output Module Procedures
Figure 102 Open the Door of the Centrifuge Device
Remove Racks from Output Drawers
Warning
Warning
1 Open the drawer.

3 Replace removed racks with empty racks on the drawer.
Warning
B78799AM 3-49
Important
Fill and Load Customized Trays onto Output Drawers
Warning
Warning

Warning
system.
Warning
offline analyzer.
Note
When you load a customized tray onto an output drawer, the customized tray must be full of
empty analyzer racks.
3-50 B78799AM
3
Figure 103 Examples of Correct and Incorrect Customized Trays for Output Drawers
1. Correct: Customized tray full of empty 3. Incorrect: Customized tray containing a

analyzer racks. sample tube.
2. Incorrect: Customized tray missing an
analyzer rack.
Follow these steps to fill and load customized trays onto the output drawers on the system.
the correct regions in the drawer. Refer to Map Output Drawer Profiles.
on the lock.
B78799AM 3-51
3 Place the empty analyzer racks in the tray.
Figure 105 Place Empty Analyzer Rack in Tray

5 Carry the customized tray to the output drawer and place it on the module shelf.
Figure 106 Customized Tray Full of Empty Analyzer Racks
3-52 B78799AM
3
position.
Unload Customized Trays from Output Drawers
Warning
Warning

Warning
system.
Warning
offline analyzer.
Note
Follow these steps to unload customized trays from the output drawers on the system.

2 Unload a customized tray from the output drawer and place it on the module shelf.
B78799AM 3-53
on the lock.
5 Carefully remove the analyzer racks with sample tubes from the tray. Process the
analyzer racks according to your laboratory procedures.
Figure 108 Remove Analyzer Rack with Sample Tubes from Tray
Warning
Risk of delay in sample processing. If your laboratory process requires STAT

prioritization, manually sort the STAT sample tubes in the analyzer rack before
loading the analyzer rack onto the offline analyzer.

3-54 B78799AM
3
Replace Customized Trays on Output Drawers
Warning
Warning
Warning

Warning
system.
After customized trays are finished processing on the output drawers, the analyzer racks on
the trays become full of sample tubes. Follow these instructions to replace the full
customized trays with customized trays containing empty analyzer racks.
1 Fill an extra tray with empty analyzer racks. Refer to Fill and Load Customized Trays
onto Output Drawers.

3 Remove a customized tray with sample tubes from the drawer and place it on the
module shelf.
4 Load the customized tray full of empty analyzer racks onto the corresponding drawer
Note
The customized tray must be full of empty analyzer racks before placing it in the
output drawer.
B78799AM 3-55
Warning
Note
Optionally, you can reuse the same customized tray by refilling it with empty
analyzer racks. If you reuse the same customized tray, confirm that you close and
open the drawer before loading the same tray onto the same drawer position.
Storage Module
Important
If a tube falls to the floor of the refrigerated storage unit, contact your Beckman Coulter
representative before resuming work on the system. Do not attempt to retrieve the
tube before consulting a Beckman Coulter representative.
Access Racks from Storage
Follow these steps to manually access racks from storage.
1 Open the storage module door by pressing the push button.

Two lights flash, then stop and turn off.
3-56 B78799AM
3
Figure 109 The Two Door Access Lights and the Push Button on the Storage Module
2 When the push button illuminates, open the door of the storage module fully.
Note
Open the door within a few seconds after the push button starts illuminating. If the
push button no longer illuminates, press it again.
Figure 110 The Push Button Illuminated
Note
The light emitting diodes (LEDs) of the shelves with racks that are correctly
positioned do not illuminate. The LEDs of the shelves with no racks illuminate. Slow
flashing LEDs indicate that the rack in question must be removed. Fast flashing LEDs
indicate that there is an error.
B78799AM 3-57
Figure 111 The Light Emitting Diodes of the Empty Shelves Illuminated
Refill Empty Racks from Storage
Follow these steps to manually refill empty racks.
1 Open the storage door. Refer to Access Racks from Storage.

2 The LEDs of the empty shelves illuminate. Place the empty rack on the shelf. Magnets
guide the storage rack into the correct position. The LEDs of the shelves with racks that
are correctly positioned do not illuminate. Slow flashing LEDs indicate that the rack in
question must be removed. Fast flashing LEDs indicate that there is an error.
Warning
Risk of delay in sample processing. Do not push the racks too far into the shelves.
Stop pushing when the magnets in the storage rack attach to their counterparts in
the shelf.
3 Close the door of the storage module.
Remove racks from storage
Follow these steps to remove racks from storage.

2 Remove the rack in question from the storage module by pulling it towards yourself.
Note
After you have removed the rack in question, the LED of the shelf illuminates red.
3-58 B78799AM
3

Load Racks.
Warning
Output Module Consumables
Recapper: Refill Push Cap Drawer
Follow these instructions to refill the push cap drawer with push caps. The module console
indicates the fill level of caps in the push cap drawer and alerts you to refill the push caps
on the Consumables page.
Warning
Risk of sample contamination. Universal push caps are for single use only. Do not
reuse universal push caps.
Important
Monitor the fill level of the push cap drawer before and after routine peaks.
Material Required
• Universal push caps C27703 (not reusable)
1 On the output console, select Consumables. On the Consumables page, the diagram
shows you which drawer to access for the push caps. The letters on the diagram
correspond to the letters shown next to the consumables levels on the right side of the
screen.
2 Open the push cap drawer.

flashing.
B78799AM 3-59
3 Empty one bag of push caps into the drawer.
Important
Distribute the caps between the two front drawer compartments. Begin filling caps
into the first drawer compartment and continue filling the caps into the second
drawer compartment when the first compartment is full.
Figure 112 Emptying Bag of Push Caps into Drawer
4 Close the cap drawer.

5 You can repeat these steps and refill an additional bag of push caps. The DxA software
prevents the push cap drawer from opening if the number of caps is sufficient.
Empty the Waste Containers
Follow these instructions to empty the waste containers of the output module. The module
console indicates the fill level of the sample waste containers and alerts you to empty the
sample waste containers on the Consumables page.
Warning

3-60 B78799AM
3
Note
The number of waste containers installed depends on your laboratory configuration.

Your output module can have one or more waste containers installed. The number of
waste containers installed is indicated on the Consumables page of the output module
console.
Important
Monitor the fill level of the sample waste containers before and after routine peaks.
The system cannot dispose of sample tubes if all of the waste containers are open at
once; this can interrupt your laboratory routine.
Material Required
1 On the output console, select Consumables. On the Consumables page, the diagram
shows you which drawer to access for the waste containers. The letters on the diagram
correspond to the letters shown next to the consumables levels on the right side of the
screen.

flashing.
B78799AM 3-61
5 Remove the bag of sample waste from the waste container. Dispose of the sample waste
Important
level.
3-62 B78799AM
3
Transport System Procedures
8 Close the drawer.
B78799AM 3-63
Replace a Sample Carrier

A sample carrier has the capacity for one sample tube, which it holds upright. Sample
carriers are moved around the system in lanes on the transport to positions where the
sample tubes that they carry are needed. The image below shows sample carriers in the
correct orientation. When on the system in the correct orientation, they line up evenly, one
after another. Any defective sample carriers are routed automatically to an end segment of
the transport.
Figure 118 Sample Carriers
1 Remove a sample carrier in one of the following ways:

• Move the sample carrier into a diverter and carefully lift it out.
• Manually move a defect sample carrier along the track to the cutout region of the
process lane of the track and lift the it off the lane.
3-64 B78799AM
3
Figure 119 Removing a Sample Carrier
2 Place a new sample carrier as shown below, paying attention to place it facing the
correct way, with the tail at the back.
There are two places where you can introduce sample carriers on the DxA system:
— At the first transport segment (near the input module)
— At the opposite end of the system
B78799AM 3-65
Figure 120 Adding a Sample Carrier
3-66 B78799AM
3
Sample Search
Sample Search
Follow these steps to search for sample tubes on the system and retrieve sample
information. You can search for samples either in REMISOL Advance or in DxA.
Note
After the input tube robot has placed a tube in a rack in the rack distribution region, the
system has registered the bar code label of the sample tube. Once the input tube robot
processes a tube, the bar code can be retrieved using the Sample Search bar.
1 Search for a sample tube by doing one of the following:

a. On the DxA system console, search for a sample tube by doing one of the following:
— Type in the bar code number.
— Using the bar code scanner, scan the bar code on the sample tube.
— Using the DxA sample search bar, type in the patient name or patient ID
number.
b. In REMISOL Advance on the Menu bar, select the Search icon or enter Ctrl + F.
2 Enter any of the following information:

• sample ID
• patient name
• patient ID
Figure 121 Sample search bar
3 Select the sample from the list of results. The sample details are displayed. Refer to
Detailed Sample Log.
Remove Sample Tube from the System

Removing a sample tube without following the instructions can cause sample processing
errors when the sample tube is reintroduced into the system.
There are two ways to remove sample tubes from DxA:

• Via System Console: If you want to remove an individual sample, you can search for the
sample tube and mark it as removed using the Sample Search bar.
• Exchange the rack on the drawer
B78799AM 3-67
Remove Sample Tube from the System
Remove Sample Tube Via the System Console

This procedure explains how to remove a sample from the system using the system console
user interface.
1 Open the drawer.

2 Remove the sample from the rack, without removing the rack from the drawer.
3 Close the drawer.
4 On the system console, scan the bar code on the sample tube or enter the sample ID in
the Sample search bar.
5 Open the Detailed sample log.
6 Select Mark sample as removed.
Exchange the Rack on the Drawer

This procedure explains how to remove a sample from the system without having to use the
system console user interface.
1 Open the drawer.

2 Remove the rack that contains the sample tube.
3 Put a new empty rack in the same position.
4 Close the drawer.
The system now recognizes that there are no sample tubes in the rack and considers the
sample tubes as removed from the system.
Recall Sample Tube

You can use the Recall feature to retrieve samples from the connected storage. When
samples are retrieved from the connected storage, they are placed in a specific recall region
in an output drawer.
This procedure describes how to retrieve samples via the system console.
1 Enter the Sample ID in the search field or select the Sample ID from the list of samples in
the Sample Events page.
2 Select the Recall button in the Sample History page.
3 Select the destination in the Recall Sample dialog box and select OK.
3-68 B78799AM
CHAPTER 4
System Configuration
About System Configuration
A system configuration is a collection of settings that together define and control the
operation and workflow of all analyzers on the DxA system. A system configuration
includes communication settings for the REMISOL Advance, test and test panel definitions,
sample tubes, decapping/recapping and storage information. For further information about
the REMISOL Advance configuration, see the REMISOL Advance Instructions for Use.
Use the System Configuration to customize the operation of DxA system to fit your
requirements. A Beckman Coulter field service engineer helps you to establish a custom
configuration when the system is installed. This configuration can be modified and updated
at any time. When adding a new device or introducing a new test, updating the
configuration is necessary.
Configuration settings are stored and used as a collection. If you customize the behavior of
one part of the system, the new setting is stored with the other configuration options in a
collection. The individual settings within a configuration collection are therefore mutually
consistent before the configuration can be activated. For example, you cannot activate a
configuration that enables a test on a device if there is not a code defined for that test on the
device type.
A system can use only one collection of configuration settings at a time, which is referred to
as the active configuration. The draft configuration is a copy of the active configuration that
has been modified. Changes made to the draft configuration are not used by the system
until you activate the configuration. You can save a draft configuration collection for later
use or activation. For more information, refer to About the Draft Configuration.
As you edit the configuration, a prompt can appear at the bottom of the page to request
missing information. Prompts must be resolved before you can activate the new
configuration.
Several actions can be performed from the System Configuration page. These actions
include:
• View and Restore a Previously Active Configuration
• Save a Draft Configuration
• Load a Draft Configuration
• Export a Draft Configuration
• View Differences Between the Active and Draft Configurations
• Discard Changes in the Draft Configuration
• Activate a New Configuration
Features
The configuration interface is designed to help you create, edit, and review your laboratory
configuration as you make changes. In general, you base your configuration changes on a
copy of the active configuration. The changes that you make in this copy or draft are not
implemented until you or another user activates the configuration.
B78799AM 4-1
View and Restore a Previously Active Configuration
The System Configuration displays the differences between your new configuration and
the current or active configuration. This allows you to quickly scan the pending changes and
verify that the new configuration is correct.
Drafts and Collection Subsets

If you are making multiple changes to the configuration, or if your new configuration is
complex, you can save an interim copy or draft of your working copy. You can then retrieve
this draft at a later time to continue working.
Rollback
When you activate a new configuration, that configuration is stored permanently in the
database. Because each activated configuration collection is stored in the database, you can
audit, retrieve and review details of any previously activated configuration. You can also
select a previously activated configuration and roll back the DxA system to that
configuration.
Note
To discard current configuration changes that have not been activated, select Discard
All Changes.
Access Rights for Configuration

Only users with System Configuration authorization can view the system configuration
options.
Warning
Only assign the system configuration authorization to trained lab staff. Operators
without authorization can not access Protected Health Information.
If a user has the authorization Super User, the following authorizations are selected by
default:
• Manage Users
• System Configuration
• View Patient Information
• Perform Maintenance
• Perform Service

The active configuration is the collection of settings that defines and controls the workflow
and behavior of DxA system. The active configuration cannot be modified directly; it can
only be changed by activating a draft configuration. When a draft configuration is activated,
4-2 B78799AM
4
all settings in the current active configuration are replaced with the settings in the draft
configuration.
A history of all previous active configurations is maintained. Any previous active

configuration can be viewed or reactivated by using the Rollback feature.
Any previously activated configuration can be loaded into the draft configuration and
viewed.
Note
When you load a previously active configuration, that configuration replaces the
existing draft configuration, and any changes that were made to the existing draft
configuration are discarded. To preserve those changes, save the draft configuration
before restoring a previously active configuration.
View and Restore a Previous Configuration using Rollback
1 On the system console, select Menu > System Configuration.
2 Select Rollback to display the list of previously activated configurations. Previously

Committed Configurations displays the effective date of all previous active
configurations, and the user name that activated the configuration. It also shows any
activate comments associated with the configuration.
3 Select the configuration you want to view or restore from the list of previously
committed configurations. The selected configuration is highlighted in blue.
4 Select OK to load the selected previously activated configuration. Any changes in the
draft configuration are lost. The Summary of Changes is updated to show the differences
between the current active system configuration and the previously activated
configuration recently loaded.
5 You can view the previously activated configuration by going to the configuration page.
The links in Summary of Changes can help you to refer to what is different between the
loaded previous configuration and the current active configuration.
6 The previous configuration can be activated if required. For more information, refer to
Activate a New Configuration.
B78799AM 4-3
Draft Configuration
Draft Configuration
About the Draft Configuration

The draft configuration is a working draft copy of the active configuration. The draft
configuration is editable, but changes made to the draft configuration do not become
effective until the draft configuration is activated.
Initially, the draft configuration is an exact copy of the active configuration. As changes are
made to the draft configuration, the draft configuration differs from the active
configuration. The differences between the draft configuration and active configuration are
shown as a Summary of Changes on the System Configuration page.
Changes can be made to the draft configuration by:

• Editing configuration items through the configuration page.
• Loading configuration items from a previously exported file.
• Loading a previously saved draft.
• Opening a previous active configuration by using the Rollback feature.
Changes made to the draft configuration do not become effective until the draft
configuration is activated. For example, after configuring a new test in the draft
configuration, the test cannot be ordered or run in the lab until the draft configuration
including the new test is activated. When activated, the test becomes available to order.
When a draft configuration is activated, all settings go into effect immediately. Samples in
progress and new samples, added after activating the draft configuration, will use the
settings for the newly activated configuration.
Save a Draft Configuration

You can save your draft configuration (the collection of configuration settings that you are
editing) at any time without activating the configuration.
2 Look at the Summary of Changes to confirm that the draft has all the changes that you
want to save. For more information, refer to View Differences Between the Active and
Draft Configurations.
3 Select Save Draft to open the Select Configuration File dialog box.
4 Select the drive and folder to which to save the draft configuration file. The Drives list
includes the local hard drive and any external USB drives that are available. Folders
displays the folders contained on the selected drive.
5 In Filename, enter a name for the draft configuration file.
6 Select OK to save the draft configuration.
4-4 B78799AM
4
Draft Configuration
Load a Draft Configuration

You can load saved draft configurations from a local file or from an external USB drive at
any time. Loading a draft configuration discards all changes in the current draft
configuration.
Note
When you load a draft, any changes that you have made in the current draft
configuration are discarded and cannot be recovered unless you have saved them or
exported them to a file.
2 Select Load Draft to open the Select Configuration File dialog.
3 Select the source for importing content.

4 Select the configuration file to load.
5 Select Save.
The selected file is loaded and replaces the current draft configuration. DxA displays the
differences between the active configuration and the loaded draft configuration in the
Summary of Changes.
Export a Draft Configuration

You can export a draft configuration and save it to a file on the local drive or on an external
USB drive.
2 Select Export Active Configuration to File to open the Export Configuration Items dialog.
3 Select the File Name and OK to open the Select Configuration File dialog.
4 Specify where to save the export file.

— In File Name, enter a file name for the export file.
— Select Save to save the export file.
B78799AM 4-5
View Differences Between the Active and Draft Configurations
View Differences Between the Active and Draft Configurations

The Summary of Changes list is updated if a new configuration is activated from another
workstation while you are working with a draft configuration. It shows the differences
between your draft configuration and the new active configuration.
Note
If the Summary of Changes list is not displayed, then the draft configuration is identical
to the active configuration.
DxA system displays the status of items in the Summary of Changes list in parentheses.
There are three item statuses:
• Added - The configuration item is new and exists only in the draft configuration. DxA
system displays items that are added as links that open the configuration pages for the
items. When the draft configuration is activated, new items are added to the active
configuration.
• Modified - The configuration item has been changed. It exists in both the active
configuration and the draft configuration, but it has different settings in each
configuration. DxA system displays items that are modified as links that open the
configuration pages for the items. When the draft configuration is activated, the
settings in the draft configuration replace the corresponding settings in the active
configuration.
• Deleted - The configuration item has been removed from the draft configuration.
When the draft configuration is activated, deleted items are removed from the active
configuration.
Select the link on a changed configuration item to open the configuration page for that item.
Note
The configuration settings shown are not activated and do not take effect until you
activate the draft configuration.
Discard Changes in the Draft Configuration

At any time, you can discard changes that have been made to the draft configuration.
Discarding changes restores the changed items in the draft configuration to match the
active configuration. Deleted items (items that were removed from the draft configuration,
but still exist in the active configuration) are restored in the draft configuration. Modified
items in the draft configuration are changed to match the configuration in the active
configuration. Added items (items that were created in the draft configuration and do not
exist in the active configuration) are removed from the draft configuration.
4-6 B78799AM
4
Activate a New Configuration
Important
Discarded changes cannot be recovered unless the draft has saved to a file, exists as a
previous active configuration, or the changed items have been exported to a file.
Changes are discarded from the draft configuration immediately.
2 Select Discard Draft to discard any changes listed. The selected changes are removed
from the list in the Summary of Changes.
Discard All Changes

You can discard all changes that have been made to the draft configuration. After you
discard all changes, the draft configuration is an exact copy of the active configuration.
2 Select Discard Draft to restore all configuration items shown in Summary of Changes to
match the active configuration. Summary of Changes is cleared, indicating that the draft
configuration and active configuration are identical.
Activate a New Configuration

Before you can activate a configuration, all configuration errors and conflicts must be
resolved. If there are errors in the configuration, they are shown at the bottom of the page.
Select View to go to the specific page on which you can resolve the conflict.
After editing the system configuration, return to the main homepage and select Activate
Draft in the Draft Configuration section.
Important
The new configuration does not apply to sample tubes already being processed or
to sample tubes in storage with related workflows.
Create Named Destinations

Follow these steps to manage the preferences for Named Destinations. Destinations are
defined as an analyzer, error collection area, storage rack, or recall rack.
B78799AM 4-7
2 Under normal operations, the options (listed in the following steps) to create, copy,
rename, and delete a named destination are grayed out because the information is
imported directly from REMISOL Advance.
a. Select Create or Edit Named Destination > New.
b. Enter the name, select the Named Destination type and then OK.
c. To copy a Named Destination, select a Named Destination then Copy. Enter the name,
and then select OK.
d. To rename a Named Destination, select a Named Destination then Rename. Enter the
name, and then select OK.
e. To delete a Named Destination, select a Named Destination then Delete. Enter the
3 To edit the preferences for the Named Destination types, refer to:
— Error Collection Area
— Recall Rack
— Analyzers
— Storage Rack
4 Select System Configuration to return to the System Configuration page.
Error Collection Area
The following variables for an Error Collection Area can be edited:

— Routing Priority: To select a routing priority, enter a number. A lower value indicates
a higher priority and a higher value indicates a lower priority. No selected value
indicates the lowest priority.
— Error Types Sent To This Destination: To add a specific message for an error type, for
example a bar code error, scroll down the list and select the box next to the error
message. To delete an error type, clear the box next to the error. Alternatively,
select Default, which generates a standard default message when the specific error
occurs.
4-8 B78799AM
4
Recall Rack
A recall rack is used to recall a tube from the storage module. The following variables
for a Recall Rack can be edited:
a higher priority and a higher value indicates a lower priority. No selected number
Analyzers
Analyzers include an online or connected analyzer, an offline analyzer or a send out, when a
sample is sent out to an external analyzer. Only REMISOL Advance can create a new
analyzer, however the settings for analyzers are managed by the operator.
Warning
Risk of reporting erroneous sample results due to cross contamination of samples

during the analyzer sample aspiration step. Some tests are more sensitive to sample
cross contamination. For known sensitive tests, use specific draw or aliquots. If this is
not possible or cannot be ensured by your standard lab process, create a Remisol rule
to identify sensitive tests and send sample first to an offline region for aliquot
creation.
Tip
Set up an offline analyzer as a backup in case an analyzer is not available. This will
ensure that tests are processed in the preferred sequence, even if a connected analyzer
is temporarily unavailable.
The following variables for an analyzer can be edited:

a higher priority and a higher value indicates a lower priority. No selected value
— Caps Accepted: Select the cap requirements for the sample tube. The operator must
select a minimum of one cap state.
— No Cap: Select this option decap all the sample tubes.
— Cap from Manufacturer: Select this option to use sample tubes with original
manufacturer's cap.
B78799AM 4-9
— Push Cap: Select this option to process sample tubes with push caps.
— Screw Cap: Select this option to process sample tubes with screw caps.
There are special considerations if you have a STA R Max analyzer connected to
DxA. For more information on the options for your STA R Max, refer to STA R Max
Analyzer.
— Tube Types Accepted: To add a tube type permitted on the specific analyzer, select
the box next to the specific tube type. To remove a tube type, clear the box next to
the specific tube type. Enter a value in Dead Volume (in microliters). The operator
must select a minimum of one tube type to be associated with the analyzer.
Warning
There is a possible risk of underfilled tubes being sent to an analyzer due to a

technical variance of the liquid level detection (LLD) measurement, which can be
an issue especially for coagulation testing. To avoid this, it i s highly recommended
to take this tolerance into account when establishing the fill level detection
configuration with respect to the draw volume and dead volume for each tube
type used. Validate the under fill detection for each tube type used.
Warning
Risk of sample loss and analyzer malfunction. When assigning tube types to a
named destination, consider the analyzer specifications for accepted tube types.
Confirm that the tube types selected are compatible with the analyzer.
Warning
There is a possible risk of aspiration errors due to under-filled tubes being sent to
an analyzer. To avoid this, use the following recommendations when setting the
dead volume:
— For 15/16 mm primary sample tubes containing serum, plasma, whole blood or
urine, set the Minimum Dead Volume to be at least 700 µl
— For 12/13 mm primary sample tubes containing serum, plasma, whole blood or
urine, set the Minimum Dead Volume to be at least 450 µl
— For 12/13/15 mm secondary sample tubes containing serum, plasma or urine, set the
Minimum Dead Volume to be at least 200 µl
Warning
Certain tube types contain solid particles, such as plastic beads (like in the Greiner
Bio-One 445042 tubes) which can falsely add to serum volume. To avoid this, set
the dead volume to at least 10% of the nominal fill volume of a tube.
4-10 B78799AM
4
Important
®
To avoid a collision between the DiaSorin LIAISON XL pipettor and 13x100 sample
tubes during aspiration, configure the minimum draw volume or the dead volume
for sample tubes so that they are filled to a minimum of 74 mm below the upper
rim.
— Priority settings: Indicate which samples the specific analyzer accepts. The options
are: STAT and routine means the analyzer is enabled for both urgent and routine
samples. Select STAT only to set the analyzer as urgent samples only. Select Routine
only for routine samples only.
— Tests Enabled For This Analyzer: Select the tests enabled for an offline analyzer. To
add a test, select the box next to the test. To remove it, clear the box. The tests are
also displayed to the right of the table as blue rectangles, with each rectangle
representing a specific test. Each test can also be deleted by selecting the white
cross in the blue rectangle. To select all tests, select the blue rectangle Select
matches. To delete all tests, select the blue rectangle Clear All.
Note
For online analyzers, the Tests Enabled For This Analyzer information is
imported from REMISOL Advance. This information is not modifiable.
STA R Max Analyzer
There are two types of STA R Max analyzers: ones that accept pierce-through caps and ones
that do not.
Depending on which analyzer you have, you must set up the Named Destinations options in
a certain way :
• If your analyzer is pierce-through capable, ensure that the list in Tube Types Accepted
going to the analyzer are all pierce-through tubes and Cap from Manufacturer is
selected.
• If your analyzer is pierce-through capable and you want to use both pierce-through
and non-pierce-through sample tubes, then DxA must decap all sample tubes. Ensure
No Cap is the only option selected.
• No Cap only: If you select this option, all sample tubes are decapped for processing.
Note
The maximum tube height for this configuration is 100 mm.
For more information on cap configuration, refer to Cap Accepted in Analyzers.
B78799AM 4-11
Storage Rack
The following variables for a Storage Rack can be edited:
• Routing Priority: To select a routing priority, enter a number. A lower value indicates a
higher priority and a higher value indicates a lower priority. No selected number
• Cap Configuration For Storage: Select the cap requirements for the sample tube. The
options are No Cap or Any Cap.
• Temperature in Storage: Select the circle next to the temperature setting to indicate the
required temperature for a specific storage rack. Only one option can be selected per
storage rack.
Warning
Risk of sample loss due to wrong storage temperature. Temperature sensor drift can
occur over time. According to your laboratory procedure, validate storage conditions
with a calibrated temperature measurement device.
• Sample Tube Types: To enable a sample tube type to be sent to a specific rack, select the
box next to the sample tube type name. To remove a tube type, select the box to remove
the tick. Multiple tubes can be selected.
Connected Storage
The following variables for the ECSD (Connected Storage) can be edited:
• Routing Priority: To select a routing priority, enter a number. A lower value indicates a
higher priority and a higher value indicates a lower priority. No selected number
4-12 B78799AM
4
Important
If there is more than one connected ECSD, then the Routing Priority number must
be the same for each ECSD.
• Cap to add: A cap must always be placed on a sample tube in the ECSD. Indicate the
type of cap to be added.
• Sample removal after the sample tube type storage duration expires for this destination:
Indicate the preferred method of removal. For more information about these settings,
see Storage Sample Management.
Storage Sample Management

You can manage how samples are removed from the ECSD by applying expired sample
management settings to each sample container type. For more information, refer to
Configure Sample Container Types.
Possible reasons to remove samples from the system are the following:
• Sample has reached the pre-defined expiration date
• Sample has not reached the expiration date, but is moved to an offline storage to free
up space in the ECSD
The storage capacity must be considered so that the daily workload does not overfill the
ECSD before the scheduled removal or disposal is complete.
The storage sample management configuration is done during the initial DxA system
configuration and the setup is based on your lab workflow. To schedule when the removal
or disposal action takes place, refer to Manual Removal Settings and Auto Disposal Settings.
For each sample container type, you can select one of the following options:
• Manual Removal Only
• Automatic Disposal Only
• Both
About Automatic Disposal and Manual Removal
When you configure a sample tube type for Automatic Disposal, DxA automatically disposes
of samples of this tube type as defined in the Auto Disposal settings. This means the
samples are in a rack that is taken from the ECSD, moved to a free space in the output and
then the samples are placed one-by-one in the waste bin.
When you configure a sample type for Manual Removal, DxA signals that racks are ready for
removal and then you can manually remove these racks from the ECSD. You can open the
ECSD door at any time and remove racks set to be manually removed. When you open the
door, the system illuminates the expired racks, indicating they are ready for removal. You
can also configure reminders to manually remove racks from storage.
You can assign one of the following storage duration options for each sample container
type:
B78799AM 4-13
• Shorter Duration: For samples meant to stay for a short duration in the ECSD (for
example, between 2 and 24 hours)
• Longer Duration: For samples meant to stay for a longer duration (for example, over 24
hours in the ECSD)
• Do Not Store Here: For samples not meant to be stored in the ECSD. These samples are
intended to go to another configured storage destination.
For Two Connected Storage Modules
If your lab has two storage modules connected to DxA 5000, then you can configure which
sample container types go to which storage. To do this, you need to confirm that both
storage devices are in the list of Configure Named Destinations. If not, then you must add the
second storage module to this list.
The design logic for this feature is based on an "opt out" approach, meaning, you select
which sample container types should not be sent to the selected storage device (by
selecting Do Not Store Here).
Once both storage devices have been added to the list, then you can select the desired
Connected Storage, select the sample tube type and select Do Not Store Here for any sample
container type that you do not want sent to the selected storage device. Then select the
second Connected Storage, select the same sample tube type and select the options for
Manual Removal or Automatic Disposal accordingly. Then you will have the configuration for
that sample container type not going to the first Connected Storage, but going to the second
Connected Storage with either Manual Removal or Automatic Disposal.
Manual Removal Only
The Manual Removal Only option is used for sample types that must be kept in a
refrigerated storage device longer than the ECSD capacity allows.
Automatic Disposal Only
This option is used for sample container types that can be managed within your workflow
without requiring manual handling of racks.
Important
If you select Automatic Disposal Only, and the ECSD is full, then the system stops until
sample tubes are removed to free up space. In this situation, contact your local
Beckman Coulter Representative to assist with changing the configuration.
Both
When Both is selected, a combination of Manual Removal and Automatic Disposal can be
configured.
What Happens When the ECSD Reaches the Critical Fill Level
When the ECSD has reached the critically full state, the Manual Removal and Automatic
Disposal workflow continues as usual. However, in an effort to free up space in the ECSD,
any Manual Removal racks containing at least one expired sample are also identified for
4-14 B78799AM
4
Manage Tests
removal. These racks may contain samples whose storage expiration time has not yet been
reached.
Warning
Storage racks that are indicated for removal can contain sample tubes that have not
yet expired depending on configuration and fill level of storage. Always understand
sample status before disposing of sample tubes. Make sure that storage capacity
matches the number of samples processed in the lab per day and desired storage
times.
Manage Tests
Follow these steps to manage the test settings, when a new test is set up.
Note
Under normal operations, the options to create, copy, rename, and delete a test are
grayed out because the information is imported directly from REMISOL Advance.
2 Select Configure Tests.
3 Edit the following variables for an individual test:

— Description: To edit a description, select the current description and enter a new
name or description.
— Code: A code is used between DxA and REMISOL Advance to communicate. Each
test is defined by a code, which must match on both REMISOL Advance and DxA.
— Discipline: Select the drop-down arrow to select the required test discipline.
— IS ISE Test: Select the box if a Sodium-Potassium-Chloride test is required.
— Required Centrifugation State: Select the circle in the column to set the required
centrifugation state for the sample tube. The options are: 1X (spun once), 2X (spun
twice), and Unspun (no centrifugation required).
— Sample Volume: Edit the minimum sample volume required for each test (in
microliters).
— Test Stability: Select the maximum time period a sample can be reused for further
analysis. Select the drop-down arrow to change the period of time from hour to day.
— Storage Temperature: Select the drop-down arrow to set the storage temperature.
The options are: Ambient- intended for offline storage, Refrigerate- online (DxA)
B78799AM 4-15
Test Type Priority
storage, Freeze- intended for offline storage, or Deep freeze- intended for offline
storage.
— Requires warm up: Indicate the box if re-warming of the test tube is required before
more testing.
Test Type Priority

Follow these steps to manage the priority order of tests. In the case of low sample volume,
the system prioritizes certain tests. For example, the system has three tests to perform, but
due to low volume, it can only perform two. In this configuration, the operator ranks the
order of the tests depending on priority level.
In the case of low sample volume, refer to Routing Exceptions.
2 Select Test Type Priority.
3 In the main window, each colored rectangle represents a specific test, with each test
identified by a code marked in the rectangle. To change the priority order of the tests,
drag and drop the rectangles. The test with the highest priority is positioned at the top
of the main frame. The lowest priority is the test located at the bottom of the window.
Note
Each color represents a different test discipline, denoted in the left column. To
change the color of a discipline, refer to Configure Disciplines.
Configure Disciplines
Follow these steps to manage the Discipline color code. A discipline in a laboratory is an
area such as biochemistry, immunology, and so on.
2 Select Configure Disciplines.
3 The operator changes the color of the discipline by selecting the drop-down arrow and
selecting a color.
4-16 B78799AM
4
Configure Sample Container Types
Create and Copy a Discipline
1 To create a new discipline, select Configure Disciplines > New.
2 Enter a name and assign a color to the discipline using the drop-down arrow. Select OK.
3 To copy a new discipline, select Configure Disciplines, and then select the discipline you
want to copy.
4 Select Copy.
5 Enter the name, and then select OK.
Renaming a Discipline
1 Select Configure Disciplines, then select the discipline you want to rename.
2 Select Rename.
3 Enter a new name, and then select OK.
Deleting a Discipline
1 Select Configure Disciplines, then the discipline you want to delete.
2 Select Delete and then OK.
Configure Sample Container Types

Follow these steps to manage the sample container types.
2 Select Configure Sample Container Types, and then a sample container type name in the
left column.
3 The following variables can be edited for a specific sample container type:
— Bar Code Extension: The Prefix or Suffix can be used for verification of the sample
container type. For example, Heparin plasma, EDTA plasma, citrated plasma and so
on. Enter the code in Value.
— Storage:
— Storage Expiration: The storage expiration time is the minimum time the
sample remains in the ECSD. When the storage expiration time of all sample
tubes in a rack is reached, the sample tubes on the rack are either
B78799AM 4-17
Rename Physical Container Types
automatically disposed of or the system indicates the rack is ready for manual
removal, depending on the storage management setting configured for this
sample container type. For more information, refer to Storage Sample
Management.
Note
The expiration time starts when the input distribution robot scans the
sample tube for the first time.
— Default Storage Temperature: Edit the storage temperature by selecting the
drop-down arrow.
— Fluid Type: Select the drop-down arrow to indicate the type of fluid in the sample
container.
— Volume: Edit the Minimum and Maximum draw volume required for the tube
sample (in microliters). The maximum volume is the sum of the maximum draw
volume plus the solid particles volume, if they are present in the tube.
Note
The fill volume is important for coagulation tubes.

— Evaluate ratio check with no historical data?: This inspect is only available for non-
gel tubes. If a non-gel tube without historical data is loaded, for example the first
time it is run on DxA, the ratio check occurs if enabled. This allows the system to
skip centrifuge, if the tube is loaded on the Skip centrifuge input region. Enter the
minimum percentage of serum required in a tube type to be considered spun.
— Unknown Sample Container Types: Select the sample storage expiration time. Edit
the period of time by selecting the drop-down arrow.
— Tests that can be run with this sample container type: To select a test that is enabled
with the sample container type, select the box next to the test. To remove a test,
clear the box. The tests are also displayed to the right of the table as blue
rectangles, with each rectangle representing a specific test. Each test can also be
deleted by selecting the white X in the blue rectangle. To select all tests, select
Select Matches. You can also use Select Matches to select tests with names matching
the name entered in the search field. To delete all tests, select Clear All.
4 Select the Sample Container Type you want to rename. Select Rename. Enter a new
Rename Physical Container Types
1 Select Rename Physical Container Types, then select the container type you want to
rename.
2 Select Rename.
4-18 B78799AM
4
Automatic Disposal Settings
3 Enter a new name, and then select OK.
Automatic Disposal Settings

Follow these steps to manage the Automatic Disposal Schedule for samples in storage.
2 Select Auto Disposal Settings.
3 To add a new Automatic Disposal Time, select a day or days, then a time using the drop-
down arrow.
Keep expiration times of your sample container types the same for similar sample
container types.
4 Select Add.
5 The selected times for each day are displayed in the main window. To delete a time,
select the white cross located next to a time in the blue rectangle.
Manual Removal Settings

Follow these steps to set up and manage the Manual Removal Settings. The samples must be
removed manually from connected storage modules.
2 Select Manual Removal Settings.
3 To add a Manual Removal Notification, select a day in the left column, then a time using
the drop-down arrow.
4 Select Add.
5 The selected times for each day are then displayed in the main window. To delete a time,
select the white cross located next to a time in the blue rectangle.
6 To edit the racks for removal, select the number in the box in Mark Racks For Removal
and insert the required number.
B78799AM 4-19
Report Types
Report Types
Follow these steps to manage the settings of a report. A screenshot report can be used by
the operator to make a screenshot of an event or for support.
2 Select Frequency and Day.
3 Select a report and enter the required variables for the test:
— Destination: To allocate a destination for a report, click on Detailed Report Settings.
Follow the procedures then return to Report Types. Select the drop-down arrow in
the destination box to select the destination.
— Auto-Print: Select the box if you require the report to be printed automatically. as
well as the scheduled day and time the report should be printed.
— Frequency and Day: Select the frequency of the report from: daily, where the day
control is disabled,weekly, where the operator can select the day of the week to
print the report, or monthly, where the operator can select the day of the month of
print, e.g. first and Wednesday.
Detailed Report Settings

Follow these steps to configure detailed report settings.
2 Select Detailed Report Settings. To set up a new Report Destination, select New.
3 In the horizontal column under Report Destinations, select the type of report destination
(printer or pdf) and the destination by clicking on the drop-down arrow. If you select
PDF, your are redirected to a new window where you can browse for the required
location. If you select Printer, click on the drop-down arrow in Destination and select the
required destination.
4 The following variables can also be edited:

— Page Size: Select the required report size.
— Optional Header Content: Enter any additional text which appears on the left, the
right, or the middle of the report.
— Report Destinations: Select the type of report destination and the destination by
clicking on the drop-down arrow. If you select PDF, you are redirected to a new
window where you can browse for the required location. If you select Printer, click
on the drop-down arrow in Destination and select the required destination.
4-20 B78799AM
4
Event Configuration
5 To create a Report Destination, select New. To delete a Report Destination, select a

horizontal column, then select Delete.
Event Configuration
Follow these steps to set up and manage notifications regarding event configuration. An
event is an alert about something happening on the system.
2 Select Event Configuration, and then select a potential system occurrence under the
Event heading.
3 Allocate a level of Severity to the event by selecting Notification, Warning, or Critical.
4 Select the box in the Enabled column to set up the notification.
LIS Settings
Follow these steps to edit the Laboratory Information System (LIS) Settings, which enables
DxA to be synchronized with REMISOL Advance.
Note
It is highly recommended that the operator talks to a Beckman Coulter representative

about these settings during the installation process, or consults the field service
engineer before changing any settings.
2 Select LIS Settings.
3 The following Protocol Settings and Communication Settings can be selected:

— LIS Protocol: Connect to the system, REMISOL Advance, CLSI LIS01-A/LIS02-A
(ASTM).
— Device Identification: Select the sender name, DxA REMISOL, and the sender ID, DxA.
— Text Encoding: Select either the variable-width encoding UTF-8, which represents
all characters in the Unicode character set. Streams of bytes are not prefixed with a
byte order mark. Or select the second option, GB18030 encoding, which is the
B78799AM 4-21
Routing Exceptions
Chinese government standard that supports both simplified and traditional

Chinese characters.
— General Settings: Select Notify of LIS orders without system configuration which
refers to the scenario when REMISOL Advance sends a test order to DxA, but it
contains a test code that is not defined in DxA. Since the configuration is
synchronized with REMISOL Advance, this situation should in reality never happen.
If it does, only because the lab added a test at REMISOL Advance, but did not
synchronize the configuration. It is recommended to select Issue host queries,
which sends queries to the host, REMISOL Advance after the input tube robot has
read the bar code of the tube. DxA then receives the test orders to be processed. If
Issue host queries is not selected, REMISOL Advance is asked to dynamically
download to DxA.
Note
Both dynamic download and host queries are possible.
The host query response timeout refers to the maximum time in which REMISOL
Advance responds to a query.
— Individual Message Transmission: It is highly recommended to select Enable sample
tracking. REMISOL Advance manages this information (tube history) and enables
tracking history on the system.
— LIS Codes for Sample Type: The codes, generated by default, are aligned with
REMISOL Advance codes. Any edits must be in alignment with REMISOL Advance
codes.
— Connection Type: It is highly recommended to use TCP/IP setting as the connection
type between REMISOL Advance and DxA.
— Physical Connection: It is highly recommended to use two channels.
— Settings: It is highly recommended to select two different ports (two channels). The
IP address refers to the IP address of the REMISOL Advance server.
— Records per Frame: It is highly recommended selecting Multiple records per frames.
In ASTM protocol, a frame is a unit of data that is transmitted between the LIS and
the device. The number of records to be sent can be configured either one record
per frame or multiple records per frame. By default, it is set to send one record per
frame. If it is configured to send multiple records, different record types can be
allowed to transmit in a single frame. The Maximum Bytes Per Frame is set by
default at 8191.
Routing Exceptions
When a sample tube cannot follow its scheduled path due to insufficient sample volume,
system issues or test-related issues, a routing exception occurs and the system sends the
sample tube to the user-selected destination. The default destination for these sample
tubes is the configured Error region.
4-22 B78799AM
4
Routing Exceptions
Note
Define the error region, create a drawer profile containing the error region and map the
profile to an output drawer. To manage your preferences for the error region, refer to
Create Named Destination.
Follow these steps to manage the configuration of Routing Exceptions.
2 Select Routing Exceptions.
3 Select one of the following options in Routing Behavior for when the highest priority
destination is not available:
• Best Effort: This option skips unavailable tests on a high priority destination to run
them later. Sample tubes are sent to the next best available destination based on
the configured destination priorities.
• Strict Sequence: This option does not allow skipping of unavailable tests on a high
priority destination. Sample tubes are sent to the configured destination for
routing exceptions.
4 For insufficient sample volume, select one of the following options in Insufficient Volume
Options:
• Route to error region: Sample tubes with insufficient sample volume to perform all
required tests are sent directly to the error region.
• Process as much as possible: When no further sample processing is possible, the
sample tubes are sent to the error region.
Important
STAT samples are always routed to an error region. The Destination for Routing
Exceptions settings only apply to routine samples.
5 For system issues or test-related issues, the default destination for Routing Exceptions is
the Error region. The possible issues are the following:
• Instruction not available: The test for the sample tube is not available.
• Centrifuge not available: The centrifuge cannot process samples.
• Decapper not available: The decapper cannot process samples.
• No tests to process: The sample tube does not have any test orders.
To change the destination for routine samples to Storage, do the following:
a. Select Storage in Route To.
b. Change the REMISOL Advance configuration. Contact your local Beckman Coulter
Representative for assistance with this.
B78799AM 4-23
Input Module Configuration
Routing Expiration Timer
Routine: If a routine sample was routed to storage because the Centrifuge, the Decapper
or an analytical instruction or test was not available and if the sample has stayed longer
than the configured time in storage, the sample will be routed to an error region.
Order Expiration Timer
Order Expiration: If a sample was routed to storage because no order was available and
if the sample has stayed longer than the configured time in storage, the sample will be
routed to an error region.
Important
Align the storage expiration times in Configure Sample Container Types with the
expiration timers to ensure that disposal is not performed before the expiration
timers have timed out. In case of misconfiguration, samples are routed to an error
region.
6 Select Activate Draft to activate the draft configuration.

To configure the input module:
1. Create Input Regions

2. Create Input Drawer Profiles
3. Create Output Drawers Profiles
Note
The input module also has one output drawer containing the default error region.
4. Map Input Drawer Profiles
5. Map Output Drawer Profiles
Input Regions
Follow the procedures in this section to create and edit input regions. Input drawers are
divided into input regions, such as STAT or routine.
Create Input Regions
2 In Input Regions, select New.
3 Enter the name, and then select OK.
4-24 B78799AM
4
4 Select a value for the following variables:

— Priority: Each input region requires a priority ranking for processing. A lower value
indicates a higher priority and a higher value indicates a lower priority.
— Processing: A processing instruction for an input region dictates how the system
processes the samples within that region. For example, samples can skip
centrifugation or they can be routed to predefined destinations. For more
information on input regions for centrifugation, refer to Input Regions for
Centrifugation.
Copy Input Regions
2 In Input Regions, select the input regions you want to copy.
3 Select Copy.
4 Enter your new name, and then select OK.
5 Select a value for the following variables:

— Priority: Each input region requires a priority ranking for processing. A lower value
indicates a higher priority and a higher value indicates a lower priority.
— Processing: A processing instruction for an input region dictates how the system
processes the samples within that region. For example, samples can skip
centrifugation or they can be routed to predefined destinations. For more
information on input regions for centrifugation, refer to Input Regions for
Centrifugation.
Rename Input Regions
2 In Input Regions, select the input regions you want to rename.
3 Select Rename.
Note
Input profiles mapped to a drawer profile cannot be renamed. Cancel the selection
of an input region from all input drawer profiles to rename. Refer to Create Input
Drawer Profiles.
B78799AM 4-25
4 Enter your new name, and then select OK.
Delete Input Regions
2 In Input Regions, select an input region you want to delete.
3 Select Delete, and then OK.
Note
Input profiles mapped to a drawer profile cannot be deleted. Cancel the selection of
an input region from all input drawer profiles to delete. Refer to Create Input
Drawer Profiles.
Input Drawer Profiles

Follow the procedures in this section to create and edit input drawer profiles. Input drawer
profiles allow you to define the following for an input drawer:
• Input drawer profile name
• Rack types
• Input regions
• Rack layout
Create Input Drawer Profiles
2 In Input Drawer Profiles, select New.
3 Enter your new profile name, and then OK.
4-26 B78799AM
4
4 In Input Drawer Profile Configuration, drag and drop the rack types and the tray types
that you require onto the drawer.
Note
To remove a rack from the drawer, drag it off the drawer. To replace a rack on the
drawer, drag and drop a new rack on top of the existing one.
5 Define rack regions.

a. Select a rack on the drawer.
b. Define a region for the rack.
Note
You can only have one region per input rack or customized tray.
Figure 122 Input Drawer Profile Configuration
B78799AM 4-27
1. Rack Types
2. Input drawer profile name
3. Rack with an input region defined
Copy Input Drawer Profiles
2 In Input Drawer Profiles, select an input drawer profile you want to copy.
3 Select Copy, enter your new input drawer profile name, then select OK.
4 In Input Drawer Profile Configuration, drag and drop the rack types and the tray types
Note

b. Define a region for the rack.
Note
You can only have one region per input rack or customized tray.
4-28 B78799AM
4
Figure 123 Input Drawer Profile Configuration
1. Rack Types
2. Input drawer profile name
3. Rack with an input region defined
Rename Input Drawer Profiles
2 In Input Drawer Profiles, select an input drawer profile you want to rename.
3 Select Rename, enter your new input drawer profile name, then select OK.
Note
If an input drawer profile is used in a module, it cannot be renamed. Refer to Map

Input Drawer Profiles to cancel the selection of the profile, enabling it to be
renamed.
B78799AM 4-29
Delete Input Drawer Profiles
2 In Input Drawer Profiles, select an input drawer profile you want to delete.
3 Select Delete, then select OK.
Note
An input drawer profile cannot be deleted if it is used in a module. Refer to Map

Input Drawer Profiles to cancel the selection of the profile.
Map Input Drawer Profiles

Follow these steps to change the layout of input drawers. You can map drawer profiles that
are defined in your system configuration to the input drawers.
Note
If you need a drawer profile that is not defined in the system configuration, contact
your system administrator.
Note
Do not map regions where sample tubes can be routed from on the output drawer of
the input module.
Important
If you are remapping the one drawer containing the default error region, you must first
unmap all input drawers before remapping the default error region and then remap the
other drawers.
1 Confirm that sample processing is completed before mapping or unmapping drawer

profiles.
2 On the module console, select Menu > Configuration > Map Drawer Profiles.
3 Remove all racks from the drawers to be mapped.
4-30 B78799AM
4
4 Select the drawers you want to change.
Note
You can select one or more drawers. If you want to change the layout of the output
drawer, you cannot select any input drawers.
5 Select Next.
6 Select the new drawer layout from the displayed Input Drawer Profiles. The system
displays a blue outline around the selected drawer layout.
7 Select Apply to apply the changes.
Map Output Drawer Profiles

Follow these steps to change the layout of output. You can map drawer profiles that are
defined in your system configuration to the output drawers.
Note
Note
the input module.

profiles.
2 Remove all racks from the drawer that you are mapping.
Note
You can select one or more drawers. The same drawer profile is mapped to each
selected drawer.
5 Select Next.
B78799AM 4-31
Input Output Module Configuration
6 Select the new drawer layout from the displayed Output Drawer Profiles. The system

To configure the input output module:
1. Create Input Regions
2. Create Input Drawer Profiles
3. Create Output Drawers Profiles
4. Map Input Drawer Profiles
Input Regions
Follow the procedures in this section to create and edit input regions. Input drawers are
divided into input regions, such as STAT or routine.
Input Drawer Profiles

Follow the procedures in this section to create and edit input drawer profiles. Input drawer
profiles allow you to define the following for an input drawer:
• Input drawer profile name
• Rack types
• Input regions
• Rack layout
Output Drawer Profiles

Follow the procedures in this section to configure output drawer profiles. Output drawers
are divided into output regions such as error regions or offline storage regions. Output
regions are also known as named destinations.
Output drawer profiles allow you to define the following characteristics for an output
drawer:
• Output drawer profile name
• Named destinations
Note
Named destination options are imported directly from REMISOL Advance.

• Rack types
• Rack layout
4-32 B78799AM
4
Map Input Drawer Profiles

Follow these steps to change the layout of input drawers. You can map drawer profiles that
are defined in your system configuration to the input drawers.
Note
Note
the input module.
Important
If you are remapping the one drawer containing the default error region, you must first
unmap all input drawers before remapping the default error region and then remap the
other drawers.

profiles.
3 Remove all racks from the drawers to be mapped.

Note
You can select one or more drawers. If you want to change the layout of the output
drawer, you cannot select any input drawers.
5 Select Next.
6 Select the new drawer layout from the displayed Input Drawer Profiles. The system

B78799AM 4-33
Output Module Configuration
Note
Note
the input module.

profiles.
Note
selected drawer.
5 Select Next.

To configure the output module:
1. Create Output Drawer Profiles

Output Drawer Profiles

Follow the procedures in this section to configure output drawer profiles. Output drawers
are divided into output regions such as error regions or offline storage regions. Output
regions are also known as named destinations.
Output drawer profiles allow you to define the following characteristics for an output
drawer:
4-34 B78799AM
4
• Output drawer profile name

• Named destinations
Note
Named destination options are imported directly from REMISOL Advance.

• Rack types
• Rack layout
Create Output Drawer Profiles
2 In Output Drawer Profiles, select New.
3 Enter your new output drawer profile name and select OK.
4 In Output Drawer Profile Configuration, drag and drop the rack types and the tray types
Note

b. Select a minimum of two rows by selecting the boxes next to the row numbers.
c. Define a named destination for the selected rows.
Note
Row selection is not available for customized trays. You must define one named
destination for the entire customized tray.
B78799AM 4-35
Figure 124 Output Drawer Profile Configuration
1. Rack Types
2. Output drawer profile name
3. Rack with multiple named destinations defined
4. Rack with one named destination defined
5. Customized tray with a named destination defined
Copy Output Drawer Profiles
2 In Output Drawer Profiles, select an output drawer profile you want to copy.
3 Select Copy.
4 Enter your new output drawer profile name and select OK.
5 In Output Drawer Profile Configuration, drag and drop the rack types and the tray types
Note
4-36 B78799AM
4

b. Select a minimum of two rows by selecting the boxes next to the row numbers.
c. Define a named destination for the selected rows.
Note
Row selection is not available for customized trays. You must define one named
destination for the entire customized tray.
Figure 125 Output Drawer Profile Configuration
1. Rack Types
2. Output drawer profile name
3. Rack with multiple named destinations defined
4. Rack with one named destination defined
5. Customized tray with a named destination defined
Rename Output Drawer Profiles
2 In Output Drawer Profiles, select an output drawer profile you want to rename.
B78799AM 4-37
3 Select Rename, enter your new output drawer profile name, then select OK.
Delete Output Drawer Profiles
2 In Output Drawer Profiles, select an output drawer profile you want to delete.
3 Select Delete, then select OK.

Note
Note
the input module.

profiles.
Note
selected drawer.
5 Select Next.
4-38 B78799AM
4
Centrifuge Configuration
Centrifuge Profiles
Warning
Validate all centrifugation profiles before usage.
Follow the procedures in this section to create and edit centrifuge profiles. Select your
setting as follows:
• Spin duration: 2 - 20 minutes. The default is 4 minutes.
• Spin force: 1000 - 4000 g.
• Acceleration profile: the default is 9.
• Deceleration profile: the default is 9.
• Cooling set point: the default range is 19-20 °C
Create Centrifuge Profiles
2 Select Centrifuge Profiles, then select New. Enter your new centrifuge profile name, then
select OK.
3 Select your settings as described in Centrifuge Profiles.

5 To activate the centrifuge profile, refer to Map Centrifuge Profiles.
Copy Centrifuge Profiles
2 Select Centrifuge Profiles, then select Copy. Enter new centrifuge profile name, then
select OK.
3 Select your settings as described in Centrifuge Profiles.
B78799AM 4-39
Rename Centrifuge Profiles
2 Select Centrifuge Profiles, then Select Rename. Enter your new centrifuge profile name,
then select OK.
Note
Centrifuge profiles in use cannot be renamed. Unmap the centrifuge profile at

module console.
Delete Centrifuge Profiles
2 Select Centrifuge Profiles, then select Delete.
Note
Centrifuge profiles in use cannot be deleted. Unmap the centrifuge profile on the
module console.
Map Centrifuge Profiles
2 Select Map centrifuge profiles then the required Profile Assigned from a drop-down
menu.
3 To create a new profile, go to Create Centrifuge Profiles.

4-40 B78799AM
4
Sample Timers
Sample Timers
Follow these steps to manage Sample Timers.
2 Select Sample Timers.
3 Under the heading Sample Timeout in Rack, specify the minimum time a sample remains
in the rack builder after it has been processed by the analyzer and before it is routed to
the next destination. The timeout is used to wait for any repeat, reflex or add-on testing
that might be requested for the sample.
Specify the minimum time in minutes (between 1 and 99) for each analyzer:
— Sample timeout in AU5800 rack: The default value is 8 minutes.
— Sample timeout in DxH 900 rack: The default value is 1 minute.
— Sample timeout in STA R Max rack: The default value is 1 minute.
4 Under the heading Sample Warmup Timeout, edit the maximum time a sample stored in
the connected storage module is routed for warmup before processing.
5 In Sample Processing Timeout, specify the maximum time for a processing step of a
sample, before a timeout alert is issued.
— STAT or routine priority 1 samples: One timeout value applies to both types of
samples. If a processing step is not completed within the expected time plus the
configured timeout value, a critical alert is issued (red).
— Routine priority 2 and 3 samples: If a processing step is not completed within the
expected time plus the configured timeout value, a warning is issued (yellow).
— Total time on transport: The configured timeout value for the total amount of time a
sample spends on the transport module. If the configured timeout value is
exceeded, the sample is routed to a default error region. Additionally, a sample-
based error appears for affected samples.
B78799AM 4-41
Sample Timers
4-42 B78799AM
CHAPTER 5
Maintenance
Introduction
This chapter provides the information necessary to perform periodic and required
maintenance on the DxA system. On the home page, an asterisk next to a subsystem
indicates that maintenance is due.
The maintenance frequency described in this chapter is determined by a system throughput

of about 3,300 to 6,600 sample tubes per day. Perform the recommended maintenance
scheduled to provide reliable system performance.
Maintenance Safety Notice
Warning
Warning
Warning

Warning
Stray items can interfere with normal system operation and cause system errors, such
as a robot collision. Remove all items from the module work areas that do not belong
there before operating the system.
Warning
Risk of sample spillage. Do not open or close the covers when filled sample racks are
placed on the module shelf. Load filled sample racks onto the input drawer.
Caution
Pinch points in the track and sharp edges on the transport can cause personal injury.
B78799AM 5-1
Maintenance
Introduction
Caution
Risk of head injury due to overhead obstructions. Be careful when working in and
around the modules.
Caution
Note
Wait until the module has finished processing samples to begin the maintenance task. If
samples are being processed, you might need to manually remove a sample, for
example from a gripper, to complete the maintenance task.
Maintenance Workflow
You can access maintenance lists on the system console or on the module consoles. These
lists display maintenance tasks you must perform on the various system modules. Each
item contains information on the module type, subsystem, frequency, and due date for the
task. The boxes to the left of each task allow you to select tasks and mark them as
completed.
Important
Perform maintenance tasks on the individual modules and mark them as complete on
their respective module consoles. The maintenance tasks displayed on a module
console only apply to that module. After performing maintenance tasks for the
transport system and the direct track sampling (DTS), mark the tasks as complete on the
system console.
Follow these steps to complete the maintenance tasks workflow.
1 Select Maintenance on the dashboard.
2 Select Maintenance Tasks. The Maintenance Due Now list is displayed. This list includes
maintenance tasks due on the same day and overdue maintenance tasks. Complete
these tasks before you continue using the system.
Note
To access all maintenance tasks, select All Maintenance and follow the same steps.
3 Select a maintenance task in the list to view the instructions.
5-2 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Introduction
4 Follow the instructions. The buttons required to complete actions for the maintenance
task, such as Unlock Covers, are provided at the bottom of the page.
5 After you complete a task or more, select the boxes next to the tasks and then select Task
Completed. The tasks disappear from the list after you mark them as completed.
6 The Select User dialog is displayed. Select the user from the drop-down menu.
7 Select Save to record the action.
All Maintenance
The All Maintenance list on the system console or module consoles displays all maintenance
tasks that you must perform on the various system modules.
The All Maintenance screen is split into three expandable lists:

• Maintenance Due Now: This list includes maintenance tasks due on the same day and
overdue maintenance tasks.
• Scheduled: This list includes all upcoming maintenance tasks minus the tasks in the
other lists.
• As needed: This list includes exceptional maintenance tasks due at irregular intervals.
For information on how to manage maintenance tasks, refer to Maintenance Workflow.
Maintenance Log
The maintenance log on the system console provides a record of all maintenance tasks
completed. The maintenance log allows information to be shared about maintenance tasks
when different operators use and maintain the system. The log displays the subsystem,
task, user who completed the task, task status, and date and time completed. Follow these
steps to access the maintenance log and view tasks. You can also view the maintenance log
on the module consoles.
1 On the system console, select Maintenance > Maintenance Log.
2 Select View Task to the right of the task you want to see.
3 To record actions that are not recorded as part of scheduled maintenance tasks, refer to
Create Entry.
Create Entry
You can save notes on tasks or actions performed on the system that are not part of
scheduled maintenance tasks in the maintenance log. For example, save helpful tips or
notes about an action performed, for example a mirror was replaced in one of the tube
input robots. Other system operators can see your notes in the history for future reference.
Follow these steps to create manual entries in the maintenance log.
B78799AM 5-3
Maintenance
Introduction
Use the search filters at the top of the page to filter maintenance tasks according to Module
Type, Subsystem Type, or by date and time range completed. The list filters by results after
your selection is complete.
1 On the system console, select Maintenance > Maintenance Log .
2 Follow these steps to manually create a new entry.

a. Select Create Entry below the task list.
b. Enter a name for the maintenance task. Select Save.
c. Select the Module Name and Subsystem from the drop down lists.
d. Select a status from the Task Status drop down field (In progress or Complete).
e. Enter your notes in the Add to Notes and History field.
f. Select Save.
If you are logged in as a guest user, then enter your name and select Ok.
Note
The maintenance log entry is displayed in the maintenance log of the applicable
module console (e.g. if the task was saved with the Module Name Output, this
task is displayed on the output module console). You can only add notes and
history to tasks in the maintenance log on the system console.
3 Follow these steps to add notes to a maintenance task in the list.

a. Select a maintenance task. The system displays the detailed information saved for
the task.
b. Enter your notes in the Add to Notes and History field.
c. Select Save.
4 To save the maintenance log, you can export it to a file. Select Export to file. Choose a
directory to save the file to and enter a file name. The file is saved in .CSV format and
can be opened in Excel.
Information about Cleaning Tasks

For all system surfaces that require cleaning, use non-alcoholic commercial disinfectant
®
wipes containing alkyl ammonium chloride. We recommend Mikrobac Tissues (outside
®
the United States) and Clorox Disinfecting Wipes (within the Unites States).
Note
System surfaces must be wiped, not sprayed.
Exchangeable parts made of plastic (waste chute, base frame, centrifuge adapter, tube rack
draining, tube rack, sample carrier, and storage rack) must be submerged in a cleaning
solution and water mixture at a temperature of 80°C. Submersion must last up to 10
minutes.
5-4 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Maintenance Daily - Input Module
Prepare for the Task

Follow these steps before starting a maintenance task.
Warning
Warning

Note
1 At the bottom of the screen, select Unlock Module Covers. Open the module covers to
access components inside the module.
The module is placed in Pause mode and samples cannot be processed.
2 Proceed with the maintenance task instructions. Use the navigation on the left side of
the page to access individual maintenance task instructions.
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Intermediate Drip Shield and the Tube Clamp Shields
About this Task
The tube clamp shields and the intermediate drip shields protect the decapping area on the
transport system from splashes when the decapper removes a cap from a tube. Inspect the
intermediate drip shields and tube clamp shields for contamination and clean if necessary.
Time Required
3 minutes per set
B78799AM 5-5
Maintenance
Material Required
• Lint-free dry cloth
Warning
Contamination hazard. Damaged tube clamp shields can result in uncontrolled

splashes. Replace damaged tube clamp shields.
Procedure
1 Remove or lift off the operator covers in the area of the shields.
2 Remove the decapper tube clamp shield cover.
3 Carefully remove the tube clamp drip shields, and the intermediate drip shield.
Figure 127 Removing the Tube Clamp Shields (Left) and Intermediate Drip Shields (Right)
4 Inspect all shields for damage; replace the damaged shields, and clean all undamaged
shields.
5 Dry the shields.

6 Put all the shields back in position by doing the reverse of step 3.
5-6 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
7 Replace the decapper tube clamp shield cover.
Figure 128 Decapper Tube Clamp Shield Cover Placed on Bracket
8 Replace the operator covers in the area of the shields.
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Splash Protection Cover

About this Task
The splash protection cover shields the deck of the decapper drawer from contaminants.
Material Required
• Disinfectant wipes
Procedure
1 Lift the splash protection cover off the drawer deck.
Figure 129 The Splash Protection Cover (in Blue)
B78799AM 5-7
Maintenance
Figure 130 Removing the Splash Protection Cover
2 Clean the splash protection cover.

3 Put the splash protection cover back in position by doing the reverse of step 1.
Decapper: Clean and Inspect the Tube Clamps

About this Task
The tube clamp after time will gather dust around the gears and around the assembly. DxA
tube clamps are positioned at areas where contamination is highly likely. Therefore, lab
operators must clean the tube clamps to prevent system errors.
The tube clamps are located:

• On the transport system at the DxA input module (for tube decapping)
5-8 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Figure 131 Tube Clamps on Transport System
Time Required
3 minutes per tube clamp
Material Required
• Lint-free moist cloth
Important
Rotating tube clamp arms or tube locator arms beyond physical hard stops can damage
the system.
Procedure
B78799AM 5-9
Maintenance
1 Carefully lift open the operator transport covers to provide access to the tube clamps
and the surrounding area.
3 Remove any sample carriers within the area of the tube clamp(s) for cleaning.
4 Remove dust from the tube clamp, sensor plates, sensors, sample carrier stoppers, and
surrounding area with a lint-free moist cloth.
Figure 133 Components of the Tube Clamp
1. Tube clamp arms
2. Sensors and sensor plates
3. Sample carrier stoppers
5-10 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
5 Carefully wipe the tube clamp, gripper pads, sensor plates, and sample carrier stoppers
with disinfectant wipes. Use cotton swabs in smaller areas difficult to reach.
Important
Disinfectant wipes can leave smudges on the sensor camera lenses. This can cause
errors on the system as the cameras will not be able to read the tubes. Be careful
when wiping the sensors.
Figure 134 Gripper Pads on Tube Clamps
1. Gripper pads
6 Dry all surfaces with a lint-free dry cloth.

7 Carefully inspect the tube clamps for damage. If the tube clamps need replacement, call
your Beckman Coulter Representative.
8 Close the decapper tube clamp shield cover.
9 Close the operator covers.
B78799AM 5-11
Maintenance
Maintenance Daily - Input Output Module
Finish the Task

Follow these steps after completing all maintenance task instructions. The maintenance
task only disappears from the list of scheduled maintenance tasks after you save it as
completed.
1 Return to either the Maintenance Due Now page or the All Maintenance page. Select the
box next to the completed maintenance task and select Task Completed at the bottom of
the page.
2 Select Save and reinitialize the module.

Warning
Warning

Note
5-12 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Intermediate Drip Shield and the Tube Clamp Shields
About this Task
The tube clamp shields and the intermediate drip shields protect the decapping area on the
transport system from splashes when the decapper removes a cap from a tube. Inspect the
intermediate drip shields and tube clamp shields for contamination and clean if necessary.
Time Required
3 minutes per set
Material Required
Warning
Contamination hazard. Damaged tube clamp shields can result in uncontrolled

splashes. Replace damaged tube clamp shields.
Procedure
1 Remove or lift off the operator covers in the area of the shields.
B78799AM 5-13
Maintenance
3 Carefully remove the tube clamp drip shields, and the intermediate drip shield.
Figure 137 Removing the Tube Clamp Shields (Left) and Intermediate Drip Shields (Right)
4 Inspect all shields for damage; replace the damaged shields, and clean all undamaged
shields.
5 Dry the shields.

6 Put all the shields back in position by doing the reverse of step 3.
7 Replace the decapper tube clamp shield cover.
8 Replace the operator covers in the area of the shields.
5-14 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Splash Protection Cover

About this Task
The splash protection cover shields the deck of the decapper drawer from contaminants.
Material Required
Procedure
B78799AM 5-15
Maintenance
2 Clean the splash protection cover.

Decapper: Clean and Inspect the Tube Clamps

About this Task

• On the transport system at the DxA input module (for tube decapping)
Figure 141 Tube Clamps on Transport System
Time Required
Material Required
5-16 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Important
the system.
Procedure
3 Remove any sample carriers within the area of the tube clamp(s) for cleaning.
B78799AM 5-17
Maintenance
1. Tube clamp arms
Important
5-18 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
1. Gripper pads

7 Carefully inspect the tube clamps for damage. If the tube clamps need replacement, call
your Beckman Coulter Representative.
8 Close the decapper tube clamp shield cover.
9 Close the operator covers.
Finish the Task

completed.
B78799AM 5-19
Maintenance
5-Day Maintenance - Centrifuge Module
the page.

Warning
Warning
Take suitable precautions for your own safety if there is a risk of toxic, radioactive, or
pathogenic contamination.
Warning
Warning

Note
5-20 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
2 Open the front cover of the centrifuge module.

3 Remove all sample tubes from the centrifuge adapters. Place these tubes on racks and
introduce the racks into the input drawer.
Inspect and Clean the Rotor Chamber and Accessories

About this Task
The centrifuge, rotor, and accessories are subject to high mechanical stress. Operator
maintenance extends the service life and prevents premature failure.
Note
In environments with high relative humidity, moisture will condense in the bowl.
Time Required
5 minutes
Material Required
• Soapy water or other water-soluble, mild cleaning agents with a pH value between 6
and 8
• C16647, grease for load-bearing bolts
• A soft, lint-free cloth
Procedure
1 Open the centrifuge drawer.

2 Open the centrifuge door.
4 Remove and inspect all adapters in the centrifuge. If necessary, clean the centrifuge
adapters.
5 Remove the buckets and clean them outside the centrifuge.
B78799AM 5-21
Maintenance
6 Inspect the rotor chamber.

a. If the rotor or buckets are corroded, cracked, show pressure marks, or are damaged
in any way, contact your Beckman Coulter Representative for replacement.
b. If the centrifuge has been contaminated with toxic, radioactive, or pathogenic
substances, clean the rotor chamber immediately with a suitable decontamination
agent.
7 Use a cloth to carefully wipe out the rotor chamber and the rotor. Remove all liquids,
including water and any solvents, acids, and alkaline solutions to avoid damage to the
motor bearings.
8 Dry the buckets with a soft cloth, or in a drying chamber at approximately 50°C.
9 Lubricate the hinges of the buckets.
a. Apply a small amount of load-bearing grease to all load-bearing bolts of the rotor.
Lubricate both hinges on each bucket.
b. Place the bucket on the load-bearing bolts of the rotor and swing it back and forth
several times to distribute the lubricant.
c. Repeat for each bucket.
10 Place the buckets correctly back in the centrifuge after greasing.
Important
As sometimes the weight of the buckets can vary slightly, incorrect placement can
cause centrifuge imbalance. If there is any difference in weight (plus or minus five
grams), then two buckets of the same weight must be placed across from each
other.
5-22 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Figure 146 Rotor Buckets Showing the Engraved Weight
1. Engraved weight on the bottom of the bucket.

2. Buckets of the same weight (plus or minus five grams) must be placed across from
each other.
11 Confirm that all positions on the adapter shuttle and in the centrifuge have adapters. Do
not leave any empty positions on the adapter shuttle or in the centrifuge. Leave only the
swap position empty.
12 Close the centrifuge door.

13 Gently push the centrifuge into the locked position. An audible click sound indicates
that the centrifuge drawer is locked.
Finish the Task

completed.
B78799AM 5-23
Maintenance
Maintenance Weekly - Transport
the page.
Important
The following inspection tasks only require you to clean system components if
necessary. You do not need to clean all system components every week.

Warning
Warning

Note
5-24 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Inspect Sample Carriers at Transport Exit Lanes and Remove Defective Ones
About this Task
In the case where DxA cannot read the RFID of a sample carrier, the system routes defective
sample carrier to an exit lane on the system. The exit lanes on the transport are located
close to the following system modules:
• Output module and storage device
• Input module
Time Required
3 minutes
Procedure
1 Go to each exit lane and confirm that there are no sample carriers.
2 If there are any sample carriers located here, remove and discard the defective sample
carriers.
Figure 147 Removing a Sample Carrier
3 If any of the sample carriers contain a tube, follow your laboratory procedures to handle
orphaned tubes.
4 Add new sample carriers to replace the faulty ones.
Inspect and Clean the Transport Components

About this Task
The transport contains different components positioned in areas where they can become
contaminated and require cleaning. For example, the tube locator will gather dust around
the gears and the assembly after some time. Therefore, lab operators must clean the
B78799AM 5-25
Maintenance
diverters, tube clamps, tube locators, bar code reader, and the surrounding area on the
transport to prevent system errors.
The tube locators and diverters are found in the following locations:
• On the transport system at the direct track sampling (DTS) analyzers (such as DxI
®
600/800/9000, ACL Top, DxC 700 AU, and DiaSorin LIAISON XL)
Figure 148 Tube Locators and Bar Code Reader on the Direct Track Sampling Analyzers
• Diverters are located at strategic points on the track segments for routing sample
carriers on the transport lanes
Figure 149 Diverter and its Components on the Transport
1. Slide guides 4. Sensors

2. Sample carrier guide plate 5. Transport lanes
3. Sample carrier turnaround
Time Required
3 minutes per component

5-26 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Material Required
• Cotton swabs
• Vacuum cleaner
Important
the system.
Caution
Procedure
1 Carefully lift open the operator transport covers to provide access to the components on
the track segments.
Note
If you are performing this maintenance procedure on a DxC 700 AU or DxI 9000, you
need to open the analyzer cover before opening the operator transport cover.
2 Move or remove any sample carriers within the area to be cleaned.

3 Clean the tube locator arms, sensor plates, sensors, sample carrier stoppers and bar
code reader.
a. Remove dust from the tube locator arms, sensor plates, sensors, sample carrier
stoppers, bar code reader, and surrounding area with a lint-free moist cloth.
b. Carefully wipe the tube locator arms, sensor plates, and sample carrier stoppers
Important
Disinfectant wipes can leave smudges on the sensor camera lenses. This can
cause errors on the system as the cameras will not be able to read the tubes. Be
careful when wiping the sensors.
B78799AM 5-27
Maintenance
Figure 150 Components of the Tube Locator
1. Sensors and sensor plates 3. Tube locator arms

2. Bar code reader 4. Sample carrier stoppers
4 Clean the diverters.

a. With the transport cover open, clear any sample carriers near the diverters.
Figure 151 Acceptable Clearance for Sample Carriers from the Sensors
b. Rotate the diverter disc clockwise and counter clockwise to hard stop positions.
Confirm that there are neither stiff spots in rotation nor ware on the disc.
c. Rotate the diverter lane gate clockwise and counter clockwise to hard stop
positions. Confirm that there are neither stiff spots in rotation nor ware on the lane
gate.
d. For the 180 turnaround, rotate the sample carrier turnaround clockwise and
counter clockwise. Confirm that there are neither stiff spots in rotation nor ware on
the disc and on the guide plate.
5-28 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
e. Confirm that the heights of the sample carrier dome crossover between two tracks
is correct.
Figure 152 The Dome Crossover Located between Two Tracks
f. Confirm that the sensor alignment is correct. The sensor must be seated flush inside
sensor plate, which must be straight in the vertical plane and not leaning towards or
away from the track.
5 Clean the track segments

a. Caution
Sharp edges. Will cause personal injury. Wear gloves and work carefully.
Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust from the track, track guides, wheel bends, and
surrounding area.
b. Carefully clean all surfaces of the track, track guides, and wheel bends using
disinfectant wipes.
Figure 153 The Track of the DxA 5000 Transport System and Its Components
B78799AM 5-29
Maintenance
Figure 154
1. The process lane

2. The travel lane
3. The travel lane
4. The process lane
5. The track guides
6. The wheel bend

7 Carefully inspect the components for damages and replace where necessary.
8 Close the operator covers and clean if necessary.
Important
The following information applies to the DxC 700 AU and DxI 9000 only.
After performing error recovery or maintenance procedures, ensure that you close the
transport cover and the analyzer cover in the correct order. You must first close the
transport cover at the input and output lane of the analyzer before closing the analyzer
cover.
5-30 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Figure 155 DxC 700 AU
1. Transport cover at the aspiration point of the analyzer

2. DxC 700 AU cover
Figure 156 DxI 9000
B78799AM 5-31
Maintenance
Maintenance Weekly - Input Module

2. DxI 9000 cover
Finish the Task

completed.
the page.
Important
Warning

Warning
5-32 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
Note
2 Open the door of the robot.
Note
If the module is turned off, the lights will not illuminate, and you can open the drawer
manually.
3 Open the drawer.
flashing.
Clean the Mirrors and Inner Panels on the Inside of the Housing of the Robot
About this Task
Inspect the mirrors and inner panels on the inside of the housing the robot and clean if
necessary. Inspect all tube robots in the system.
Material Required
B78799AM 5-33
Maintenance
Procedure
5-34 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Note
The robot door can be unhinged for cleaning.

1 Clean the mirrors with the disinfectant wipes. Avoid streak marks on the mirrors by
using a lint-free cloth to dry any residual moisture.
Figure 157 Blue Indicates Areas to Clean
2 Clean the inner panels using the disinfectant wipes. Use the lint-free cloth to dry any
moisture leftover on the panels.
Figure 158 Inner Panels Indicated in Blue
B78799AM 5-35
Maintenance
Inspect and Clean the Camera

About this Task
The camera is configured as a tube inspection camera or a bar code reader.
The TIU camera is attached to the Z-axis onto the mounting plate. In the input section, the
camera identifies different tube parameters (color, height) to classify the tube, and reads
the bar code label of the tube. Inspect all tube robots in the system.
Material Required
• Cotton swabs
Procedure
5-36 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
1 Clean the camera using the disinfectant wipes.
Figure 159 Camera Indicated in Blue
2 Using the lint-free cloth, dry any residual moisture on the camera to avoid streak marks.
3 Clean the camera funnel using the disinfectant wipes.
Figure 160 Camera Funnel Indicated in Blue
B78799AM 5-37
Maintenance
Inspect and Clean the Gripper Fingers and Mirror

About this Task
The mirror inside the gripper detects a cap on a sample tube. Inspect all tube robots in the
system.
Material Required
• Cotton swabs
Procedure
Note
Do not remove the gripper fingers for cleaning. If you remove the gripper fingers, contact
your Beckman Coulter Representative to calibrate the gripper.
1 Clean the gripper fingers.
Figure 161 Gripper Fingers Indicated in Blue
5-38 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
a. Manually open the gripper fingers.

b. Clean if necessary by wiping with a disinfectant wipe.
2 Clean the mirror with a disinfectant wipe.
Figure 162 Mirror Indicated in Blue
3 Dry any residual moisture on the mirror with a lint-free dry cloth.
Inspect and Clean the Liquid Level Detection Component

About this Task
The liquid level detection (LLD) component detects the level of sample inside a tube.
Inspect all robots with a liquid level detection component in the system.
Material Required
• Cotton swabs
Procedure
B78799AM 5-39
Maintenance
1 Clean the liquid level detection component.
Figure 163 LLD Component Indicated in Blue
2 Clean both of the liquid level detection lenses. Use the lint free cloth to dry any residual
moisture.
Figure 164 Arrows Indicate the Liquid Level Detection Lenses
5-40 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Clean the Decapper Gripper Fingers and the Bottom Cover

About this Task
The tips of the gripper fingers of the decapper robot firmly clasp onto the cap of a sample
tube so that the robot can remove the cap. The bottom cover shields the upper portion of
the gripper fingers from contaminants from sample tubes.
Material Required
• Cotton swabs
Procedure
Warning
Sharp edges at the bottom of the gripper fingers. This is a biohazard risk and can
result in personal injury. Wear gloves and work carefully.
1 Clean the gripper fingers of the decapper robot.
Figure 165 Decapper Gripper Fingers and the Bottom Cover
2 Clean the bottom cover of the decapper robot.
B78799AM 5-41
Maintenance
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Lower Waste Chute

About this Task
The lower waste chute directs caps released by the decapper robot into the waste container.
The lower waste chute connects to the decapper chute on the drawer deck.
Material Required
Procedure
1 Remove the lower waste chute and clean if it is contaminated.
Figure 166 The Lower Waste Chute in Blue
Figure 167 Unclip the Clip of the Lower Waste Chute
5-42 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Figure 168 Lift the Lower Waste Chute
2 Inspect and clean the cover of the motor driver board.

3 Inspect and clean the photoelectric sensor on the cover of the motor driver board.
4 Replace the lower waste chute.
a. Hold the lower waste chute correctly positioned at a slight angle, with its front
lower than its rear, over its slot.
b. Lower the lower waste chute into its slot until the open part of the V-shaped groove
at the front touches the complementary V-shaped edge of the metal slot.
B78799AM 5-43
Maintenance
c. Push the groove firmly into position.
Figure 169 Positioning the V-shaped Groove of the Lower Waste Chute Correctly
d. Push the rear of the lower waste chute down completely. An audible click sound
indicates that it is in position.
Figure 170 Pushing the Clip at the Rear of the Lower Waste Chute into Position
5-44 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Cover of the Motor Driver Board
About this Task
The cover is a flat metal surface that shields the motor driver board of the decapper and has
a slot for the lower waste chute.
Material Required
Procedure
1 Remove the lower waste chute.

a. Unclip the clip at the rear of the lower waste chute with your index finger.
b. Lift the lower waste chute out of its slot.
Figure 172 Unclipping the Clip of the Lower Waste Chute
B78799AM 5-45
Maintenance
Figure 173 Lifting the Lower Waste Chute
2 If the cover of the motor driver board is contaminated, clean it.
Figure 174 The Cover of the Motor Driver Board
3 Place the clean lower waste chute in its slot.

5-46 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
B78799AM 5-47
Maintenance
Maintenance Weekly - Input Output Module
Finish the Task

completed.
1 Close the robot door.

the page.
Important
Warning

Warning
Warning

5-48 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Caution
from the magnets.
Note
Note
manually.
3 Open the drawer.
flashing.
About this Task
Material Required
Procedure
B78799AM 5-49
Maintenance
Note

5-50 B78799AM
5
Maintenance

About this Task
Material Required
• Cotton swabs
Procedure
B78799AM 5-51
Maintenance
5-52 B78799AM
5
Maintenance

About this Task
system.
Material Required
• Cotton swabs
Procedure
Note
B78799AM 5-53
Maintenance


About this Task
Material Required
• Cotton swabs
Procedure
5-54 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
moisture.
B78799AM 5-55
Maintenance
Clean the Decapper Gripper Fingers and the Bottom Cover

About this Task
The tips of the gripper fingers of the decapper robot firmly clasp onto the cap of a sample
tube so that the robot can remove the cap. The bottom cover shields the upper portion of
the gripper fingers from contaminants from sample tubes.
Material Required
• Cotton swabs
Procedure
Warning
Sharp edges at the bottom of the gripper fingers. This is a biohazard risk and can
result in personal injury. Wear gloves and work carefully.
1 Clean the gripper fingers of the decapper robot.
Figure 185 Decapper Gripper Fingers and the Bottom Cover
2 Clean the bottom cover of the decapper robot.
5-56 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Lower Waste Chute

About this Task
The lower waste chute directs caps released by the decapper robot into the waste container.
The lower waste chute connects to the decapper chute on the drawer deck.
Material Required
Procedure
1 Remove the lower waste chute and clean if it is contaminated.
B78799AM 5-57
Maintenance
2 Inspect and clean the cover of the motor driver board.

3 Inspect and clean the photoelectric sensor on the cover of the motor driver board.
4 Replace the lower waste chute.
5-58 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
B78799AM 5-59
Maintenance
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Cover of the Motor Driver Board
About this Task
The cover is a flat metal surface that shields the motor driver board of the decapper and has
a slot for the lower waste chute.
Material Required
Procedure

a. Unclip the clip at the rear of the lower waste chute with your index finger.
b. Lift the lower waste chute out of its slot.
Figure 192 Unclipping the Clip of the Lower Waste Chute
5-60 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Figure 193 Lifting the Lower Waste Chute
2 If the cover of the motor driver board is contaminated, clean it.
3 Place the clean lower waste chute in its slot.

B78799AM 5-61
Maintenance
5-62 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Maintenance Weekly - Centrifuge Module
Finish the Task

completed.

the page.
Important
Warning
Warning

Warning
B78799AM 5-63
Maintenance
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
Note

About this Task
Material Required
Procedure
5-64 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Note

B78799AM 5-65
Maintenance

About this Task
Material Required
• Cotton swabs
Procedure
5-66 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
B78799AM 5-67
Maintenance

About this Task
system.
Material Required
• Cotton swabs
Procedure
Note
5-68 B78799AM
5
Maintenance


About this Task
Material Required
• Cotton swabs
Procedure
B78799AM 5-69
Maintenance
moisture.
5-70 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Maintenance Weekly - Rack Builder Module
Finish the Task

completed.

the page.
Important
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
B78799AM 5-71
Maintenance
Note


About this Task
Material Required
• Cotton swabs
Procedure
5-72 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
B78799AM 5-73
Maintenance
About this Task
Material Required
Procedure
5-74 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Note

B78799AM 5-75
Maintenance

About this Task
system.
Material Required
• Cotton swabs
Procedure
Note
5-76 B78799AM
5
Maintenance

Finish the Task

completed.

the page.
B78799AM 5-77
Maintenance
Maintenance Weekly - Output Module
Important
Warning

Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
Note
5-78 B78799AM
5
Maintenance


About this Task
Material Required
• Cotton swabs
Procedure
B78799AM 5-79
Maintenance
5-80 B78799AM
5
Maintenance

About this Task
Material Required
• Cotton swabs
Procedure
B78799AM 5-81
Maintenance
moisture.
5-82 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
About this Task
Material Required
Procedure
B78799AM 5-83
Maintenance
Note

5-84 B78799AM
5
Maintenance

About this Task
system.
Material Required
• Cotton swabs
Procedure
Note
B78799AM 5-85
Maintenance

Recapper: Clean and Inspect the Tube Clamps

About this Task
• On the transport system at the DxA output module (for tube recapping)
5-86 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Figure 219 Tube Clamps in the Recapper
Time Required
Material Required
Important
the system.
Procedure
2 Remove any sample carriers within the area of the tube clamps for cleaning.
B78799AM 5-87
Maintenance
1. Tube clamp arms
Important
5-88 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Maintenance Weekly - Storage Module
1. Gripper pads

6 Carefully inspect the tube clamps for damages and replace where necessary.
7 Replace the operator covers.
Finish the Task

completed.

the page.
Important
B78799AM 5-89
Maintenance
Warning
Warning

Note
Inspect the Floor on the Inside of the Storage Module for Solid Contaminants and Liquids
About this Task
Inspect the inside floor of the storage module for moisture and solid contaminants that
keep the system from functioning.
Time Required
5-90 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Maintenance Monthly - Input Module
1 minute
Important
If a tube falls to the floor of the refrigerated storage unit, contact your Beckman Coulter
representative before resuming work on the system. Do not attempt to retrieve the
tube before consulting a Beckman Coulter representative.
Look through the window of the service door to confirm that water has not collected on
the floor of the storage module. If water has collected, contact a Beckman Coulter
Representative.
Finish the Task

completed.
the page.
Warning
Warning

B78799AM 5-91
Maintenance
Caution
from the magnets.
Note
Note
manually.
3 Open the drawer.
flashing.
Clean the Panels on the Inside of the Housing of the Robot

About this Task
Inspect the panels on the inside of the door of the robot and clean if necessary. Inspect all
tube robots in the system.
Material Required
5-92 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Procedure
Note

Clean the door panels with the disinfectant wipes.
Inspect the Gripper Finger Pad

About this Task
The pads come installed on the gripper fingers to allow the robot to firmly grip and move a
tube. Inspect the gripper finger pads on all robots in the system.
Warning
Worn gripper pads should be replaced immediately. Worn gripper pads can cause
gripper malfunctions. This can result in sample contamination.
Procedure
B78799AM 5-93
Maintenance
1 Inspect the gripper finger pads.
Figure 223 Gripper Finger Showing Valid Pad Level (Left) and Worn-out Pad (Right)
2 Contact your Beckman Coulter representative to replace the gripper finger pads if:
— The pads are worn (refer to properly fitting finger pads).
— A pad is missing from one or more of the gripper fingers.
— Scratch marks caused by the gripper fingers are visible on the tube label. This
indicates that the pads are worn out or missing.
Inspect and Clean the Base Frame

About this Task
The base frame is the surface where sample tube racks are placed. The posts on the base
frame define different rack placement areas. Racks only fit on the base frame when
positioned with the rack bar code label facing the front of the drawer. Inspect each base
frame in the module.
Material Required
Procedure
Warning
5-94 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
1 Remove all the racks.
Figure 224 Drawer Open with 4 Empty Racks
2 Manually unscrew the 4 thumbscrews.
Figure 225 Thumbscrews and the Molded Numeral 8 of the Base Frame
Figure 226 Base Frame of the Drawer Removed
3 Lift the base frame off the drawer.

4 Clean the base frame.
B78799AM 5-95
Maintenance
5 Reassemble a clean base frame.
Note
Position the base frame before tightening the 4 thumbscrews. The end with the
molded numeral 8 must be at the end closest to the handle of the drawer.
Figure 227 The Correct (Top) and Incorrect (Bottom) Position of the Base Frame
5-96 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
6 Manually tighten the 4 thumbscrews.
Important
Do not operate the system without base frames in position. You can order spare
base frames from Beckman Coulter (PN B48816) to continue operating the system
while you are cleaning the base frames.
7 Confirm full extension of all drawers, as follows:

a. Pull out all drawers to confirm that all drawers can fully extend.
Figure 228 Confirming Full Drawer Extension
b. If there are any drawers that do not fully extend, using some force, pull the drawer
out until it fully extends.
B78799AM 5-97
Maintenance
Inspect and Clean the Drawer Deck

About this Task
The drawer deck is a rectangular metal structure supporting the base frame on its upper
horizontal surface; the magnet striker is mounted on its inner front vertical surface. Inspect
the deck of each drawer in the module.
Material Required
Procedure
5-98 B78799AM
5
Maintenance

4 Clean the surface of the drawer deck.
Figure 232 Location of the Drawer Deck after Removing the Base Frame
Note
Position the base frame on the drawer deck before tightening the 4 thumbscrews. The
end with the molded numeral 8 must be at the end closest to the handle of the drawer.
B78799AM 5-99
Maintenance
Figure 233 The Correct (Top) and Incorrect (Bottom) Orientation of the Base Frame
Important
Do not operate the system without base frames in position. To operate the system while
a dirty base frame is being washed, fit a spare, clean base frame to the drawer deck. You
can order spare base frames from Beckman Coulter (PN B48816).
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Drawer Deck

About this Task
The drawer deck is a metal surface with 2 slots to support the splash protection cover. The
decapper chute fits into the diamond shaped slot that connects to the lower waste chute
and directs caps released by the decapper robot into the waste container.
Material Required
Procedure
5-100 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
B78799AM 5-101
Maintenance
2 If the drawer deck is dirty, clean it.
Figure 236 The Drawer Deck
Inspect and Clean the Cover of the RFID Antenna
About this Task
The RFID antenna detects racks on drawers. The RFID is attached beneath a plastic cover,
which also shields the motor driver board. Inspect the cover of the RFID antenna on each
drawer in the module.
5-102 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Material Required
Procedure
Clean the surface of the cover of the RFID.
Figure 237 Cover of the RFID
Inspect and Clean Racks and Trays

About this Task
Racks hold sample tubes upright for access by the robots. Trays hold analyzer racks with
sample tubes for processing on the DxA system. Inspect and clean each rack and tray in the
module.
Material Required
and 8
Procedure
Warning
1 Remove all racks and trays.

2 Inspect each rack and tray for contamination and the fingers that hold the tubes for
wear.
3 Remove and replace all defective racks and trays.
B78799AM 5-103
Maintenance
4 Clean contaminated racks and trays.

5 Process clean racks and trays according to your laboratory procedures.
Warning
securely onto the base frame.
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Cover of the Motor Driver Board the Photoelectric Sensor
About this Task
The photoelectric sensor on the cover of the motor driver board detects the presence of the
lower waste chute. The cover is a flat metal surface that shields the motor driver board of
the decapper and has a slot for the lower waste chute.
Material Required
Procedure
5-104 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
2 Clean the cover of the motor driver board.
B78799AM 5-105
Maintenance
3 Clean the face of the photoelectric sensor.
Figure 242 The Photoelectric Sensor on the Cover of the Motor Driver Board
4 Put the lower waste chute back in its slot.

5-106 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
B78799AM 5-107
Maintenance
Inspect and Clean the Buffer Rack

About this Task
The buffer rack is a temporary storage rack with a capacity of 6 sample tubes. Inspect each
buffer rack in the module.
Material Required
Procedure
You must access the buffer rack from the rear of the module. Clean each buffer rack.
Inspect the fingers that hold the tubes for wear.
Figure 245 Position of the Buffer Rack
Figure 246 Buffer Rack
Report any signs of wear to your field service engineer. The fingers inside the rack that
hold the tube should not be damaged.
5-108 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Maintenance Monthly - Input Output Module
Finish the Task

completed.

the page.
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
Note

B78799AM 5-109
Maintenance
Note
manually.
3 Open the drawer.
flashing.

About this Task
Material Required
5-110 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Procedure
Note


About this Task
Warning
Procedure
B78799AM 5-111
Maintenance

About this Task
Material Required
Procedure
Warning
5-112 B78799AM
5
Maintenance

B78799AM 5-113
Maintenance
Note
5-114 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Important

B78799AM 5-115
Maintenance

About this Task
Material Required
Procedure
5-116 B78799AM
5
Maintenance

Note
B78799AM 5-117
Maintenance
Important
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Drawer Deck

About this Task
The drawer deck is a metal surface with 2 slots to support the splash protection cover. The
decapper chute fits into the diamond shaped slot that connects to the lower waste chute
and directs caps released by the decapper robot into the waste container.
Material Required
Procedure
5-118 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
B78799AM 5-119
Maintenance
2 If the drawer deck is dirty, clean it.
Figure 261 The Drawer Deck
About this Task
5-120 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Material Required
Procedure

About this Task
module.
Material Required
and 8
Procedure
Warning

wear.
B78799AM 5-121
Maintenance

Warning
Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Cover of the Motor Driver Board the Photoelectric Sensor
About this Task
The photoelectric sensor on the cover of the motor driver board detects the presence of the
lower waste chute. The cover is a flat metal surface that shields the motor driver board of
the decapper and has a slot for the lower waste chute.
Material Required
Procedure
5-122 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
B78799AM 5-123
Maintenance
3 Clean the face of the photoelectric sensor.
Figure 267 The Photoelectric Sensor on the Cover of the Motor Driver Board
4 Put the lower waste chute back in its slot.

5-124 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
B78799AM 5-125
Maintenance

About this Task
Material Required
Procedure
5-126 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Maintenance Monthly - Centrifuge Module
Finish the Task

completed.

the page.
Warning
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
B78799AM 5-127
Maintenance
Note


About this Task
Material Required
5-128 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Procedure
Note

Clean the Adapter Shuttle Base and the Cover of the Motor Driver Board
About this Task
The adapter shuttle transports adapters between the rack distribution region in the input
module and the loading area for the centrifuge.
Time Required
2 minutes
B78799AM 5-129
Maintenance
Material Required
Figure 273 The Adapter Shuttle Base and the Cover of the Motor Driver Board
Procedure
1 Remove the centrifuge adapters from the adapter shuttle.

2 Clean the adapter shuttle, including the retaining hooks for the centrifuge adapters.
3 Clean the adapter shuttle base.
Clean the Centrifuge Adapter

About this Task
The centrifuge adapter holds the sample tubes that are spun in the centrifuge.
5-130 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Figure 274 Centrifuge Adapter
Time Required
1 minute
Material Required
and 8
Procedure
1 Remove all centrifuge adapters and inspect them for damage.

2 Wash the centrifuge adapters.
3 Replace clean centrifuge adapters in the centrifuge and on the centrifuge shuttle.

About this Task
Warning
Procedure
B78799AM 5-131
Maintenance
Maintenance Monthly - Rack Builder Module
Finish the Task

completed.

the page.
5-132 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
Note


About this Task
Material Required
B78799AM 5-133
Maintenance
Procedure
Note


About this Task
Warning
Procedure
5-134 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Maintenance Monthly - Output Module
Finish the Task

completed.

the page.
Warning
B78799AM 5-135
Maintenance
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
Note
Note
manually.
3 Open the drawer.
flashing.

About this Task
Material Required
5-136 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Procedure
Note


About this Task
Warning
Procedure
B78799AM 5-137
Maintenance

About this Task
module.
Material Required
and 8
Procedure
Warning

wear.
5-138 B78799AM
5
Maintenance

Warning

About this Task
Material Required
Procedure
Warning
B78799AM 5-139
Maintenance

5-140 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Note
B78799AM 5-141
Maintenance
Important

5-142 B78799AM
5
Maintenance

About this Task
Material Required
Procedure
B78799AM 5-143
Maintenance

Note
5-144 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Important
About this Task
B78799AM 5-145
Maintenance
Material Required
Procedure

About this Task
5-146 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Material Required
Procedure
Clean the Nest and Photoelectric Sensor of the Recapper

About this Task
The nest is a cup-shaped receptacle for holding one cap. A conveyor belt system transports
caps from the storage chamber to the nest where the recapper robot retrieves them for
recapping sample tubes. A photoelectric sensor detects the presence of a cap in the nest.
Material Required
B78799AM 5-147
Maintenance
Disinfectant wipes
Caution
Do not spray with cleaning liquids. Only wipe with an approved disinfectant cloth.
Procedure
Note
If a cap is in the nest, remove it.

Clean the interior of the nest including the faces of the emitter and receiver of the
photoelectric sensor.
Figure 293 The Nest of the Recapper Flanked by the Photoelectric Sensor
Inspect and Clean the Gripper Fingers and the Bottom Cover of the Recapper
About this Task
The robot has 4 gripper fingers, which clasp caps individually in the nest of the recapper
and release them after each cap has been inserted in a sample tube. The bottom cover
shields the upper portion of the gripper fingers from contaminants from sample tubes.
Material Required
• Cotton swabs
5-148 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Caution
Sharp edges. Will cause personal injury. Wear gloves and work carefully.
Procedure
1 Clean the gripper fingers of the recapper robot if necessary.
Figure 294 Gripper Fingers and the Bottom Cover
2 Clean the bottom cover of the recapper robot if necessary.
Clean the Funnel of the Recapper

About this Task
The conveyor belt of the vertical transfer unit drops caps into the funnel where they are
channeled to the toothed feeder conveyor belt, which drops them into the nest.
Material Required
Caution
Do not spray with cleaning liquids. Only wipe with an approved disinfectant cloth.
Procedure
B78799AM 5-149
Maintenance
1 Carefully remove the white plastic recapper cover.
Figure 295 Removing the Recapper Cover
2 Open the cover of the funnel.
Figure 296 Funnel with its Cover Closed
Figure 297 Accessing the Inside of the Funnel
3 Clean the inside surface of the funnel including the sloping surface towards the bottom.
4 Close the cover of the funnel.
5-150 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Clean the Deck Base and the 3 Upper Waste Chutes of the Storage Rack Builder
About this Task
The deck base has 3 slots for supporting the 3 lower waste chutes, an RFID board attached
to it that identifies racks, and magnets fixed to it that lock racks. An upper waste chute is a
conduit to the waste container via the lower waste chute for sample tubes released by the
storage rack builder robot.
Material Required
Procedure
Note
The system is delivered with 2 sets of upper waste chutes. Use a clean set to replace the
dirty set while it is being washed.
1 Clean the 3 upper waste chutes.
a. Remove an upper waste chute from its slot by gripping it with 1 hand and pulling it
upwards.
Figure 298 The 3 Upper Waste Chutes (in Red)
B78799AM 5-151
Maintenance
Figure 299 Removing an Upper Waste Chute from its Slot
5-152 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Figure 300 The Slot of an Upper Waste Chute
b. Remove the remaining 2 upper waste chutes.

c. Clean the 3 upper waste chutes with disinfectant wipes.
2 Wipe clean the deck base and the cover of the RFID board.
Figure 301 The Deck Base (in Blue)
3 Place 3 clean upper waste chutes in their slots. An audible click sound from the ball and
spring mechanism confirms that each upper waste chute is in position.
Finish the Task

completed.
B78799AM 5-153
Maintenance
Maintenance Monthly - Storage Module

the page.
Warning
Warning

Note
5-154 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Inspect the Gaskets of the Doors of the Storage Module for Gaps
About this Task
After time, the storage module door gaskets could become worn, causing the door to be
unsealed.
Time Required
1 minute
Material Required
Inspection mirror
Procedure
1 Confirm that all doors are closed and the door locks are engaged.
2 Confirm that the gasket is securely seated along the entire perimeter of each door. Press
to make sure the door is firmly sealed.
Use the inspection mirror for inspecting sections of the gasket that are poorly
accessible.
Inspect the Floor Below the Drain Tubes of the Storage Module for Water
About this Task
The drain tubes must be inspected for maintaining the proper functioning of the storage
module.
Time Required
2 minutes
Material Required
Inspection mirror
Confirm that no standing water is under or around the connection of the drain tubes of
the storage module. If there is water, wipe it away and contact your Beckman Coulter
Service Representative.
Use an inspection mirror for inspecting areas that are poorly accessible.
B78799AM 5-155
Maintenance
60-Day Maintenance - Rack Builder Module
Figure 302 The Position of the Drain Tubes of the Storage Module
Finish the Task

completed.
the page.
Warning
Warning

5-156 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Caution
from the magnets.
Note
Clean the Rack Platform of the Rack Transfer Unit

About this Task
The rack platform is made of 2 parallel metal strips on the upper side of the rack mover, and
is located above the belt. The distance between the metal strips is narrower than the width
of the belt, but wide enough for the clutch to move freely between them. A rack rests on the
rack platform until the belt moves it.
Material Required
Procedure
B78799AM 5-157
Maintenance
1 Open the door of the rack builder on the right.
Figure 303 Opening a Door of the Rack Builder
Important
Do not grip the platform walls when moving the rack mover of the rack transfer unit. This
action can damage the platform walls.
5-158 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
2 Move the rack transfer unit toward the door on the right until it is in full view.
Figure 304 Rack Transfer Unit at the Door on the Right
Figure 305 Top View of the Rack Transfer Unit with the Rack Platform in Blue
B78799AM 5-159
Maintenance
Figure 306 Rack Platform
5-160 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Figure 307 Front View of the Rack Platform
3 Clean the rack platform.
B78799AM 5-161
Maintenance
Figure 308 Cleaning the Rack Platform
Inspect and Clean the Platform Wall of the Rack Transfer Unit
About this Task
The platform wall is located on the upper part of the rack mover and prevents racks from
falling off the belt. Its primary components are 2 metal sheets located parallel to each other,
1 on either side of the belt.
Material Required
Procedure
Important
Do not grip the platform walls when moving the rack mover of the rack transfer unit.
This action can damage the platform walls.
5-162 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
1 Move the rack transfer unit toward the door on the right until the platform wall is in full
view.
Figure 309 Platform Wall of the Rack Transfer Unit
2 Inspect the interior of the platform wall for contamination and clean if necessary.
B78799AM 5-163
Maintenance
Figure 310 Inspect Interior of the Platform Wall
Inspect and Clean the Clutch Pins of the Rack Mover of the Rack Transfer Unit
About this Task
The clutch pins are attached to the outer surface of the belt; their function is to hook on to a
rack so that the belt can move the rack.
Material Required
Procedure
Important
5-164 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
1 Move the rack transfer unit toward the door on the right until the belt of the rack mover
is in full view.
2 Move the belt in one direction until the clutch pins are accessible for inspection.
Figure 311 Clutch Pin Fixed to the Belt for the AU5800 Rack Builder
Figure 312 Clutch Pin Location on the DxH 900 Rack Builder
3 Inspect the clutch pins for contamination and clean if necessary.

4 Inspect the fixation of the clutch pins for a firm fit to the belt.
If the clutch pins do not fit firmly on the belt, contact your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
B78799AM 5-165
Maintenance
5 Inspect the cleats for indications of wear.
Figure 313 Cleat of the Clutch Pin
6 Report indications of wear or signs of cracks to your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Inspect and Clean the Spacer of the Rack Mover of the Rack Transfer Unit
About this Task
The spacer of the rack mover stabilizes the belt and is the surface on which the belt moves.
Material Required
Procedure
Important
5-166 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
1 Move the rack transfer unit toward the door until the rack transfer unit is opposite the
bridge.
Figure 314 Spacer of the Rack Transfer Unit Shown in Blue
Note
Do not pull excessively on the belt or lift the belt. These actions can damage the belt.
Handle the belt carefully when cleaning it.
2 Inspect the entire length of the spacer for contamination and clean if necessary.
B78799AM 5-167
Maintenance
Figure 315 Cleaning the Spacer
Inspect and Clean the Belt of the Rack Mover of the Rack Transfer Unit
About this Task
The belt has clutch pins that engage with a rack. A motor drives the belt along the axis. The
function of the belt is to move racks to and from the analyzer unit.
Important
Confirm that the belt does not move from its default position during cleaning.
Material Required
Procedure
Important
5-168 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
1 Move the rack transfer unit toward the door on the right until the belt of the rack mover
is in full view.
2 Inspect the entire length of the outer surface of the belt for contamination. Clean if
necessary by holding a wipe against the outer surface of the belt and simultaneously
moving the belt for one belt revolution.
Figure 316 Cleaning the Belt
3 Inspect and clean the clutch pins of the rack mover of the rack transfer unit.
B78799AM 5-169
Maintenance
Inspect and Clean the Buffer Lane of the Rack Builder

About this Task
The rack buffer has numbered buffer lanes for racks with the numbering starting on the
left. Racks wait to go for analysis, or wait for further processing after analysis in the buffer
lanes.
Material Required
Procedure
Important
1 Move the rack transfer unit toward the door on the left.
2 Remove all racks accessible from the door on the right. Inspect each rack for damage.
Warning
Tubes can be mis-positioned in damaged racks, causing sample spillage or other

errors. Discard and replace any damaged racks.
Figure 317 Removing a Rack from a Buffer Lane
5-170 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Figure 318 Empty Buffer Lanes
3 Inspect the interior of all the lanes accessible from the door on the right for
contamination and clean if necessary.
Figure 319 Cleaning a Buffer Lane
4 Return the racks to their lanes.
Note
Racks must be positioned with the bar code label facing toward the rack transfer
unit.
B78799AM 5-171
Maintenance
Figure 320 Rack with a Bar Code Label on the Front Side
5-172 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Figure 321 Racks Correctly Placed in the Buffer Lanes
5 Move the rack transfer unit toward the door on the right.
6 Remove all remaining racks.
7 Inspect the interior of the lanes for contamination and clean if necessary.
8 Return the racks correctly to their lanes.
Clean the Reflector and the Optical Sensors on the Rack Builder
About this Task
The tube inventory sensor detects the presence of one or more sample tubes in a given
rack. The optical sensors on the rack buffer detect if the racks in the buffer are fully in their
lanes. The position sensors on the rack transfer unit (RTU) detect if a rack is correctly
positioned in the rack wall.
Material Required
Warning
Risk of sample loss due to obstructed optical pathway of sensors during the rack
builder initialization. To avoid this, ensure that you carefully clean the sensors as
recommended.
B78799AM 5-173
Maintenance
Important
2 Clean the surface of the reflector using a lint-free dry cloth.
Figure 322 The Reflector for the AU5800, DxH 900, and STA R Max Rack Builder Modules
3 Clean the surface of the tube inventory sensor that faces the reflector.
Figure 323 The Tube Inventory Sensor for the AU5800, DxH 900, and STA R Max Rack Builder
Modules
5-174 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
4 Clean the optical sensors on the rack buffer.
Figure 324 The Emitter (1) and Receiver (2) of the Sensor in an AU5800 Rack Builder Module
Figure 325 The Emitter and Receiver of the Sensor in a DxH 900 Rack Builder Module
Figure 326 The Emitter and Receiver of the Sensor in a STA R Max Rack Builder Module
B78799AM 5-175
Maintenance
5 Clean the position sensors on the RTU.
Figure 327 The Position Sensors on the AU5800 Rack Transfer Unit
1. Position sensor of the left rack 3. Home sensor

2. Position sensor of the right rack
Figure 328 The Position Sensors on the DxH 900 Rack Transfer Unit
5-176 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Figure 329 The Position Sensors on the STA R Max Rack Transfer Unit
6 Close the doors of the rack builder.
Clean the Support Lanes and their Optical Sensors on the Rack Builder
About this Task
The input and output support lanes move racks between the rack builder and the
connected analyzer. The sensors on the input- and output lane detect the presence of a rack
in these lanes.
Material Required
Warning
Risk of sample loss due to obstructed optical pathway of sensors during the rack
builder initialization. To avoid this, ensure that you carefully clean the sensors as
recommended.
Caution
Risk of head injury due to overhead obstructions. Be careful when working in and
around the modules.
Procedure
B78799AM 5-177
Maintenance
1 Open the door of the bridge.
Figure 330 Opening the Door of the Bridge
2 Inspect the 2 support lanes for contamination and clean them using disinfectant wipes
if necessary.
Figure 331 Support Lanes of the Bridge
5-178 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Figure 332 Cleaning a Support Lane
3 Clean the surfaces of the optical sensors using only a lint-free dry cloth.
Figure 333 The Sensors for the Input- (1) and Output (2) Lane in an AU5800 Rack Builder
Module
B78799AM 5-179
Maintenance
Figure 334 The Sensors for the Input- and Output Lane in a DxH 900 Rack Builder Module
Figure 335 The Sensors for the Input-Output Lane in a STA R Max Rack Builder Module
4 Close the door of the bridge.
Finish the Task

completed.
5-180 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
6-Month Maintenance - Transport
the page.
Warning
Warning

Note
Clean and Inspect the Transport Covers

About this Task
There are two types of transport covers:

• Transport operator covers (upper, transparent covers) rotate open for track-level
access to the sample carriers and functions. The operator covers provide access to the
B78799AM 5-181
Maintenance
sample carriers and functions, and are free to hinge open without sensors or fasteners,
and are transparent to allow for visibility of operation. The main profile of the top
cover is consistent across all track segments, with slight adaptations around direct
track sampling analyzer connections and where track segments split and merge.
Where hinged covers are impractical (around DTS connections with analyzers, and at
L- and T-shaped segments), the covers are designed to locate or rest on their supports.
Instead of rotating these covers to open them, they are lifted off the supports and can
be placed out of the way.
• Transport service covers are sheet metal side panels that can be lifted off supports
and removed for access to the lower section of the transport.
Warning
The transport service covers are only to be removed by Beckman Coulter field service
engineers.
Figure 336 The Transport Covers
1. Transport operator covers

2. Transport service covers
Time Required
3 minutes per segment.
5-182 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Material Required
Procedure
Follow these steps to clean and inspect the transport operator covers.
Note
Perform these tasks one segment at a time.
1 Carefully wipe all outside surfaces of the transport service covers with a lint-free moist
cloth.
2 Lift up or remove the transport operator covers from the segment.

3 Carefully wipe all inside surfaces of the transport operator covers with disinfectant
wipes.

5 Lower and close the transport operator covers.
6 Replace the transport operator cover if it is damaged.
7 Repeat this procedure for each transport segment in your lab.
8 Inspect all covers on the transport system for:
— Damaged covers
— Misaligned covers
— Any mechanical issues
— Unusual vibrations
9 Replace any covers where necessary. Contact a Beckman Coulter Representative.
Finish the Task

completed.
B78799AM 5-183
Maintenance
6-Month Maintenance - Centrifuge Module
the page.

Warning
Warning
Warning

Warning
Note
5-184 B78799AM
5
Maintenance

Clean the Deck of the Centrifuge Module

About this Task
The adapter shuttle is mounted on the deck of centrifuge module. The centrifuge device is
located below the deck. A hole in the deck allows the centrifuge adapter to be transferred
between the adapter shuttle and centrifuge device.
Time Required
2 minutes
Material Required
Figure 337 X-Ray View of the Deck of a Dual Centrifuge Module
B78799AM 5-185
Maintenance
Procedure
Note
Do not clean the rails of the shuttle.

Clean the deck of the centrifuge module.
Replace the Filter in the Centrifuge Drawer

About this Task
The filter in the centrifuge drawer prevents dust from being drawn into the centrifuge by
the fan for the cooling system.
Time Required
1 minute to check, 5 minutes to replace the filter
PN
B85476 Filter for the centrifuge drawer
Figure 338 Filter on the Inside of the Centrifuge Drawer
Procedure
1 Replace the filter if it is dirty or discolored (from dust).

2 Pull the old filter out of the centrifuge drawer and slide a new one in.
5-186 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
6-Month Maintenance - Rack Builder Module
Finish the Task

completed.
the page.
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
B78799AM 5-187
Maintenance
Note
2 Open the door of the rack builder on the right.
Figure 339 Opening a Door of the Rack Builder
5-188 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Inspect and Clean the Buffer Cover of the Rack Builder

About this Task
The buffer area is flanked on its left, rear, and right sides by flat sheet metal, which is called
the buffer cover.
Material Required
Procedure
2 Inspect the buffer cover of the rack builder and the reflective tape for contamination
and clean if necessary.
Figure 340 Buffer Cover Shown in Blue
B78799AM 5-189
Maintenance
Figure 341 Cleaning the Buffer Cover
5-190 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Figure 343 Cleaning the Reflective Tape of the Buffer
3 Close the door of the rack builder on the right.

4 Open the door of the rack builder on the left.
5 Move the transfer unit toward the door on the right.
6 Inspect the buffer cover of the rack builder and the reflective tape for contamination
and clean if necessary.
B78799AM 5-191
Maintenance
Clean the Deck Cover of the Rack Builder

About this Task
The deck cover is a right-angled flat metal sheet with its horizontal surface below the buffer
area. The deck cover shields the floor from contaminants.
Material Required
Procedure
1 Move the rack pusher toward the door on the left.
Note
The side walls to the left and right of the horizontal surface must also be inspected for
contamination and cleaned if necessary.
2 Inspect the area of the deck cover accessible from the door on the right for
contamination and clean if necessary.
Figure 345 The Deck Cover
5-192 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Figure 346 Side Wall of the Deck Cover on the Right
Figure 347 Cleaning the Horizontal Surface of the Deck Cover
Figure 348 Cleaning the Horizontal (Left) and Vertical (Right) Surfaces of the Deck Cover
3 Close the door of the rack builder on the right.

4 Open the door of the rack builder on the left.
B78799AM 5-193
Maintenance
6-Month Maintenance - Storage Module
5 Move the rack pusher toward the door on the right.

6 Inspect the remaining area of the deck cover for contamination and clean if necessary.
Figure 349 Side Wall of the Deck Cover on the Left
Finish the Task

completed.
1 Close the door of the rack builder on the left.

the page.
5-194 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Warning
Warning

Note
Clean the Window on the Service Door

About this Task
The window allows the inspection of the interior or the storage without opening the door.
After time, the refrigerated storage service window will require cleaning.
Time Required
1 minute.
Material Required
• Glass cleaning agent
Clean the outside window on the service door of the storage module.
B78799AM 5-195
Maintenance
2-Year Maintenance - Input Module
Finish the Task

completed.
the page.
Warning
Warning

Note
1 On the module console, select Pause.
Note
manually.
5-196 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
2 Open the drawer.

flashing.
Replace the Racks

About this Task
Racks hold sample tubes upright for access by the robots.
PN
• C82384 6x6 rack
• C82385 6x14 rack
• C19900 Distribution rack
Procedure
Important
Do not remove a distribution rack with sample tubes from the system.
1 Remove empty standard 6x6 or 6x14 racks.
Tip
If you are unable to remove all the old racks at once, place color stickers or any
identifying marker on the old racks.
B78799AM 5-197
Maintenance
Figure 350 A Base Frame with 4 Empty 6x6 Racks
2 Place the new 6x6 and 6x14 standard racks in the appropriate areas of the drawers.
Confirm that the new racks are seated correctly on the base frame.
3 Remove the distribution racks.
4 Place the new distribution racks in the distribution area.

5 Replace all old standard racks and distribution racks that are in your lab with new ones.
6 Dispose of the old racks according to your laboratory procedures.
5-198 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
2-Year Maintenance - Input Output Module
Finish the Task

completed.
the page.
Warning
Warning

Note
1 On the module console, select Pause.
Note
manually.
B78799AM 5-199
Maintenance
2 Open the drawer.

flashing.
Replace the Racks

About this Task
Racks hold sample tubes upright for access by the robots.
PN
• C82384 6x6 rack
• C82385 6x14 rack
• C19900 Distribution rack
Procedure
Important
Do not remove a distribution rack with sample tubes from the system.
1 Remove empty standard 6x6 or 6x14 racks.
Tip
If you are unable to remove all the old racks at once, place color stickers or any
identifying marker on the old racks.
5-200 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Figure 352 A Base Frame with 4 Empty 6x6 Racks
2 Place the new 6x6 and 6x14 standard racks in the appropriate areas of the drawers.
3 Remove the distribution racks.
4 Place the new distribution racks in the distribution area.

5 Replace all old standard racks and distribution racks that are in your lab with new ones.
6 Dispose of the old racks according to your laboratory procedures.
B78799AM 5-201
Maintenance
2-Year Maintenance - Centrifuge Module
Finish the Task

completed.
the page.
Warning
Warning
Warning

Warning
5-202 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
Note

Replace the Centrifuge Adapters

About this Task
The centrifuge adapter holds the sample tubes that are spun in the centrifuge.
Figure 354 Centrifuge Adapter
Time Required
1 minute
Material Required
B78799AM 5-203
Maintenance
2-Year Maintenance - Storage Module
C82386
Procedure
1 Contact your Beckman Coulter Representative. Order the required number of new
centrifuge adapters. The order number is provided under Material Required.
2 Replace all centrifuge adapters with new adapters. Dispose of old centrifuge adapters.
Finish the Task

completed.
the page.
DxA 2-Year Maintenance - Storage Module Preparing for the Task
Warning

Note
Open the operator door of the storage module to start the replacement procedure. Refer
to Access Racks from Storage.
Replace the Storage Racks

About this Task
5-204 B78799AM
5
Maintenance
This procedure describes one way to replace the storage racks. You can perform this
procedure over the course of a few days or weeks, as it would require several hours to
perform this activity all at once.
PN
• C82383 Storage rack
Procedure
Important
Do not remove storage racks from the storage rack builder unit (SRBU). Only remove
storage racks from the environmentally controlled storage device (ECSD).
Note
It is recommended that you perform the replacement procedure when your lab is not
busy.
1 Place color stickers or any identifying marker on the racks that must be replaced in the
ECSD, ensuring that the rack does not move.
Placing stickers on the racks that need to be replaced allows you to identify which racks
must be exchanged for new ones.
Important
Ensure the sticker or marking can withstand the ECSD conditions.
Warning
the shelf.
2 Replace all old storage racks with new storage racks. Refer to the following procedures:
• Remove Racks from storage
• Refill Empty Racks from Storage
Load Racks.
Warning
B78799AM 5-205
Maintenance
4 Continue until all old racks have been replaced with new ones.
5 Dispose of the old storage racks according to your laboratory procedures.
Finish the Task

completed.
Return to either the Maintenance Due Now page or the All Maintenance page. Select the
the page.
5-206 B78799AM
CHAPTER 6
Troubleshooting
Introduction
This chapter provides information about troubleshooting your DxA system. If any of the
following scenarios occur, follow the recommended actions to perform troubleshooting.
For a patient/user/third party in the European Union and in countries with identical
regulatory regime (Regulation 2017/746/EU on In vitro Diagnostic Medical Devices); if,
during the use of this device or as a result of its use, a serious incident has occurred, please
report it to the manufacturer and/or its authorized representative and to your national
authority.
Communication Loss Causes the System to Pause

Scenario
A communication loss caused the system to change to the pause state automatically.
Remedy
Manually set the system to the running state.
A Disabled Instrument Can Display the Incorrect Color Status on the System Console
Scenario
A disabled instrument can display a color other than gray on the system console.
Remedy
When you deactivate an instrument, always compare the status on the system console
with the status on the module console to establish the correct status of the instrument.
A Faulty RFID Reader Causes Many Sample Carriers to be Frequently Routed to Exit
Lanes
Scenario
Carriers are frequently routed to the exit lanes for manual removal. When the exit lane is
full, the system stops working and requires a restart.
Cause
B78799AM 6-1
Troubleshooting
A Sample Tube is Stuck on the Track because the Recapper is Unavailable
A cause is a defective or poorly adjusted RFID reader in the system.
Remedy
Contact your Beckman Coulter Representative to locate and repair, or replace the
defective RFID reader.
A Sample Tube is Stuck on the Track because the Recapper is Unavailable

Scenario
A power loss causes the recapper to be unavailable, thus a sample tube on a processing lane
is not further processed. The sample turnaround time (TAT) timeout alert is displayed.
Cause
The recapper is unavailable.
Remedy
1 Remove the sample tube from the sample carrier.

2 Remove the sample tube from the system via the integrated system console.
3 Reintroduce the sample tube into system via the input area.
Stuck Sample Tube at a Stop Position

Scenario
A sample tube is stuck at a stop position (decapper, recapper, or direct track sampling
(DTS)).
Remedy
1 On the system console, select Module controls.
2 To pause the transport system, select Pause.
3 Remove the stuck sample tube from the stop position.

4 On the system console, mark the sample tube as removed.
5 To initialize the transport system, select Initialize.
6-2 B78799AM
6
Troubleshooting
A Timeout Error of the Camera of the Tube Inspection Unit
A Timeout Error of the Camera of the Tube Inspection Unit

Scenario
There is a timeout error of the camera of the tube inspection unit (TIU).
Remedy
1 Pause the module.

2 Select MENU > Module controls > REINITIALIZE.
3 Select play (unpause the module).
Error Dialog Box While Performing Error Recovery

Scenario
An error dialog box is displayed while you perform error recovery, preventing you from
finishing the process.
Remedy
1 Restart the software on the system console or the module console you are working on.
2 Continue the error recovery process.
An Unknown Error Dialog Box Displays on the Console Server

Scenario
Unknown Error dialog boxes display several times by reproducible user actions, for example,
moving to sample search.
Remedy
1 Remove samples from input, wait until the centrifuge, the rack builder module (RBU),
the direct track sampling (DTS), and the transport are empty, or until it has processed
all samples and they have been sent to the output.
2 Perform a controlled shutdown.

3 Restart.
a. Turn on the Programmable Logic Controller (PLC).
b. Wait 1 minute.
c. Turn on the DxA server.
B78799AM 6-3
Troubleshooting
Do Not Use the Controlled-stop Button during Initialization
d. Wait 1 minute.
e. Turn on the console server.
Do Not Use the Controlled-stop Button during Initialization

Scenario
Activating the controlled-stop button during reinitialization will block the system, thus a
restart is required.
Remedy
When initializing an instrument, do not use the controlled-stop button until the
initialization process is complete.
Sample Tubes Rejected Due to a Classification Error

Scenario
Sample tubes are rejected in the input module due to tube classification or physical
orientation problems. The 16x100 open sample tubes are rejected because either the
92x15 sample tubes with push cap or the 16x100 sample tubes with push cap are
configured with color detection.
Remedy
Contact your local Beckman Coulter Service Representative.
System Cannot Initialize because of an Unrecoverable Axis Error

Scenario
The system cannot initialize because a robot error prevents an axis from being enabled.
Remedy
Contact your Beckman Coulter Service Representative.
The Module Console is Frozen

Scenario
6-4 B78799AM
6
Troubleshooting
The System Console is Frozen
The module console is frozen.
Remedy
If the module console does not react, restart the module console.
a. Open the Windows menu by pressing the Windows key or by using the task bar.
b. Restart the module console.
c. On the module console, select Run to resume sample processing.
The System Console is Frozen

Scenario
The system console is frozen.
Remedy
If the system console does not react, restart the system console application.
a. Close the system console by pressing Alt + F4 or by using Task Manager.
b. Restart the system console application.
c. On the system console, select Run to resume sample processing.
Handling Sample Tubes after a System Crash
Warning
Risk of delay in sample processing. In the event of a general system failure, the system
may require restart or even service intervention to recover. Ensure that any urgent
(STAT) samples are processed manually to avoid delays. Beckman Coulter
recommends that you implement a way to visually identify urgent sample tubes.
When you have a system crash and are not able to perform shutdown using the system
console, follow these steps to handle sample tubes on the system:
1 Remove the tubes from all modules of the DxA system.
Note
Ensure that the tubes are stored vertically in a rack after removal.
2 Manually turn off the console server, DxA server, and each Programmable Logic
Controller (PLC).
3 Perform the startup procedure as described in the DxA Startup Procedure.
B78799AM 6-5
Troubleshooting
Recovering Sample Tubes After Centrifuge Power or Communication Failure
4 Place any STAT tubes in a rack and place the rack in the correct priority region on the
input module.
Scan the bar code label of the samples to identify the STAT tube, if it is not indicated on
the tube or label.
5 Reintroduce all remaining tubes into the input module.

After a power or communication failure, tubes can be manually recovered by using the
emergency access keys and manual release cap to open the centrifuge drawer.
Important
The manual centrifuge access procedure is only necessary after a power or

communication failure. During regular maintenance, access the centrifuge using the
user interface screen.
Warning
Warning
Warning

Warning
6-6 B78799AM
6
Troubleshooting
Note
Procedure
1 Select Unlock covers. Open the module cover.
2 Confirm that the rotor has stopped by shining a light into the centrifuge lid through the
centrifuge deck to confirm that the rotor is not spinning.
3 Insert the emergency access keys into the keyholes on the module deck plate.
The centrifuge access keys and the drawers are numbered. The left drawer is labeled
(1):
Figure 355
The emergency access key labeled (1) opens the left drawer.
Figure 355
The right drawer, installed in dual centrifuge modules, is labeled (2):
Figure 355
The emergency access key labeled (2) opens the right drawer.
Figure 355
4 Turn the emergency access key counter-clockwise to unlock the required drawer.
B78799AM 6-7
Troubleshooting
5 Turn the key clockwise to its initial position to reset the lock.
Note
If the key is not returned to the initial position, an error message is issued.
6 Pull out the centrifuge drawer until it stops.

8 Remove all the sample tubes from the centrifuge adapters and place the sample tubes
into the input racks.
Note
Confirm that the sample tubes are not damaged.
9 If necessary, clean the centrifuge rotor chamber and accessories.

11 Gently push the centrifuge into the locked position. An audible click indicates that the
centrifuge drawer is locked.
12 Close the module cover.

13 Select Initialize at the bottom of the page.
6-8 B78799AM
CHAPTER 7
Error Recovery
About Error Recovery
Error messages are shown under:
• System on the module console where the error has occurred, and on the system
console. On the System page, select an event in the list to view detailed instructions on
error recovery. Follow the instructions on the page. If you are not able to resolve the
error on the system with these instructions, take note of the event code in the
breadcrumb trail at the top of the page. For example, if you see Error Recovery
[ICE0001], the event code is ICE0001. Contact your Beckman Coulter Representative
and provide them with this event code.
• Samples on the module console where the error has occurred, and on the system
console. On the Samples page, select an event in the list to view more information
about the sample. The table here provides a list of the sample IDs and alert text with
the corresponding link to the error recovery steps. If you are not able to resolve the
error on the system with these instructions, take note of the event code or the alert text
in the table. Contact your Beckman Coulter Representative and provide them with this
event code or alert text.
System Messages
Available System Memory is Low

This event indicates that only a small amount of free system memory is available. Follow
these steps to resolve the issue.
Important
If not resolved, this issue could impact the performance of the system or the system
could stop functioning completely.
If the issue persists for several hours, restart the DxA software to free up system
memory.
Select Show more to display the event codes with the same error recovery steps:
These error recovery steps apply to the following event codes:

• ICE0014
Communication Stopped
The configuration shared between the DxA system and REMISOL Advance is inconsistent
due to changes to the REMISOL Advance configuration. Follow these steps to synchronize
the configuration.
B78799AM 7-1
Error Recovery
System Messages
Important
Only users with super user rights can view the system configuration options and
complete these recovery steps.
2 Select Load Draft.
3 Select REMISOL. When the operation is complete, the pending changes to the
configuration are shown in the draft configuration box.
4 Review the changes and make updates, if necessary.

5 Select Activate Draft.

• ICE0013
Communication Not Established 1

The system attempted to access a nonexistent resource from REMISOL Advance because
incompatible versions of the system and REMISOL Advance have been installed.
To install new system software or new REMISOL Advance software, contact your local
Beckman Coulter Service Representative.

• ICE0011

The system attempted to access a REMISOL Advance resource and a response was not
received within the expected amount of time. If the next attempt is successful, the event
resolves itself. If the event persists, follow these steps to establish communication.
1 Confirm that REMISOL Advance is turned on and that the software is running.
2 Confirm that the network or serial cables connecting the two systems are physically
connected and not damaged.
3 Shut down and restart the software.

4 If the issue persists, contact your local Beckman Coulter Service Representative.
7-2 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
System Messages

• ICE0010
REMISOL Advance received a request from an unknown source. This event indicates an
issue with the specifications of the communication configuration of the interface. Follow
these steps to resolve the issue.
1 Confirm that the system is configured correctly.

2 Contact your local Beckman Coulter Service Representative.

• ICE0009
An unknown or unexpected error occurred while attempting to communicate with

REMISOL Advance. The description field of the event might provide more information.
Follow these steps to establish communication.
3 Shut down and restart the device and REMISOL Advance.


• ICE0012
Database Cleanup Failed
1 Restart the system console.

B78799AM 7-3
Error Recovery
System Messages

• ICE0017
System Console Communication Failure
The system console is unable to communicate with the DxA server.
Note
If the connection cannot be restored, the system automatically shuts down.
1 Restart the system.


• ICE0022
System Console Software Component Failure

A system console software component is not responding. Follow these steps to resolve the
issue.

2 If the issue persists, contact your Beckman Coulter Service Representative.

• ICE0025
Internal System Configuration Could Not Be Updated
The system was initialized after being configured to work with new sample container types
and cap types. The DxA server must synchronize this information with the main display
server. Follow these steps to resolve the issue.
Note
This operation cannot occur while the system configuration is being edited on the
system console.
7-4 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
System Messages
1 Unmap all drawers.

2 Confirm that the new sample container types and cap types are in the DxA tube
database. If not, restart the system.
3 Configure tests and named destinations for the newly added sample container types.
Refer to Configure Sample Container Types.
4 On the system console, select Menu > System Configuration. Select Activate Draft in the
Draft Configuration section.

• ICE0003
Racks Ready To Be Removed
This event indicates that the system determines that there are racks in the storage module
that contain expired samples that should be disposed of. Follow these steps to dispose of
the expired samples.
1 Go to the storage module and open the door.

2 The racks that should be disposed of are indicated with flashing lights.

• ICE0005
RealVNC Not Running
1 Restart the system console.


• ICE0021
Report Not Printed

A system error occurred when printing a report.
B78799AM 7-5
Error Recovery
System Messages
1 Confirm that the destination printer is turned on.

2 Confirm that the destination printer is connected to the network and functioning
correctly.
3 Try printing a test page according to the instructions of the printer manufacturer.
4 If the printer is functioning correctly, but cannot print reports from the Beckman
Coulter instrument, restart the instrument and try printing a report again.

• ICE0020
Services Provided by PROService Will Not Function
The system cannot establish a connection with the PROService server. Follow these steps to
establish a connection.
Note
If the system is not connected to PROService, this message is normal.
1 Confirm that the network cable connecting the systems is physically connected and not
damaged.
2 Confirm that the instrument is registered with PROService. Go to the RMS Configuration
page to unenroll and enroll.

• ICE0019
Excessive Processor Usage
A high percentage of the processor is in use. If the issue persists, a specific process might be
depleting memory.
Important
7-6 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
System Messages

2 If the problem is encountered often, contact your local Beckman Coulter Service
Representative.

• ICE0008
Running Low on Hard Disk Drive Space
Important
1 Shut down the system.


• ICE0007
System Running on Battery Backup
A loss of primary power source is detected. Follow these steps to reestablish power.
Important
If primary power is not restored, system shutdown is imminent.
1 Determine the cause of the power failure to reestablish power to the system.
2 If power is not restored before the battery is depleted, the system automatically shuts
down to ensure it is in a safe state and to avoid loss of data or data corruption.

• ICE0018
System Cannot Connect to REMISOL Advance
B78799AM 7-7
Error Recovery
System Messages
3 Shut down and restart the device and REMISOL Advance.

• ICE0001
Tube Cannot Be Routed
An internal software error prevents the system from generating a route plan for a tube.
Follow these steps to retrieve the sample tube and resolve the issue.
Note
If the error persists, then Beckman Coulter Technical Support and system development
must be involved to determine the root cause of the issue and provide a solution.
1 Go to the sample details page for the specified tube. Confirm the current location of the
tube. If it is in an input or output drawer, you can remove the sample and reintroduce it
into the system if needed. If the location of the tube is not an input or output drawer,
select ORDER SAMPLE RETRIEVAL to request that the tube is routed to a recall region.
2 If the tube still cannot be retrieved, manually remove the covers and retrieve the tube.

• ICE0002
Tube Not Routed to an Output Area
There are several reasons why a request from the LIS to route a tube to a recall rack could
fail:
• a tube with the specified bar code is not known to the system
• the requested tube is not on the system
• the tube is in a state where it cannot be routed
Wait and try the request again later.
7-8 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
General Processing Errors

• ICE0004
Tubes with Empty Rack Identifier
The system is unable to identify rack information for a few tubes. Select More information
on the error recovery page to see the full list of impacted tubes. If these tubes are not
removed, tube placement in the environmentally controlled storage device (ECSD) will be
affected.

• ICE0024
Communication Failure
2 AC power to the system is lost. The system is not able to initialize or run until power is
restored.

• DxA.MR043
Insufficient Sample Carriers on the System
1 Add the specified number of carriers to an entry point on the track.


• DxA.PG001
No Racks Available
B78799AM 7-9
Error Recovery
1 Depending on the named destination indicated in the Description on the System page:
a. Remove any full racks from the drawer region of the named destination.
b. Place more empty racks in the drawer region of the named destination.
2 Close the drawers.

• DxA.M0003
Power Loss Detected
AC power to the system is lost. The system is not able to initialize or run until power is
restored.

• DxA.MP009
Remove Sample Carriers from the System
1 Remove the excessive sample carriers from the exit lane of the transport system. Refer
to Inspect Sample Carriers and Remove Defective Ones.

• DxA.PG002
Tube Missing
If a tube is missing, locate the tube on the system.

• DxA.PG006
• DxA.PG014
Axis Needs Maintenance or Repairing
7-10 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Refer to the Description on the System page for details on parameters that are out of range
or defective components.

• DxA.C113
• DxA.DE031
• DxA.DE032
• DxA.MR044
• DxA.MR053
• DxA.RE032
• DxA.RE050
Cap Gripping Axis Motion Error
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
2 Open the robot door to access the gripper.

3 Manually move the robot up.
4 Confirm that the robot can move up and down.
5 Inspect the gripper fingers. Perform maintenance if necessary.
6 Close the robot door. Push the door until it latches.
B78799AM 7-11
Error Recovery


• DxA.MR026
• DxA.MR029
Cap Gripping Axis Motion Error 2
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

4 Inspect the rotation axis of the gripper. Manually rotate the gripper.
7-12 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Note
If the error persists, service inspection is required.


• DxA.MR027
• DxA.MR030
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

B78799AM 7-13
Error Recovery

• DxA.DE013
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

3 Open the gripper fingers if closed by locating the gripper belt and rotating the belt.
Figure 359 Rotate the Belt of the Gripper

5 Confirm that the tube remains in its original position.
6 If the cap is not attached to the tube, remove the cap.
7-14 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery


• DxA.DE028
Close the Covers
Close the module cover.

• DxA.MP013
• DxA.PG003
Covers are Unlocked
The request to unlock the module covers was rejected because the covers are already
unlocked.
• DxA.MP014
Communication Failure 1
This event indicates that the module console lost connection to the DxA server. While the
module console is trying to reconnect to the DxA server, the application is not operable.
After 30 seconds without a connection, the module pauses. If the attempts to reconnect are
unsuccessful, the module console displays the option to restart the application.

• DxA.M0010
1 If samples encounter routing problems and get stuck, restart the system.
B78799AM 7-15
Error Recovery

• DxA.M0011
This event indicates that the DxA server has lost connection to the Programmable Logic
Controller (PLC).
1 Select Retry at the bottom of the page to reconnect.
2 If the issue persists, perform a hard restart. Refer to Shut Down the DxA System for
more information.

• DxA.M0002
Confirm the Power is Turned On
1 Confirm that the power is turned on for the module.
Note
The system continues to display this message while the uninterruptible power
supply (UPS) is charged. If the power is turned on and the message is still displayed,
wait several minutes.

• DxA.MP006
• DxA.MP007
Confirm the Power is Turned On 2
1 Confirm that the power is turned on for the module.
Note
The system continues to display this message while the uninterruptible power
supply (UPS) is charged. If the power is turned on and the message is still displayed,
wait several minutes.
7-16 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
3 Confirm that the module console is connected to the module.

4 Close all module covers.

• DxA.M0009
Controlled Stop Button is Pressed
1 The Controlled Stop button is pressed. To resume sample processing, release the
Controlled Stop button.

• DxA.MP008
• DxA.MP011
Cover Locking Error
1 The system was unable to lock the covers. Open any unlocked covers and confirm that
the locking mechanisms are not obstructed.


• DxA.MP003
Duplicate Racks
Two racks on the system have the same ID. Refer to the Description on the System page
for the location of the duplicate racks. Remove one of the racks from the system.
B78799AM 7-17
Error Recovery

• DxA.MT002
Duplicate Sample Carriers
Two sample carriers on the system have the same ID. Refer to the Description on the
System page for the location of the duplicate sample carriers. Remove one of the sample
carriers from the system.

• DxA.MT001
Empty Sample Tube
Warning

Warning
Warning
Warning
If you open the drawer while the adapter handler is not in the top position, you will
damage the adapter handler. Before opening the centrifuge drawer, confirm that the
adapter handler is in the top position and not inside the centrifuge.

7-18 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
4 Remove all sample tubes from the adapters in the centrifuge. Inspect the tubes for
damage. Place these tubes on racks and introduce the racks into the input drawer.
5 Remove all tubes from the adapter shuttle. Place these tubes on racks and introduce the
racks into the input drawer.
6 Inspect the centrifuge shuttle. Clean if necessary.

7 Inspect the transport segment connected to the centrifuge module. Clean if necessary.
8 Inspect the inside of the centrifuge module. Clean if necessary.
10 Close the centrifuge drawer. Gently push the centrifuge into the locked position. An
audible click sound indicates that the centrifuge drawer is locked.


• DxA.C117
EtherCAT Communication Warning
Note
There is an EtherCAT communication warning. The system continues to operate.


• DxA.MP012
Firmware Error

• DxA.M0006
• DxA.M0007
B78799AM 7-19
Error Recovery
Firmware Update in Progress
Wait until the firmware update is complete. The installation process can take up to 30
minutes.

• DxA.M0008
General Communication Failure

2 If the issue persists, contact your local Beckman Coulter representative.

• DxA.M0015
• DxA.M0016
General Processing Error
Warning

Warning
Warning
Warning
7-20 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
2 Confirm that the adapter handler is in the top position and not inside the centrifuge.
5 If there is a centrifuge adapter in the centrifuge adapter handler, remove the adapter.
Place the adapter in an empty position in the centrifuge or adapter shuttle.



• DxA.C065
• DxA.C114
Gripper Axis Initialization Failed
Warning

B78799AM 7-21
Error Recovery
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

Note


• DxA.MR013
• DxA.MR015
7-22 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Gripper Failure
Warning

Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

B78799AM 7-23
Error Recovery


• DxA.MR031
Gripper Failure Detected
Warning

Warning
7-24 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.


B78799AM 7-25
Error Recovery
Note


• DxA.MR071
• DxA.MR073
Gripper Motion Failure
Warning

Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

7-26 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery

5 Inspect the rotation axis of the adapter handler gripper. Manually rotate the adapter
handler gripper.

Note


• DxA.MR040
• DxA.MR041
• DxA.MR046
• DxA.MR067
Initialize the Module
Select Initialize at the bottom of the page.

• DxA.A026, DxA.A027, DxA.A028, DxA.A029, DxA.A030, DxA.A031, DxA.A034,
DxA.A042, DxA.A044, DxA.A048, DxA.A054, DxA.A065, DxA.A067, DxA.A068,
DxA.A069, DxA.A070, DxA.A072, DxA.A074, DxA.A075, DxA.A076, DxA.A077,
DxA.A079, DxA.A081, DxA.A088, DxA.A090, DxA.A097, DxA.DE016, DxA.DE017,
DxA.DE036, DxA.DE037, DxA.DE039, DxA.DE040, DxA.C001, DxA.C057, DxA.C032,
DxA.C035, DxA.C073, DxA.C068, DxA.C080, DxA.C064, DxA.C106, DxA.C072, DxA.C079,
DxA.C119, DxA.DT002, DxA.DT007, DxA.DT009, DxA.DT017, DxA.M0012, DxA.M0013,
DxA.MD021, DxA.MD001, DxA.MD002, DxA.MD003, DxA.MD004, DxA.MD005,
DxA.MD006, DxA.MD012, DxA.MD014, DxA.MP002, DxA.MR077, DxA.MR078,
DxA.MR080, DxA.MP016, DxA.MR028, DxA.MR036, DxA.MR054, DxA.MR057,
DxA.MR060, DxA.MR063, DxA.MP018, DxA.MR075, DxA.RB008, DxA.RE067,
DxA.RE069, DxA.RE074, DxA.RE064, DxA.RE013, DxA.RE065, DxA.S002, DxA.S005,
DxA.S014, DxA.S015, DxA.S016, DxA.S041, DxA.S038, DxA.S032, DxA.S045, DxA.S046,
DxA.S052, DxA.T028, DxA.T029, DxA.T030, DxA.T031, DxA.T001, DxA.T002, DxA.T003,
B78799AM 7-27
Error Recovery
DxA.T004, DxA.T007, DxA.T008, DxA.T009, DxA.T021, DxA.T024, DxA.T010, DxA.T011,

DxA.T013, DxA.T016, DxA.T017, DxA.T018
Inspect the Waste Containers
Warning
Warning


flashing.
2 Confirm that the waste containers are not full.

3 Confirm that all necessary parts are in place.
4 Close the drawer.
5 Confirm that all waste container drawers are closed.

• DxA.M0004
Low Disk Space
The system log configuration might require adjustment.
7-28 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery

• DxA.M0014
Motor Driver Board Communication Error
Note
The communication between 2 motor driver boards is interrupted. The system remains
operational, but the issue must be resolved.

• DxA.MP015
Missing or Invalid Sample Tube Data
Acknowledge all open alerts and then shut down the system.

• DxA.M0005
Missing Tube
Warning

Warning
B78799AM 7-29
Error Recovery
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
2 If a tube is missing, find it on the system. The bar code of the missing tube is displayed
in the Description on the System page.


• DxA.MR039
• DxA.MR052
Rack Error
1 Remove the racks from the drawer.

2 Inspect the racks and replace if necessary.

• DxA.MD007
Remove Rack
7-30 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Note
manually.
1 Open the drawer.
flashing.
2 The rack in the indicated position is the wrong rack type, in the wrong position, or both.
Remove the rack from the drawer.

• DxA.MD008
Remove Sample Carriers
1 Remove the sample carriers from the exit lane of the transport system. Refer to Inspect
Sample Carriers and Remove Defective Ones.
2 If the sample carrier contains a sample tube, remove the tube. Search for the sample
using the Sample Search and open the Detailed sample log. Select Mark sample removed.

• DxA.PG008
Remove Sample Carriers 2
Remove the sample carriers from the exit lane of the transport system. Refer to Inspect
Sample Carriers and Remove Defective Ones.
B78799AM 7-31
Error Recovery

• DxA.PG007
Remove Tube
Warning

Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

3 If there is a tube, remove it.
4 After removing a tube, mark the tube as removed on the system.
Note
This step is only necessary if the tube can still be located on the system with the
Sample Search.
7-32 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
a. On the system console, use the Sample Search bar to find the sample tube that you
removed.
b. Select the sample from the results shown below the Sample Search bar.
c. Select Mark sample as removed.


• DxA.MR084
• DxA.MR086
Restart the System
Restart the system. Refer to System Shutdown and System Startup.

• DxA.PG004
Safety Controller Error
The safety controller is defective or not connected to the system.
1 Pause the system.

2 Turn off the module power. Refer to Shut down module.
3 Wait about 2 minutes.
4 Turn on the module power.

• DxA.MP001
Sample Carrier Inventory Failed
Select Initialize System on the system console.
B78799AM 7-33
Error Recovery

• DxA.PG009
Sample Volume Change Detected
Warning

Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
2 If a sample tube is in the centrifuge tube robot gripper or beneath the gripper, remove
it.

7-34 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery

• DxA.MR082
Status Light or Control Cabinet Failure
1 Pause the system.

2 Turn off the module power. Refer to Shut down module.
3 Wait for 2 minutes.
4 Turn on the module power.

• DxA.MP005
• DxA.MP017
System Error
Acknowledge all open alerts and then shut down the system.

• DxA.M0001
• DxA.M0017
• DxA.M0018
System Error 2
Shut down the system and select Keep Samples.

• DxA.PG018
System Error 3
Shut down the system and select Remove Samples.
B78799AM 7-35
Error Recovery

• DxA.PG019
Backup Power Supply Failure
2 If the problem persists, the component requires servicing or replacement.


• DxA.MP004
• DxA.S022
System Startup Failed
1 Acknowledge all open system events and follow the error recovery steps.
2 Select Initialize System on the system console.

• DxA.PG010
MCL StartUp Failure
1 Acknowledge all open system events and follow the error recovery steps.
2 Restart the system. Refer to the startup and shutdown procedures .

• DxA.M0019
System Unable to Continue Processing Sample on Route Plan
7-36 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Sample Processing Errors
1 Confirm that all relevant modules are able to process samples and try to resolve any
issues.
Once the issues are resolved, this error is dismissed automatically and the system
continues processing the sample tube.
2 If the problem persists or an urgent sample is affected, locate the sample tube in
question by using Sample Search. Manually remove the sample tube for manual
processing.

• DxA.PG016
• DxA.PG017
Unable to Initialize
The safety controller is defective or not connected to the system.

• DxA.MP010

The tables below contain the list of sample processing errors and hyperlinks to their
corresponding recovery steps.
Table 13 Bar Code Errors
Event ID Link to Recovery Steps
100301 Sample Tube Bar Code Not Read
100302 Bar Code Mismatch Error
Table 14 Liquid Level Detection (LLD) Errors

100201 LLD Data Not Received Error
100202 LLD Data Processing Error
100203 LLD Measurement Deviation Error
100204 LLD Channel 1 Air Values Error
100205 LLD Channel 2 Air Values Error
100206 LLD Volume Calculation Error
B78799AM 7-37
Error Recovery
Table 14 Liquid Level Detection (LLD) Errors (Continued)

100207 LLD Content Plausibility Error
100208 LLD No Water-based Component Found Error
100209 LLD No Cruor Error
100210 LLD No Liquid Content Error
100211 LLD No Gel Error
100212 LLD Critical Fill Level Error
100213 LLD Tube Height Confirmation Error
100214 LLD Tube Gripper Height Confirmation Error
100215 LLD Tube Configuration Error
100216 LLD Configuration Profile Error
100217 LLD Volume Loss in Centrifuge Error
100218 LLD Volume Loss in Centrifuge Warning
100219 LLD Gel Volume More Than Blood Level
Table 15 Tube Classification Errors

100101 Tube Classification Error
Table 16 Sample Routing Errors

Sample Text Link to Recovery Steps
No tests are requested for the tube. No Tests Ordered
Middleware has indicated that the sample cannot Sample Processing Error
be processed.
Middleware has indicated that the sample cannot Sample Integrity Error
be processed.
New sample detected. A tube that had been Fresh Sample Detected with Original
previously decapped was detected with the Manufacturer's Cap
original manufacturer's cap.
New sample detected. A tube that was previously Fresh Sample Detected as Unspun
centrifuged was detected as unspun.
Tube matches an active sample ID that has been Sample ID Reuse Not Allowed
quarantined due to sample ID reuse.
The test order requires an unspun tube, but the Test Order Requires No Centrifugation
loaded tube possesses an Always Centrifuge input
characteristic.
7-38 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Table 16 Sample Routing Errors (Continued)

The test order requires a tube that has been Test Order Requires Centrifugation
centrifuged, but the loaded tube has the Skip
Centrifuge input characteristic.
The test order requires a tube spun to 2x, but the Cannot Run 2x Test on 1x-spun Sample Tube
centrifuge spun the tube to 1x. Reload the tube
with an Always Centrifuge input characteristic.
The test order requires an unspun tube, but the Spun Sample Unable to Process Unspun Test
tube is already spun.
The test order contains both spun and unspun Centrifuge Conflict
tests.
Cannot centrifuge the tube without the original Invalid Cap State for Centrifuge
cap.
Cannot find a cap that satisfies tube requirements. Cap Transition Error
Cannot recap the tube with the original cap. Cannot Recap with Original Manufacturer's Cap
The instruction did not complete successfully. Subsystem Processing Failure
Cannot find an analyzer destination to process the Analyzer Not Available
following tests.
The volume of the tube must be from {x} mL to {y} Sample Volume Out of Range
mL, but the system detected {z} mL.
The analyzer cannot run all tests because of Insufficient Sample Volume
insufficient dead volume.
Cannot run all tests because of insufficient sample Insufficient Volume
volume.
Tube fluid volume is zero. Cannot Centrifuge Empty Tube
Cannot find bar code extension, {x}, with text, {y}, Bar Code Extension Does Not Match Sample Tube
in the bar code. Type
Found multiple sample tube type matches. Multiple Bar Code Extension Match
The bar code is invalid. Sample Tube Bar Code Not Read
The system detected a duplicate bar code. Duplicate Bar Code
The system detected the bar code: {x}, on a tube Sample ID Mismatch
that had previously been identified with the bar
code: {y}.
The sample tube type changed for the tube. Sample Tube Type Changed
Cannot run the tests, because they are not Test Type Not Associated with Sample Tube Type
configured to run on the sample tube type.
Toccata-PCL has reported an Unknown Tube. Sample Tube Not Recognized
Cannot find a storage destination that matches the Storage Not Found
tube parameters.
The recapper is not available. Recapper Unavailable
B78799AM 7-39
Error Recovery
Table 16 Sample Routing Errors (Continued)

The decapper is not available. Decapper Unavailable
The centrifuge is not available. Centrifuge Not Available
The storage destination is unavailable. Storage Not Available
Disposal is not available. Sample Disposal Not Available
The specified recall region is not available. Specified Recall Region Unavailable
No recall regions are available. No Recall Regions Available
A storage destination has not been configured. Storage Not Defined
No recall regions are defined. No Recall Regions Defined
The specified recall region is not defined. Specified Recall Region Undefined
Disposal is not installed. Sample Disposal Not Installed
The centrifuge is not installed. Centrifuge Not Installed
The recapper is not installed. Recapper Not Installed
The automation system reported an undefined Undefined System Error
error.
An unexpected error occurred while generating a Unexpected Software Error
route for the tube.
The automation system reported an unknown Unknown System Error
error.
The system reported that the data for a tube is out Sample Tube Data Not Synchronized
of date.
The sample tube cannot be processed in the Sample Processing From Specified Input Region
Centrifuge if needed input region without having Not Allowed
historical data about the centrifugation state.
Previously spun sample tube detected as unspun in Previously Spun Sample Tube Detected as Unspun
the input module.
Sample tube detected as unspun after Sample Tube Detected as Unspun after
centrifugation. Centrifugation
Bar Code Errors
Sample Tube Bar Code Not Read
1 Confirm the following to troubleshoot the tube classification error:

• is the bar code damaged or contaminated?
• are there additional labels or handwriting covering the bar code?
• is the bar code correctly positioned?
• are the quiet zone requirements fulfilled?
7-40 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
• is the bar code label printing quality ok?

• does the bar code label contain any characters which are not allowed?
• is the bar code symbology supported or activated in the system configuration?
2 Confirm the following are clean:

• TIU robot camera
• TIU robot mirrors
• TIU robot panels
• tube robot gripper fingers
3 If there are no sample tube anomalies, reintroduce the sample tube into an input region.
4 If the error persists, contact your local Beckman Coulter Service Representative.

• 100301
Bar Code Mismatch Error
Bar code on sample tube does not match expected bar code. The sample bar code has been
changed.
1 Confirm there are not numerous readable bar codes on the sample tube.
2 Confirm the sample tube is not at an unexpected position.
3 Confirm the bar code is not damaged.

• 100302
Liquid Level Detection (LLD) Errors
LLD Data Not Received Error
The system did not receive any liquid level detection measurement data during a robot
processing of the sample tube.
1 Reintroduce the sample tube into an input region.

B78799AM 7-41
Error Recovery

• 100201
LLD Data Processing Error
An unexpected error occurred during the processing of the liquid level detection signal.


• 100202
LLD Measurement Deviation Error
The length deviation between the up and down measurement is too large.


• 100203
LLD Channel 1 Air Values Error
The LLD measurement range is not correct. This error can occur due to the following
reasons:
• Sample tube was not properly placed into the rack or sample carrier
• LLD is not properly calibrated
1 Confirm the sample tube is properly placed in the rack.


• 100204
LLD Channel 2 Air Values Error
The liquid level detection measurement range is not correct. This error can occur due to the
following reasons:
• Sample tube was not properly placed into the rack or sample carrier
• LLD is not properly calibrated
7-42 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
1 Confirm the sample tube is properly placed in the rack.


• 100205
LLD Volume Calculation Error
An unexpected error occurred during the liquid level detection volume calculation.


• 100206
LLD Content Plausibility Error
The system unexpectedly detected components, such as gel, in the middle of the sample
tube.
1 Inspect the sample tube to see if there is any unexpected content in the middle.

• 100207
LLD No Water-based Component Found Error
The system did not find any water-based components in the sample tube.
1 Confirm there is the presence of a water-based component in the sample tube.

B78799AM 7-43
Error Recovery

• 100208
LLD No Cruor Error

The system unexpectedly did not find cruor/whole blood.
1 Confirm the presence of cruor in the sample tube.


• 100209
LLD No Liquid Content Error
The system detected the sample tube as empty and did not detect any liquid content to be
present.
1 Confirm sample tube is not empty.

2 If it is not empty, reintroduce the sample tube into an input region.

• 100210
LLD No Gel Error
The system unexpectedly did not detect a gel layer in the sample tube.
1 Confirm the presence of a middle gel layer in the sample tube.


• 100211
LLD Critical Fill Level Error
The top liquid level is too close to the upper rim of the sample tube.
7-44 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Closed, overfilled tubes are routed to an SIQ region.
For any open, overfilled tubes, the module where the overfilled sample tube was detected
stops.
1 If the sample tube is open and overfilled, immediately remove the overfilled sample
tube manually.
There is a high contamination risk.
2 If the tube is not overfilled, reintroduce the sample tube into an input region.
3 If the tube is not overfilled and the error persists, contact your Beckman Coulter Service
Representative.

• 100212
LLD Tube Height Confirmation Error
The tube height measurement of the liquid level detection does not correspond to the
nominal value identified by the tube inspection unit.
1 Inspect the sample tube for anomalies, such as:

• detached bar code label
• incorrectly-placed cap


• 100213
LLD Tube Gripper Height Confirmation Error
The gripper height measurement between the liquid level detection and the tube inspection
unit does not match.
1 Inspect the sample tube for anomalies, such as a detached bar code label.
B78799AM 7-45
Error Recovery

• 100214
LLD Tube Configuration Error
The system detected an invalid liquid level detection configuration for the sample tube
description configuration.
A configuration read from the configuration profile cannot be evaluated


• 100215
LLD Configuration Profile Error

The system cannot evaluate the liquid level detection configuration profile.


• 100216
LLD Volume Loss in Centrifuge Error
The system has detected volume loss in a sample tube after centrifugation. When this error
occurs, the centrifuge module stops running.
1 Inspect the sample tube for damage.

2 Remove all sample tubes from the centrifuge device and module.
3 If necessary, clean the centrifuge device and module.
4 If the tube is not damaged, reintroduce it into an input region.
5 Reintroduce all other removed sample tubes into an input region.

• 100217
LLD Volume Loss in Centrifuge Warning
The system has detected volume loss in a sample tube after centrifugation.
7-46 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
The sample tube is routed to an SIQ region and the centrifuge module continues to run.
1 Inspect the sample tube for damage.

2 If the sample tube is damaged, do the following:
a. Pause the system immediately.
b. Remove the damaged sample tube.
c. Clean any areas that have been contaminated.
3 If the sample tube is not damaged, reintroduce it into an input region.

• 100218
LLD Gel Volume More Than Blood Level
The expected gel volume is higher than the detected whole blood level.
1 Inspect the sample tube for anomalies, such as:

• absence of gel
• too little sample content
• labels covering the bottom of the sample tube

• 100219
Tube Classification Errors
Tube Classification Error

• is this tube type used in a current tube configuration?
• is the cap properly placed?
• are there any detached labels?
• are all labels correctly applied?
• are there any labels or manual markings on the cap?
• is there any contamination on the cap area?
B78799AM 7-47
Error Recovery
• is the tube properly seated in the rack?

• is the rack damaged? If so, replace.



• 100101
Routing Errors
No Tests Ordered
No tests have been requested for the sample.
1 Confirm the following:

• the accessioning of the sample is complete
• the LIS has the required tests in its system
2 Confirm that communication is established between:

• LIS and REMISOL Advance
• DxA and REMISOL Advance
Sample Processing Error
Analyzer unable to complete sample processing.
1 Use the error message to determine which analyzer is unable to process the sample.
2 Go to analyzer and correct any analyzer issues.
Sample Integrity Error
Analyzer indicates that the system cannot process the sample due to an issue with the
sample integrity.
7-48 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
1 Use the error message to determine which analyzer was unable to process the sample.
2 Go to analyzer and investigate the sample integrity issues.
3 Correct any issues, if possible.
Fresh Sample Detected with Original Manufacturer's Cap
New sample with duplicate ID detected. This error occurs when a sample tube is loaded
with the original manufacturer's cap, but DxA system data indicates that a sample tube with
the same sample ID has already been introduced and processed in the DxA system.
DxA does not support the use of sample tubes with duplicate sample IDs on the system at
the same time or within the configured time frame the sample tube remains known to the
system.
1 Remove the sample and process it manually.

2 Contact your Beckman Coulter Application Specialist to clarify the sample ID re-use
boundaries and set up an appropriate system configuration.
Fresh Sample Detected as Unspun
New sample with duplicate ID detected. This error occurs when a sample tube is loaded and
detected to be unspun, but DxA system data indicates that a sample tube with the same
sample ID has already been spun and processed in the DxA system.
DxA does not support the use of sample tubes with duplicate IDs on the system at the same
time or within the configured time frame the sample tube remains known to the system.
1 Remove the sample and process it manually.

Sample ID Reuse Not Allowed
The sample tube matches an existing sample ID for a different patient. This occurs if a
sample ID is being reused before the configured reuse interval has expired.
DxA does not support the use of sample tubes with duplicate sample IDs on the system at
the same time or within the configured time frame the sample tube remains known to the
system.
B78799AM 7-49
Error Recovery
1 Remove the sample tube and process it manually.

Test Order Requires No Centrifugation
The test order requires an unspun sample tube, but the sample tube has been loaded into
an Force centrifuge input region.
Reintroduce the sample tube into a Skip centrifuge or Centrifuge if needed input region.
Test Order Requires Centrifugation
The test order requires a spun sample tube, but the sample tube has been loaded into a Skip
centrifuge input region and DxA has detected the sample tube to be unspun.
1 Confirm the spun state detection is correctly configured for the sample tube type.
2 Reintroduce the sample into a Force centrifuge or Centrifuge if needed input region.
Cannot Run 2x Test on 1x-spun Sample Tube
The test order requires a sample tube to be spun to a 2x level, but the sample tube has been
spun to a 1x level.
According to your laboratory procedures, reintroduce the sample tube into a Force
centrifuge input region.
Spun Sample Unable to Process Unspun Test
The test order requires an unspun tube, but the tube is already spun.
1 Confirm the Required Centrifugation State for each test is correct.
2 Confirm the ratio check is correct for each sample tube type that is defined as No Gel.
Centrifuge Conflict
The test order contains both spun and unspun tests, which is not supported by DxA.
7-50 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
1 Confirm the centrifugation setting is correct for each of the ordered tests for the sample.
2 Do one of the following to troubleshoot the error:
a. Confirm that all settings are consistent.
b. Confirm that the LIS is not ordering this set of tests on a single sample tube.
Invalid Cap State for Centrifuge
Cannot centrifuge the sample tube without the original manufacturer’s cap. The sample
tube no longer has the original manufacturer’s cap and DxA cannot centrifuge the sample.
1 Process the sample in an offline centrifuge.

2 Reintroduce the sample into a Skip centrifuge input region.
Cap Transition Error
Cannot find a cap state that satisfies the Named Destination configuration.
1 Confirm which caps are configured for each Named Destination in the system
configuration.

Cannot Recap with Original Manufacturer's Cap
Cannot recap the sample tube with an original manufacturer's cap.
configuration.

Subsystem Processing Failure
A problem occurred attempting to process the sample at a subsystem.
1 Clear the alerts on the affected subsystem.

B78799AM 7-51
Error Recovery
Analyzer Not Available
No analyzer destinations are configured or are available to run the tests ordered on the
sample tube.
1 Confirm the DxA system configuration is correct.

2 Confirm the analyzers have enough supplies.
3 Review QC on REMISOL Advance and run, if necessary.
Sample Volume Out of Range
The sample volume for the given sample tube type is out of the required range. This may
have a negative impact on sample processing due to the additive of the sample tube.
Process the sample according to your laboratory procedures.
Insufficient Sample Volume
The sample volume is insufficient to run all the tests on an analyzer.
1 Ensure that the volume settings are correct for the ordered tests and the analyzer.
2 Manually pipette the remaining sample volume into a lower-volume sample tube.
3 Run the tests manually, considering highest priority first.
4 If necessary, request a new sample from the patient.
Insufficient Volume
The sample volume is insufficient to run all the tests.
1 Ensure that the volume settings are correct for the ordered tests and the analyzer.
2 Manually pipette the remaining sample volume into a lower-volume sample tube.
3 Run the tests manually, considering highest priority first.
4 If necessary, request a new sample from the patient.
Cannot Centrifuge Empty Tube
The system did not detect sample volume in the sample tube and cannot centrifuge an
empty sample tube.
7-52 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
1 Inspect the volume of the fluid in the sample tube.

2 If sufficient sample volume is found, reintroduce the sample tube into an input region.
3 If necessary:
a. Process the sample in an offline centrifuge.
b. Reintroduce the sample into a Skip centrifuge input region.
Bar Code Extension Does Not Match Sample Tube Type
The bar code extension could not be found in the bar code.
The system is configured to use bar code extensions. The extension indicated was not found
on the sample ID of the tube.

• Correct the system configuration for bar code extension usage.
• Re-label sample to follow expected bar code extensions.
2 Re-order the test at the LIS with new bar code.
Multiple Bar Code Extension Match
This error occurs when the bar code of the sample tube matches the bar code extensions
defined in the system configuration for multiple sample tube types.
For example, this error occurs if the following are true:

• one extension is defined in the system configuration with the suffix 101
• another extension is defined in the system configuration with the suffix 01
• a sample tube is loaded with the bar code suffix 101
1 Check the system configuration for potential duplicate extension definitions.

Sample Tube Bar Code Not Read

• is the bar code damaged or contaminated?
• are there additional labels or handwriting covering the bar code?
• is the bar code correctly positioned?
• are the quite zone requirements are fulfilled?
• is the bar code label printing quality ok?
B78799AM 7-53
Error Recovery
• does the bar code label contain any characters which are not allowed?
• is the bar code symbology supported or activated in the system configuration?
3 If the error persists, contact service to confirm the system configuration.
Duplicate Bar Code
The system detected a duplicate bar code. Another sample with the same Sample ID is on
the system.
Resolve duplicate Sample ID cases according to your laboratory procedures.
Sample ID Mismatch
The system detected a different bar code than already read for the sample tube.
1 Inspect the bar code label for any damage and replace the label, if necessary.
Sample Tube Type Changed
The sample tube type changed for the tube. Possible case of a duplicate Sample ID has been
detected.
Process the sample tube manually according to your laboratory procedures.
Test Type Not Associated with Sample Tube Type
The tests are not configured to run on the sample tube type.
1 Confirm the ordered tests for the sample tube are correct.
It is possible the tube was mislabeled.
2 If the tests were correctly ordered, update the sample tube configuration to allow the
listed tests to be processed.

Sample Tube Not Recognized
The system cannot identify the sample tube characteristics for processing.
7-54 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery

• is this tube type used in a current tube configuration?
• is the cap properly placed?
• are there any detached labels?
• are all labels correctly applied?
• are there any labels or manual markings on the cap?
• is there any contamination on the cap area?
• is the tube properly seated in the rack?
• is the rack damaged? If so, replace.


Storage Not Found
Cannot find a configured storage destination that matches the sample tube.

Recapper Unavailable
The recapper is not available.

• correct issue with recapper
• manually recap with push cap
Decapper Unavailable
The decapper is not available.
B78799AM 7-55
Error Recovery

a. Correct issue with decapper.
b. Manually decap the sample.
Centrifuge Not Available
The centrifuge is not available. The sample requires centrifugation and cannot be processed
further until it has been spun.
1 If necessary, process the sample in an offline centrifuge.

2 Reintroduce the sample tube into a Skip centrifuge input region.
Storage Not Available
The storage destination is unavailable.
1 Confirm that the storage destinations are available.

Sample Disposal Not Available
Sample disposal is not available.
1 Confirm that there are no alerts on the output module console causing disposal to not
be available.
2 If there are any disposal alerts, perform all error recovery steps to clear the alerts.
Specified Recall Region Unavailable
The recall region specified by the LIS is not available.
Confirm that the recall region specified by the LIS is mapped to an output drawer.
No Recall Regions Available
No recall regions are available.
Confirm that a recall region is mapped to an output drawer.
7-56 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Storage Not Defined
A storage destination has not been configured.

No Recall Regions Defined
No recall regions are defined.
1 Confirm that there is at least one recall region configured in the system configuration.
2 Confirm that the recall region is mapped to an output drawer.
Specified Recall Region Undefined
The recall region specified by the LIS does not exist.
1 Update the configuration to define a recall region with the name specified by the LIS.
2 Confirm that the recall region specified by the LIS is mapped to an output drawer.
Sample Disposal Not Installed
Sample disposal is not installed.
Centrifuge Not Installed
The centrifuge is not installed.
When a DxA system without a centrifuge module encounters a sample that requires
centrifugation in order to complete processing, this error occurs.
1 If necessary, process the sample in an offline centrifuge.

2 Reintroduce the sample tube into a Skip centrifuge input region.
Recapper Not Installed
The recapper is not installed.
B78799AM 7-57
Error Recovery
configuration.

Undefined System Error
The system reported an undefined error.
Unexpected Software Error
An unexpected error occurred while processing the sample tube.
1 Reintroduce the tube into the input region.

Unknown System Error
The system reported an unknown error.
Sample Tube Data Not Synchronized
The system reported data for a tube that is out of date. The time synchronization between
system computers may not be correct.

Sample Processing From Specified Input Region Not Allowed
Sample tubes can only be processed in the Centrifuge if needed input region when one of
the following preconditions has been fulfilled:
• The sample tube was centrifuged online on the DxA system.
• The sample tube was processed in the Skip centrifuge input region and identified as a
centrifuged sample.
7-58 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
For more information, refer to Input Regions for Centrifugation.
Consider the test order and the current spun state of the sample tube and place the
sample in one of the following input regions:
• Use Force centrifuge input region for sample tubes which require centrifugation.
• Use Skip centrifuge input region for sample tubes which do not require
centrifugation.
Previously Spun Sample Tube Detected as Unspun

This error occurs when a sample tube containing gel was previously detected as spun or
centrifuged online on DxA, but it was detected as unspun in the input. The transition from
spun to unspun state is not allowed for sample tubes containing gel.
1 Inspect the sample tube:

a. Inspect the bar code label for anomalies such as, detached or multiple labels
covering the content.
b. Confirm the centrifugation status.
Sample Tube Detected as Unspun after Centrifugation
For sample tubes containing gel, the gel layer must be detected between the serum or
plasma and blood cells after the centrifugation. This error occurs when gel is not detected
in the middle of the sample tubes and the sample tubes are routed to the error region.
1 Inspect the sample tube:

a. Inspect the bar code label for anomalies such as, detached or multiple labels
covering the content.
b. Confirm the centrifugation status.
Centrifuge
B78799AM 7-59
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Adapter Handler Error
Warning

Warning
Warning
Warning


• DxA.C037
• DxA.C070
• DxA.C094
Adapter Handler Error 2
Warning

7-60 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning
Warning
Warning

handler gripper.

7 Remove any obstructions.
adapters and lubricate the hinges of the buckets using load-bearing grease. Refer to
Inspect and Clean the Rotor Chamber and Accessories.
B78799AM 7-61
Error Recovery
Centrifuge


• DxA.C045
• DxA.C054
• DxA.C082
• DxA.C083
• DxA.C089
Adapter Handler Error 3
Warning

Warning
Warning
Warning
1 If you have a dual centrifuge, then perform these steps on both centrifuges.

7-62 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
handler gripper.

9 Remove all sample tubes from the centrifuge. Inspect the tubes for damage. Place these
tubes on racks and introduce the racks into the input drawer.



• DxA.C055
• DxA.C102
• DxA.C108
Adapter Handler Error During Initialization
Warning

Warning
B78799AM 7-63
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning
Warning
2 Manually move the centrifuge adapter handler up.


• DxA.C071
Adapter Handler Motion Failed 1
Warning

Warning
Warning
7-64 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning

4 Place the removed centrifuge adapter on the left side of the adapter shuttle.

• DxA.C069
Warning

Warning
Warning
B78799AM 7-65
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning

5 Confirm that the robot can move back and forth and from left to right freely. Remove
any obstructions.

handler gripper.


• DxA.C051
• DxA.C056
• DxA.C058
• DxA.C060
• DxA.C062
• DxA.C091
• DxA.C092
• DxA.C093
• DxA.C097
Warning

7-66 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning
Warning
Warning
any obstructions.

handler gripper.


• DxA.C053
Warning

B78799AM 7-67
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning
Warning
Warning
handler gripper.


7-68 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge

• DxA.C066
Warning

Warning
Warning
Warning

4 Place the removed centrifuge adapter on the right side of the adapter shuttle.
any obstructions.

handler gripper.

B78799AM 7-69
Error Recovery
Centrifuge

• DxA.C042
• DxA.C043
• DxA.C044
• DxA.C046
• DxA.C049
• DxA.C052
• DxA.C059
• DxA.C084
• DxA.C085
• DxA.C090
Adapter Handler Motion Failed Downwards
Warning

Warning
Warning
Warning
7-70 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge




• DxA.C067
Adapter Handler Timed Out
Warning

Warning
Warning
B78799AM 7-71
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning


• DxA.C100
Adapter Handler Timed Out 2
Warning

Warning

Warning
7-72 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning

4 Place the removed centrifuge adapter on the right side of the adapter shuttle.

• DxA.C099
Adapter Shuttle Error During Initialization
Warning

Warning
Warning
B78799AM 7-73
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning
2 Manually move the shuttle towards the center of the adapter shuttle rail.
4 Confirm that the shuttle can move in all directions.
5 Confirm that all centrifuge adapters are seated correctly on the adapter shuttle.

• DxA.C074
• DxA.C075
• DxA.C095
• DxA.C096
• DxA.C116
Centrifugation Profile Violation
Warning

Warning
7-74 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning
Warning

4 Check the reason for the applied centrifuge profile violation and confirm that the
centrifuge is ready for operation.


• DxA.C110
• DxA.C111
• DxA.C112
Centrifugation Time Mode Is Incorrect
Warning

B78799AM 7-75
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning
Warning
Warning

4 Check the centrifuge settings on the centrifuge screen. Confirm that the centrifugation
time mode is set to include both acceleration time and spin time in the total
centrifugation time. Refer to the centrifuge documentation.


• DxA.C109
Centrifuge Communication Failure
Warning

7-76 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning
Warning
Warning
1 Confirm that the centrifuge has stopped before opening the centrifuge drawer.
3 Turn the centrifuge off and on again.


• DxA.C010
• DxA.C104
• DxA.C118
B78799AM 7-77
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Centrifuge Communication Failure or Error
Warning

Warning
Warning
Warning
3 Turn the centrifuge off and on again.

• DxA.C007
• DxA.C014
• DxA.C017
• DxA.C018
• DxA.C019
• DxA.C020
• DxA.C021
• DxA.C022
• DxA.C023
7-78 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
• DxA.C024
• DxA.C025
• DxA.C026
• DxA.C027
• DxA.C028
• DxA.C029
• DxA.C036
Centrifuge Drive Cycle Count Reaching Limit
Warning
1 The centrifuge drive cycle count is reaching its limit. Consider replacing the centrifuge
drive.

• DxA.C077
Centrifuge Door Restart
Warning

Warning
Warning
B78799AM 7-79
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning
3 Turn off the centrifuge device.
4 Turn on the centrifuge device.

• DxA.C003
• DxA.C004
• DxA.C009
• DxA.C011
• DxA.C013
Centrifuge Drawer Open
Warning

Warning
7-80 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning
Warning
1 Confirm that the centrifuge drawer is completely closed.


• DxA.C002
• DxA.C031
Centrifuge Error
Warning
1 Confirm that the centrifuge module console software is running.

2 Confirm that the centrifuge profile is configured on the centrifuge module console.
Refer to Centrifuge Configuration.
B78799AM 7-81
Error Recovery
Centrifuge

• DxA.C033
Centrifuge Lid Error
Warning

Warning
Warning
Warning
2 Inspect the centrifuge lid and remove any obstructions.
7-82 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge

• DxA.C006
Centrifuge Rotor Cycle Count Reaching Limit
Warning
The centrifuge rotor cycle count is reaching its limit. Consider replacing the centrifuge
rotor.

• DxA.C078
Centrifuge Rotor Imbalance Error
Warning

Warning
Warning
B78799AM 7-83
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning
The centrifuge automatically stops spinning when it detects an imbalance. Follow these
steps to recover from an imbalance error.
Material Required
• C16647, grease for load-bearing bolts
Procedure

7-84 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge

• DxA.C005
Centrifuge Temperature Out of Range
Warning
The temperature of the module is out of the operational range and the module is not
operational. The module is reactivated when the temperature is within the operational
range.

• DxA.C086
Centrifuge Device Error
Warning

Warning
Warning
Warning
B78799AM 7-85
Error Recovery
Centrifuge

6 Remove all tubes from the right side of the adapter shuttle. Place these tubes on racks
and introduce the racks into the input drawer.



• DxA.C088
Centrifuge Tube and Adapter Inspection
Warning

Warning
Warning
7-86 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning


• DxA.C030
• DxA.C076
• DxA.C098
Centrifuge Unable to Complete Processing
Warning

Warning
B78799AM 7-87
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning
Warning
2 If there are any centrifuge adapters with tubes on the right side of the adapter shuttle,
remove the tubes and place them in racks on an input drawer.


• DxA.C087
Configuration Error
Warning
1 There is an error in the centrifuge profile, and the system cannot continue. Correct the
error.
7-88 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge

• DxA.C016
Drive Cycle Exceeds Safe Limit
Warning
The drive has exceeded its maximum life. The centrifuge subsystem is unavailable.
Confirm that the centrifuge drive has been replaced.

• DxA.C105
Electrical Components Overheating
Warning

Warning
Warning
Warning
B78799AM 7-89
Error Recovery
Centrifuge

7 Inspect the centrifuge module and device for overheating.


• DxA.C012
Adapter Handler Error During Initialization
Warning

Warning
7-90 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning
Warning
handler gripper.


• DxA.C038
• DxA.C039
Imbalanced Adapter Shuttle
Warning

Warning
Warning
B78799AM 7-91
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning


• DxA.C115
Platform Drawer Opened
Warning

Warning
Warning
Warning
7-92 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge




• DxA.C034
Rotor Code Not Recognized
Warning

Warning
B78799AM 7-93
Error Recovery
Centrifuge
Warning
Warning
Note
The status of the centrifuge is unknown.


9 The rotor needs to be inspected. Contact your local Beckman Coulter Service
Representative.

7-94 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Centrifuge

• DxA.C008
Rotor Cycle Count Limit Exceeded
Warning
1 The rotor has exceeded its maximum life. The centrifuge subsystem is unavailable. The
centrifuge rotor needs to be replaced.

• DxA.C015
Shuttle Motion Failure
Warning
1 Resolve any shuttle alerts.


• DxA.C048
Spin Failure
Warning

B78799AM 7-95
Error Recovery
Decapper
Warning
Warning
Warning

adapters.


• DxA.C081
Decapper
7-96 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Decapper
Tube Shield Missing
Warning
Warning

2 Open the rear cover.

3 Open the transport operator cover.
4 Inspect the tube clamps. Refer to Clean and Inspect the Tube Clamps.
5 Confirm that the tube clamps are operating reliably.
6 Confirm that the tube is seated firmly in the tube clamps.

• DxA.DE034
• DxA.RE066
Cap Disposal Not Confirmed
Warning
Warning

B78799AM 7-97
Error Recovery
Decapper
Caution
from the magnets.

4 If a cap has been dropped or missing, locate the cap on the system.

7-98 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Decapper

• DxA.DE010
Cap Error 1
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

4 If a cap is in the gripper, remove it, and dispose of it.

B78799AM 7-99
Error Recovery
Decapper


• DxA.DE001
• DxA.DE035
• DxA.RE049
• DxA.RE070
• DxA.RE071
• DxA.DE043
Cap Error 2
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
7-100 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Decapper


• DxA.DE014
• DxA.RE018
Cap Gripper Axis Motion or Initialization Error
Warning
Warning

B78799AM 7-101
Error Recovery
Decapper
Caution
from the magnets.


Note


• DxA.DE004
• DxA.DE011
7-102 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Decapper
Cap Gripper Error 1
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.


B78799AM 7-103
Error Recovery
Decapper


• DxA.DE002
• DxA.DE012
• DxA.RE022
• DxA.RE026
• DxA.RE028
• DxA.RE072
Cap Gripper Error 2
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
any obstructions.
7-104 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Decapper


• DxA.DE006
• DxA.DE008
• DxA.DE019
• DxA.RE008
• DxA.RE010
Cap Gripper Error 3
Warning
Warning

B78799AM 7-105
Error Recovery
Decapper
Caution
from the magnets.



• DxA.RE001
• DxA.RE002
• DxA.RE003
• DxA.RE004
7-106 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Decapper
Cap Gripper Error 4
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.


B78799AM 7-107
Error Recovery
Decapper


• DxA.DE025
Cap Gripper Error 5
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

7-108 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Decapper


• DxA.DE026
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
B78799AM 7-109
Error Recovery
Decapper

7 If the cap is not attached to the tube, remove the cap.

• DxA.DE029
Warning
Warning

7-110 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Decapper
Caution
from the magnets.



• DxA.DE033
Cap Gripping or Initialization Error - Inspect the Gripper Movement
Warning
B78799AM 7-111
Error Recovery
Decapper
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.



• DxA.DE021
• DxA.RE016
• DxA.RE005
7-112 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Decapper
Decapper Failed to Initialize
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

B78799AM 7-113
Error Recovery
Decapper


• DxA.DE003
Decapping Not Confirmed
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

7-114 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Decapper


• DxA.DE030
Error with the Tube Clamp
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
Note
For this task you need to open the rear cover.

2 Confirm that the tube clamp opens and closes to clamp sample tubes.
B78799AM 7-115
Error Recovery
Decapper
4 Confirm that the tube clamps and their shield are correctly assembled. Refer to the
chapter Clean and Inspect the Tube Clamps.
5 Confirm that the tube is correctly seated in the tube clamp.


• DxA.DE038
• DxA.RE024
Failure to Grip a Cap 2
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
7-116 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Decapper

6 Leave the cap on the tube.

• DxA.DE023
Failure to Grip a Cap 3
Warning
Warning

B78799AM 7-117
Error Recovery
Decapper
Caution
from the magnets.


Note

7-118 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Decapper

• DxA.DE027
Gripper or Initialization Error - Inspect the Gripper
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.


B78799AM 7-119
Error Recovery
Decapper


• DxA.DE015
• DxA.DE020
• DxA.RE012
• DxA.RE015
Gripper or Initialization Error - Inspect the Rotation Axis
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
7-120 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Decapper


• DxA.RE007
• DxA.RE017
• DxA.DE005
• DxA.DE022
No Cap Detected
Warning
Warning

B78799AM 7-121
Error Recovery
Decapper
Caution
from the magnets.
This event indicates that the decapper encountered a tube without a cap. The tube is then
routed to an error region.

• DxA.DE024
Tube Clamp Tight Grip Error
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
7-122 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Note
For this task, open the rear cover.

4 If there is a tube in the gripper or in the position beneath the gripper, remove it. Mark
the tube as removed on the system.
5 If the cap is not connected to the tube, remove the cap.

6 If a cap was dropped or lost, locate the cap on the system.

• DxA.RE075
• DxA.DE042
Analyzer Not Ready to Process Samples
Warning
If sample tubes tip over, contamination of samples and the loss of the contents of
sample tubes will occur. Work carefully when handling analyzer racks with open
sample tubes as part of any error recovery procedure on the rack builder module
(RBU).
Confirm that the analyzer is turned on, operational, and in automation mode. Check the
consumables levels.

• DxA.DT014
• DxA.RB036
B78799AM 7-123
Error Recovery
Bar Code Reader Failure
Warning
Warning

Caution
1 Inspect the bar code reader for contamination. Clean the bar code reader if necessary.
Note
If you are performing this error recovery procedure on a DxC 700 AU or DxI 9000,
you need to open the analyzer cover before opening the operator transport cover.
For more information on how to open and close the covers, refer to Inspect and
Clean the Transport Components.

• DxA.DT010
Sample Aspiration in Progress
The analyzer is aspirating sample fluid for testing. When sample aspiration is
completed, the direct track sampling (DTS) subsystem automatically pauses or shuts
down.
Note
If you require the DTS subsystem to stop immediately, you can reinitialize the
analyzer, but this action will cause the loss of all ongoing tests on the analyzer.
7-124 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery

• DxA.DT021
Analyzer Communication Lost
1 Confirm that the analyzer is powered on, operational, filled up, and in automation mode.
2 Wait for the analyzer to complete sample aspiration, then reset communication with the
DxA system on the analyzer console.
Note
If you require the DTS (direct track sampling) subsystem to stop immediately, you
can reinitialize the analyzer, but this action will cause the loss of all ongoing tests on
the analyzer.
3 Initialize the DTS subsystem by selecting Initialize at the bottom of the page.

• DxA.DT024
Missing Consumables
1 Refill the missing consumables on the analyzer.


• DxA.DT023
Missing Reagents
Some reagents are missing, low, or empty. To continue performing the tests that require
the reagents in question, replace empty reagent bottles or add new reagent bottles to
the analyzer.

• DxA.DT022
Analyzer Initialization Failure
B78799AM 7-125
Error Recovery
1 Confirm that the analyzer is turned on, operational, and in automation mode. Check the
consumables levels.

• DxA.DT013
Communication Failure with the Analyzer
consumables levels.

• DxA.DT003
• DxA.DT004
• DxA.DT015
Analyzer Processing Error
1 Confirm that the aspiration probe on the analyzer is retracted.

consumables levels.

• DxA.DT006
• DxA.DT012
• DxA.DT016
• DxA.DT018
• DxA.DT020
Sample Error
The system cannot retrieve the sample information. The sample was sent to the error
region on the output drawer.
7-126 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery

• DxA.DT005
Tube Locator Error
Warning
Warning

Caution
Note
If you are performing this error recovery procedure on a DxC 700 AU or DxI 9000,
you need to open the analyzer cover before opening the operator transport cover.
2 Remove the cover over or around the tube locator.

4 Reattach the cover over or around the tube locator.
5 Close the transport operator cover.
Important
The following information applies to the DxC 700 AU and DxI 9000 only.
After performing error recovery or maintenance procedures, ensure that you close the
transport cover and the analyzer cover in the correct order. You must first close the
transport cover at the input and output lane of the analyzer before closing the analyzer
cover.
B78799AM 7-127
Error Recovery
Figure 380 DxC 700 AU

2. DxC 700 AU cover
Figure 381 DxI 9000
7-128 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Drawers

2. DxI 9000 cover

• DxA.DT001
• DxA.DT011
• DxA.DT019
Drawers
Drawer Latch Sensor Error
Warning
Warning

Warning
3 Unlock the centrifuge drawer using the key, then turn the key back to its initial position.
B78799AM 7-129
Error Recovery
Drawers

• DxA.MD022
Could Not Find Rack
1 Confirm that the racks are in place or select another rack.

2 Follow the steps to revisit the rack.

• DxA.MD016
Waste Container Missing Parts
Warning
Warning


flashing.
2 Confirm that the waste container is in the drawer.
7-130 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Drawers
3 Confirm that the waste chute is in place.
Figure 382 The Lower Waste Chute
4 Close the drawer.

• DxA.MD011
Drawer Open by Force
1 Confirm that the drawer is closed.
Note
Do not force the drawers open. Wait for the drawer to unlock before opening.
B78799AM 7-131
Error Recovery
Drawers

• DxA.MD013
Missing Upper Waste Chute
Warning
Warning

This event can appear for the decapper in the input module or for the sample waste chutes
in the output module.
1 Follow these steps for the decapper waste container:

a. Select Pause.
b. Open the drawer.
c. Select the drawer open sensor button; wait until the red flashing light has stopped
flashing.
d. When you see a solid red light, pull on the handle to open the drawer.
2 Follow these steps for the sample waste containers in the output module:
a. Select Unlock covers. Open the module cover.
7-132 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Drawers
3 Confirm that the upper waste chute is in place.

a. The decapper upper waste chute is attached to the splash protection cover.
b. Confirm that all upper waste chutes are in place for the sample waste in the output
module.
Figure 384 The Output Module with Up to 3 Sample Waste Containers
4 Close the drawer.

B78799AM 7-133
Error Recovery
Drawers

• DxA.MD017
Drawer Profile is Missing
Warning
Warning

1 Confirm that the module console is connected to the module.
Note
manually.
2 Open the drawer.
flashing.
3 Remove all racks from the drawer.

5 On the module console, confirm that the drawer profile has been applied.
a. Select Menu > Configuration > Map drawer profiles.
b. Select the affected drawer.
c. Select Next.
d. Select the drawer layout from the displayed drawer profiles.
e. Select Apply to apply the changes.
7-134 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Drawers

• DxA.MD018
Drawer Profile Needs to be Applied to the Drawer
Warning
Warning

Note
manually.
1 Open the drawer.
flashing.
2 Confirm that the racks inside the drawer are placed according to the profile.
3 If the drawer is used for output, confirm that all the racks are empty.

• DxA.MD020
Empty the Waste Container
Warning
B78799AM 7-135
Error Recovery
Drawers
Warning


flashing.
4 Remove the waste bag from the waste container. Dispose of the waste bag according to
7-136 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Drawers
Important
level.
B78799AM 7-137
Error Recovery
Drawers
7 Close the drawer.

9 Confirm that no tubes are missing. Locate any missing tubes on the system.

• DxA.MD015
Empty the Waste Container 2
Warning
Warning

7-138 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Drawers

flashing.
4 Remove waste bag from the waste container. Dispose of the waste bag according to your
Important
level.
B78799AM 7-139
Error Recovery
Drawers
7-140 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Rack Builder Analyzers
7 Close the drawer.

• DxA.MD009
• DxA.MD010
• DxA.PG012
• DxA.PG013
General Events
Analyzer Error During Input
Warning

B78799AM 7-141
Error Recovery
Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
2 Inspect the input support lane within the analyzer.

consumables levels.
4 If there is an analyzer rack on the rack transfer unit, remove the rack and place it in an
empty buffer position.
5 Confirm that there are no racks in the input or output lanes.

Move any stranded racks to an empty position in the buffer area.
6 Confirm that all racks in the buffer area are correctly seated and in the correct
orientation.

7-142 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery

• DxA.RB038
Analyzer Not Ready to Process Samples
Warning
(RBU).
Confirm that the analyzer is turned on, operational, and in automation mode. Check the
consumables levels.

• DxA.DT014
• DxA.RB036
Excess Racks
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
2 Remove excess empty analyzer racks from the buffer area.

The number of excess racks is indicated in the Description on the System page.
B78799AM 7-143
Error Recovery


• DxA.RB010
Insufficient Racks
Warning
(RBU).
Place empty racks into the vacant lanes in the buffer. The number of racks to add is
displayed in the Description on the System page.

• DxA.RB012
Missing Racks
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
7-144 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Caution
from the magnets.
2 Place empty racks into the vacant lanes in the buffer.

orientation.


• DxA.RB011
Rack Handling Motion Error 3
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
2 Inspect the inside of the module.

B78799AM 7-145
Error Recovery


• DxA.RB041
Rack Handling Error 5
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
2 Inspect the belt.


• DxA.RB007
• DxA.RB009
7-146 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Rack Not Positioned Correctly
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
orientation.


• DxA.RB002
Rack Handling Error During Initialization
Warning
B78799AM 7-147
Error Recovery
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.


• DxA.RB004
Unknown Rack in Rack Transfer Unit
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
7-148 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Caution
from the magnets.
2 If there is an analyzer rack on the rack transfer unit, remove the rack. Place the rack in
an empty buffer lane.
3 Remove any tubes that are in the buffer rack. Place these tubes on an input rack. To
reprocess the sample tubes on the DxA system, introduce the samples in the input
module. Refer to Fill and Load Racks.


• DxA.RB015
AU5800 Events
Analyzer Error During Output
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
B78799AM 7-149
Error Recovery
Caution
from the magnets.
2 Inspect the output support lane within the analyzer.

consumables levels.

orientation.


• DxA.RB039
Analyzer Reported an Error
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
7-150 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
consumables levels.

orientation.


• DxA.RB040
Axis Motion Failure
Warning

Warning
B78799AM 7-151
Error Recovery
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
2 Confirm that there are no stranded racks in the input or output lanes. Move any
stranded racks to an empty position in the buffer area.
orientation.

5 If present in the system, inspect the rack pusher for any obstructions.
6 Inspect the belt and remove any obstructions.

• DxA.RB037
Rack Pusher Error 2
Warning
7-152 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
2 Inspect the rack pusher.


• DxA.RB016
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
B78799AM 7-153
Error Recovery
Caution
from the magnets.
2 Confirm that there are no analyzer racks on the rack transfer unit.
Move any analyzer racks to a vacant buffer lane.

orientation.


• DxA.RB001
• DxA.RB003
• DxA.RB021
• DxA.RB022
• DxA.RB024
• DxA.RB025
• DxA.RB026
• DxA.RB027
• DxA.RB047
Warning

7-154 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
orientation.


• DxA.RB042
• DxA.RB019
Warning

B78799AM 7-155
Error Recovery
Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
orientation.


• DxA.RB023
Warning

7-156 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
orientation.

6 Inspect the module components for sample spills. Clean if necessary.

• DxA.RB020
• DxA.RB028
B78799AM 7-157
Error Recovery
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.


• DxA.RB017
Warning

7-158 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
orientation.


• DxA.RB018
• DxA.RB030
• DxA.RB031
• DxA.RB046
• DxA.RB048
B78799AM 7-159
Error Recovery
Rack Identification Error
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
2 Remove the rack from the analyzer output lane. Remove the rack and all sample tubes
inside the rack from the system. Move the sample tubes to an input rack to be
reintroduced to the input module.
Note
Do not continue to use this analyzer rack on the system.

orientation.
7-160 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery


• DxA.RB034
Unexpected Rack in the Buffer Lane
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
2 Empty the rack from the buffer lane specified in the Description on the System page.
Note
If the rack is already empty, the rack sensor might be defective.
B78799AM 7-161
Error Recovery
orientation.


• DxA.RB033
Unknown or Unexpected Rack
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
The rack identified in the Description is not a known automation rack.
2 Remove the rack from the rack transfer unit. Remove the rack and all associated tubes
from the system.

7-162 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
orientation.


• DxA.RB029
Bar Code Reader Communication Failure
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
B78799AM 7-163
Error Recovery


• DxA.RB013
Duplicate Bar Code Label of the Rack
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
2 Remove the rack from the rack transfer unit.

a. This rack and all tubes associated with it must be removed from the system.
b. Remove any tubes found in the rack from the system, and place them in the input
module for further processing.
7-164 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery


• DxA.RB043
Rack Builder General Processing Error
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
orientation.

4 If present in the system, inspect the rack pusher for any obstructions.
6 If there is a rack on the rack transfer unit, remove the rack and place it in an empty
buffer position.
B78799AM 7-165
Error Recovery



• DxA.RB032
Rack Handler Communication Failure
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
orientation.

7-166 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery


• DxA.RB035
Rack Pusher Not in Home Position
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
2 If the analyzer needs to be reinitialized, confirm that the rack pusher is retracted.
consumables levels.

B78799AM 7-167
Error Recovery


• DxA.RB045
Unreadable Rack Bar Code Label
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.

a. Inspect the bar code label for any damage, and replace if necessary.
b. Remove any tubes that are on the rack. Place these tube on an input rack. To
4 Inspect the belt.

7-168 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery


• DxA.RB014
DxH 900 Events
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
B78799AM 7-169
Error Recovery
3 Confirm that there are no stranded racks in the input or output lanes.
— Input lane: Carefully push any stranded racks from the input lane to the analyzer,
into the correct position shown in the figure.
Note
Do not push the rack beyond the DxH 900 sensor. If you push the rack too far,
the analyzer does not detect the rack.
Figure 395 Moving Stranded Rack from the Input Lane to the Analyzer
1. Stranded rack position 2. Carefully pushing the

between the input lane and stranded rack to the correct
the DxH 900 analyzer position
3. Correct position for the rack
— Output lane: Move any stranded racks from the output lane to the buffer area.
orientation.
7-170 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery


• DxA.RB049
• DxA.RB059
• DxA.RB068
• DxA.RB070
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
B78799AM 7-171
Error Recovery
Note

orientation.

7-172 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery

• DxA.RB055
• DxA.RB056
• DxA.RB069
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
Note
B78799AM 7-173
Error Recovery

orientation.


• DxA.RB051
• DxA.RB054
7-174 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
2 Remove the rack from the analyzer output lane. Remove the rack and all sample tubes
from the system. Move the sample tubes to an input rack to be reintroduced to the input
module.
Note
Do not continue to use this analyzer rack on the system.
Note
B78799AM 7-175
Error Recovery

orientation.


• DxA.RB062
• DxA.RB063
7-176 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
2 Inspect the output support lane within the analyzer.

consumables levels.
Note
B78799AM 7-177
Error Recovery

orientation.


• DxA.RB065
• DxA.RB066
7-178 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
Note
B78799AM 7-179
Error Recovery

orientation.

7-180 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
• DxA.RB053
• DxA.RB057
• DxA.RB073
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
Note
B78799AM 7-181
Error Recovery

3 The rack transfer unit failed to move a rack to the buffer area. Manually push the rack
into the open position directly in front of the rack transfer unit.
orientation.

7-182 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery

• DxA.RB052
Unexpected Rack in a Buffer Lane
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
2 Empty the rack from the buffer lane specified in the Description on the System page.
Note
If the rack is already empty, the rack sensor might be defective.
B78799AM 7-183
Error Recovery
Note

orientation.

7-184 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery

• DxA.RB061
Unknown or Unexpected Rack 2
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
The rack identified in the Description is not a known automation rack.
2 Remove the rack from the rack transfer unit. Remove the rack and all associated tubes
from the system.
Note
B78799AM 7-185
Error Recovery

orientation.

7-186 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery

• DxA.RB058
Duplicate Bar Code Label of the Rack 2
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.

a. This rack and all tubes associated with it must be removed from the system.
b. Remove any tubes found in the rack from the system, and place them in the input
module for further processing.
Note
B78799AM 7-187
Error Recovery


7-188 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery

• DxA.RB067
Unreadable Rack Bar Code Label 2
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
Note
B78799AM 7-189
Error Recovery


a. Inspect the bar code label for any damage, and replace if necessary.
b. Remove any tubes that are on the rack. Place these tube on an input rack. To
7-190 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery

• DxA.RB050
Rack Builder General Processing Error 2
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
2 If there is a rack on the rack transfer unit, remove the rack and place it in an empty
buffer position.
Note
B78799AM 7-191
Error Recovery

orientation.


• DxA.RB060
• DxA.RB064
7-192 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Rack in Analyzer Timeout
Warning

Warning
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
If there are any stranded automation racks at the manual output tray of the analyzer,
move them to an empty position in the buffer area.

• DxA.RB071
Rack in Analyzer Timeout 2
Warning

Warning
B78799AM 7-193
Error Recovery
(RBU).
Warning
Caution
from the magnets.
If there are any stranded automation racks at the manual output tray of the analyzer, do
the following:
• If the rack builder module is running and the analyzer was not restarted during
rack processing, move the automation racks to the manual input tray of the
analyzer.
• Otherwise, move the automation racks back to the buffer area.

• DxA.RB072
STA R Max Events
Axis Motion Failure 3
1 Select Unlock Module Covers. Open the module cover.
2 Confirm that there are no stranded racks in the input-output lane. Move any stranded
racks to an empty position in the buffer area.
orientation.
4 Inspect the work area for any obstructions.


7-194 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Recapper
• DxA.RB074
• DxA.RB075
1 Select Unlock Module Covers. Open the module cover.
2 Confirm that there is no analyzer rack in the rack transfer unit. Move the analyzer rack
to an empty position in the buffer area.
3 Confirm that there are no stranded racks in the input-output lane. Move any stranded
racks to an empty position in the buffer area.
orientation.
5 Inspect the work area for any obstructions.


• DxA.RB076
Recapper
Tube Shield Missing
Warning
Warning

2 Open the rear cover.
B78799AM 7-195
Error Recovery
Recapper

4 Inspect the tube clamps. Refer to Clean and Inspect the Tube Clamps.
5 Confirm that the tube clamps are operating reliably.
6 Confirm that the tube is seated firmly in the tube clamps.

• DxA.DE034
• DxA.RE066
Cap Error 1
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
7-196 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Recapper


• DxA.DE001
• DxA.DE035
• DxA.RE049
• DxA.RE070
• DxA.RE071
• DxA.DE043
Cap Error 2
Warning
Warning

B78799AM 7-197
Error Recovery
Recapper
Caution
from the magnets.



• DxA.DE014
• DxA.RE018
7-198 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Recapper
Cap Error 3
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.


B78799AM 7-199
Error Recovery
Recapper


• DxA.RE051
Cap Gripper Axis Motion or Initialization Error
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

7-200 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Recapper

Note


• DxA.DE004
• DxA.DE011
Cap Gripper Error 1
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
B78799AM 7-201
Error Recovery
Recapper


• DxA.DE002
• DxA.DE012
• DxA.RE022
• DxA.RE026
• DxA.RE028
• DxA.RE072
Cap Gripper Error 2
Warning
7-202 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Recapper
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
any obstructions.


B78799AM 7-203
Error Recovery
Recapper
• DxA.DE006
• DxA.DE008
• DxA.DE019
• DxA.RE008
• DxA.RE010
Cap Gripper Error 3
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

7-204 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Recapper


• DxA.RE001
• DxA.RE002
• DxA.RE003
• DxA.RE004
Cap Gripper Error 6
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
any obstructions.
B78799AM 7-205
Error Recovery
Recapper


• DxA.RE023
Cap Gripper Initialization Error
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
7-206 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Recapper



• DxA.RE006
• DxA.RE027
Warning
B78799AM 7-207
Error Recovery
Recapper
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.


6 Confirm that the cap is seated firmly on the tube at the recapper.
7-208 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Recapper

• DxA.RE030
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.


B78799AM 7-209
Error Recovery
Recapper


• DxA.RE031
Cap Gripping or Initialization Error - Inspect the Gripper Movement
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
7-210 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Recapper


• DxA.DE021
• DxA.RE016
• DxA.RE005
Error with the Tube Clamp
Warning
Warning

B78799AM 7-211
Error Recovery
Recapper
Caution
from the magnets.
Note
For this task you need to open the rear cover.

4 Confirm that the tube clamps and their shield are correctly assembled. Refer to the
chapter Clean and Inspect the Tube Clamps.
5 Confirm that the tube is correctly seated in the tube clamp.


• DxA.DE038
• DxA.RE024
Failure to Grip a Cap
Warning
Warning

7-212 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Recapper
Caution
from the magnets.


7 Remove any caps in the nest of the recapper, and dispose of them.
B78799AM 7-213
Error Recovery
Recapper

• DxA.RE021
Gripper or Initialization Error - Inspect the Gripper
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.


7-214 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Recapper


• DxA.DE015
• DxA.DE020
• DxA.RE012
• DxA.RE015
Gripper or Initialization Error - Inspect the Rotation Axis
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
B78799AM 7-215
Error Recovery
Recapper


• DxA.RE007
• DxA.RE017
• DxA.DE005
• DxA.DE022
Oversized Cap or Cap Delay
Warning
Warning

7-216 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Recapper
Caution
from the magnets.

• DxA.RE020
• DxA.RE045
Push Cap Drawer Overfilled
You cannot open the push cap drawer because there are too many caps in the push cap
drawer. This error alert will disappear once enough caps have been used.

• DxA.RE046
Push Cap Feeder Error 1
Warning
Warning

B78799AM 7-217
Error Recovery
Recapper
Caution
from the magnets.
2 Open the lid of the push cap feeder funnel.

3 Clear all caps from the funnel and remove any stuck caps from the belts.
4 Inspect the belts for damage.
6 Close the lid of the push cap feeder funnel.

• DxA.RE033
• DxA.RE042
• DxA.RE052
• DxA.RE053
Warning
Warning

7-218 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Recapper
Caution
from the magnets.

3 Clear all caps from the funnel and remove any stuck caps from the belts.
4 Inspect the belts for damage.
6 Inspect the cap rotator. Remove any caps from the cap rotator.
7 Dispose of any damaged caps.

• DxA.RE034
• DxA.RE054
• DxA.RE059
• DxA.RE060
• DxA.RE062
• DxA.RE063
• DxA.RE068
Warning
B78799AM 7-219
Error Recovery
Recapper
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

3 Inspect the cap rotator. Remove any caps from the cap rotator.
4 Dispose of any damaged caps.

• DxA.RE035
• DxA.RE036
• DxA.RE037
• DxA.RE038
• DxA.RE039
• DxA.RE040
• DxA.RE043
• DxA.RE044
• DxA.RE055
• DxA.RE056
• DxA.RE057
• DxA.RE058
7-220 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Recapper
Recapper Error Cap is Missing
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

• DxA.RE019
• DxA.RE047
• DxA.RE048
Recapper Axis Motion Failure 1
Warning
B78799AM 7-221
Error Recovery
Recapper
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.


7-222 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Recapper

• DxA.RE029
Recapping Not Confirmed
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.


B78799AM 7-223
Error Recovery
Recapper


• DxA.RE025
Refill Push Cap Drawer
Refill the push cap drawer. Refer to Refill the push cap drawer.

• DxA.RE041
• DxA.RE061
Tube Clamp Tight Grip Error
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
Note
For this task, open the rear cover.

7-224 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Storage

4 If there is a tube in the gripper or in the position beneath the gripper, remove it. Mark
the tube as removed on the system.
5 If the cap is not connected to the tube, remove the cap.

6 If a cap was dropped or lost, locate the cap on the system.

• DxA.RE075
• DxA.DE042
Storage
Configuration Mismatch
The values for unit type, column number and row number in the storage module do not
match the system configuration.

• DxA.S023
Close the Storage Doors
Note
If this Event occurs and all storage module doors are closed, the storage module
hardware might need service maintenance.
Close all storage module doors.

• DxA.S024
• DxA.S025
• DxA.S026
B78799AM 7-225
Error Recovery
Storage
Storage Rack Error
Warning
Warning


2 Inspect the shelves of the storage module for flashing LEDs:
• Slow flashing LEDs indicate expired racks. Move the expired racks to offline
storage.
• Fast flashing LEDs indicate error racks. Move the sample tubes from the error rack
to an input rack.
Note
To reprocess the sample tubes on the DxA system, introduce the samples in the
input module. Refer to Fill and Load Racks.
3 Place new empty racks onto the shelves of the storage module. Do not use the same
racks in the same shelf positions.
Warning
the shelf.

• DxA.S008
• DxA.S020
• DxA.S021
• DxA.S031
• DxA.S034
• DxA.S042
• DxA.PG005
7-226 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Storage
Storage Doors are Open
1 Close all storage module doors.


• DxA.S007
Close the Storage Doors and Initialize
Note
If this Event occurs and all storage module doors are closed, the storage module
hardware might need service maintenance.


• DxA.S028
• DxA.S029
• DxA.S030
• DxA.S036
• DxA.S037
Critical Storage Temperature
1 Confirm that the doors of the storage module are closed.

2 Monitor the temperature of the storage module.
3 If the temperature remains out of range, contact your local Beckman Coulter Service
Representative.
B78799AM 7-227
Error Recovery
Storage

• DxA.S017
Storage Robot Failure
The storage module robot stopped moving. No action required.

• DxA.S004
No Rack Information
Do not manually remove any storage racks.

• DxA.S013
PCL Communication Error

• DxA.S033
Rack Detection Error
Warning
Warning

7-228 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Storage
2 Remove the rack from the error lane, if present.

The affected storage rack lane is displayed in the Description on the System page.


• DxA.S039
• DxA.S040
Rack Inserted Too Deep
Warning
Warning


2 Correct the alignment of any racks that are not positioned correctly.

• DxA.S009
Storage Rack Stuck in the ECSD

There is a storage rack stuck inside the ECSD on the conveyor.
1 Contact your local Beckman Coulter Service Representative to manually remove the
rack from the conveyor in the ECSD.
B78799AM 7-229
Error Recovery
Storage

• DxA.S050
• DxA.S053
Storage Module Pump Failure

The Description on the System page indicates which storage module pump is affected.
1 Monitor temperature changes in the storage module.

2 If the issue persists, the refrigerator pump requires maintenance or replacement.

•
• DxA.S027
• DxA.S019
ECSD Refrigeration Unit Error

Refrigeration unit needs maintenance or replacement.
1 Contact your Beckman Coulter Representative.

2 Monitor the ECSD temperature carefully to ensure sample integrity.

• DxA.S054
• DxA.S055
Communication to the ECSD Refrigeration Unit Failed
1 Turn off the storage module using the power switch on the bottom right.
2 Wait until all indicator lamps are off, then one additional minute.
3 Turn on the storage module.
4 Wait until all indicator lamps are on.
7-230 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Storage

• DxA.S056
• DxA.S057
Replace Indicator Board

The Description on the System page indicates the location of the affected indicator board.
1 The component requires maintenance or replacement.


• DxA.S012
• DxA.S035
RFID Reading Error
Warning
Warning


2 Inspect the shelves of the storage module for flashing LEDs:
• Slow flashing LEDs indicate expired racks. Move the expired racks to offline
storage.
• Fast flashing LEDs indicate error racks. Move the sample tubes from the error rack
to an input rack.
Note
To reprocess the sample tubes on the DxA system, introduce the samples in the
input module. Refer to Fill and Load Racks.
3 Before reusing the indicated error racks, confirm that the RFID tags of the error racks
are not missing or damaged.
B78799AM 7-231
Error Recovery
Storage
4 Place new empty racks onto the shelves of the storage module. Do not use the same
racks in the same shelf positions.
Warning
the shelf.

• DxA.S010
Sample Tube Processing Error

This is an intermittent alert that notifies you that there is a sample tube processing error.
The system is collecting information about the error.
Wait for the system to collect information and display the alert and its recovery steps.

• DxA.S048
Storage Module Communication Failure
1 Confirm all required cables are connected to the module.

If the issue persists, continue with the following steps.
3 Turn off the storage module.

4 Wait for 90 seconds, until all indicator lamps are off.

• DxA.S003
• DxA.S044
7-232 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Storage
Storage Module Failure
1 Turn off the storage module using the power switch on the bottom right.
2 Wait until all indicator lamps are off, then one additional minute.

• DxA.S001
• DxA.S043
Storage Module Power Loss or Uninterruptible Power Supply Failure
1 Confirm that the power supply of the environmentally controlled storage device (ECSD)
is functioning.

• DxA.S049
Storage Rack Builder Unit Full
Warning
Warning

B78799AM 7-233
Error Recovery
Storage
2 Remove a rack from the storage rack builder unit (SRBU). Move the sample tubes from
the storage rack to an input rack. To reprocess the sample tubes on the DxA system,
introduce the samples in the input module. Refer to Fill and Load Racks.


• DxA.S051
Temperature Error

• DxA.S047
• DxA.S011
Backup Power Supply Activated
Confirm that the power supply of the environmentally controlled storage device (ECSD)
is functioning.

• DxA.S018
Tube Positioning Error
Warning
7-234 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Transport
Warning

The Description on the System page indicates which storage rack is affected.
2 Confirm that all sample tubes in the rack of the storage rack builder unit (SRBU) are
positioned correctly. Confirm that no sample tubes exceed the maximum height limit for
storage.
3 If the issue persists, remove the rack from the system. Move the sample tubes from the
storage rack to an input rack. To reprocess the sample tubes on the DxA system,
introduce the samples in the input module. Refer to Fill and Load Racks.


• DxA.S006
Transport
Sample Carrier Stopper Error
Warning
Warning

The sample carrier stoppers are located at the tube clamps on the transport segments.
B78799AM 7-235
Error Recovery
Transport
Figure 424 Sample Carrier Stopper Located at the Tube Clamp
Figure 425 Sample Carrier Stopper and Sensors Shown at the Tube Clamp
1. Tube clamp shield presence sensor 4. Sample carrier main-stop

2. Tube clamp arms 5. Sample carrier pre-stop
3. Sample carrier exit sensor 6. Sample carrier pre-stop presence sensor
1 On the system console Home screen, identify the transport segment which is in error
state.
The transport segments are all numbered on the system console Home screen. The
transport segment reporting the error is shown in red. Make a note of the location of
7-236 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Transport
that transport segment (for example, the transport segment in front of the first DTS
analyzer or remember the transport segment number shown on the screen and count
from the first segment).
2 Go to the affected transport segment connected to the module.

Note
If the error is located in front of a module, you need to unlock the module cover.
4 Inspect the tube clamps, tube locators or sample carrier stoppers on the transport
segment for any defects or obstructions.

6 If there is a sample carrier located at the sample carrier stopper, move the sample
carrier past the exit sensor.
Figure 426 Sample Carrier Moved Past the Exit Sensors
1. Sample carrier moved past the exit sensor

2. Exit sensor


• DxA.T012
• DxA.T020
• DxA.T022
• DxA.T023
• DxA.T026
• DxA.T036
B78799AM 7-237
Error Recovery
Transport
Transport Diverter Error
Warning
Warning

Some of the possible reasons why the diverter error occurs on DxA are:
• something is blocking the diverter from proper functioning
• sample carrier is blocking a sensor
• sample carrier is stuck at a diverter
• too many sample carriers queuing at a diverter may result in a diverter being unable to
initialize as the diverter has too much force on it to function properly. Be aware of long
queues in front of the diverters. It is not recommended to have more than 17 sample
carriers waiting at a diverter but you can have up to 25 sample carriers on a long
transport with 2 diverters.
Figure 427 Highlighted Sample Carrier Blocking the Sensor and Diverter as The Queue is
Too Long
state.
2 Go to the affected transport segment.
7-238 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Transport
Note
If the error is located on a track connected to a module, you need to unlock the
module cover.
4 Inspect the diverters on the track segment for any obstructions.

6 If there is a sample carrier, move the sample carrier through the diverter past the exit
sensor on the travel lane, in order to clear the processing lane of sample carriers.
Figure 428 Sample Carrier Moved Past the Exit Sensor
The arrows in the image above indicate the direction of travel for the transport lanes.
1. Process lanes 4. Exit sensor of the diverter

2. Travel lanes 5. Diverters
3. Sample carrier moved past the
diverter
B78799AM 7-239
Error Recovery
Transport
Figure 429 Acceptable Clearance for Sample Carriers from the Sensors
7 If there is a sample carrier that cannot be moved past the exit sensor because of a full
queue on a transport lane:
a. Remove the sample tube from the sample carrier.
b. Remove the sample carrier from the transport lane.
c. Mark the sample tube as removed from the system.


• DxA.T005
• DxA.T006
• DxA.T015
• DxA.T019
• DxA.T025
• DxA.T027
• DxA.T033
• DxA.T034
• DxA.T035
• DxA.T037
• DxA.T038
• DxA.T039
• DxA.T040
7-240 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Transport
Transport Lane Motion Error
Warning
Warning

state.
2 Go to the affected transport segment.

4 Inspect the transport lanes and track for any obstructions that might affect motion.
B78799AM 7-241
Error Recovery
Transport
6 Inspect the transport for any sample carriers present in the diverters or sample carrier
stoppers and move them past the exit sensor on the travel lane.
Figure 430 Sample Carrier Moved Past the Exit Sensor
1. Process lanes Note

2. Travel lanes
3. Sample carrier moved past the The arrows in the image
diverter above indicate the direction
4. Exit sensor of the diverter of travel for the transport
5. Diverters lanes.
7-242 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Transport
Figure 431 Sample Carrier Moved Past the Exit Sensors
1. Sample carrier moved past the exit sensor

2. Exit sensor

9 If the problem persists, contact your Beckman Coulter Service Representative.

• DxA.T014
• DxA.T032
Unexpected Sample Tube or Other Object Detected Inside Sample Carrier

The tube presence sensor has detected that there is an object in the sample carrier that
does not belong there.
The possible reasons are:

• the user placed a sample tube directly in the sample carrier instead of going via input
region (this tube will be removed and placed in the SIQ region)
• a hair or small object is on the sample carrier and the tube presence sensor mistakes it
for a sample tube in the sample carrier (this will cause another error on the system
when the robot tried to grip the sample tube from the carrier, but there is no sample
tube present)
• tube presence sensor is not clean
• sample carrier is not clean
1 Unlock the module covers.

2 Go to the back of the module.
3 Open the back cover of the module.
B78799AM 7-243
Error Recovery
Tube Robots
4 Check to see if there is something inside the sample carrier (object causing the system
to think there should be a tube there) and remove the object. If you do not find anything
on the carrier, remove the carrier from the system. Refer to Inspect Sample Carriers at
Transport Exit Lanes and Clear Defect Ones on how to remove sample tubes.
5 Close the back cover.

6 If the problem persists, contact your Beckman Coulter Service Representative.

• DxA.T041
• DxA.T042
• DxA.T043
RFID Not Readable on Sample Carrier

When the system cannot read an RFID tag, it sends the sample carrier to the exit lane.
When only one or two are at the exit lane, this is an indication that the RFID tag is broken or
missing.
However, if there are many sample carriers at the exit lane, it could be that the RFID sensor
on the track is faulty.
If the problem persists, contact your Beckman Coulter Service Representative.

• DxA.T044
• DxA.T045
• DxA.T046
Tube Robots
Liquid Level Detection Error
Warning

7-244 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Tube Robots
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

3 If a sample tube is in the gripper, remove it.
removed.
5 Clean the liquid level detection component lenses. Refer to Inspect and Clean the Liquid
Level Detection Component.
6 Confirm that no external light is getting to the liquid level detection component.
Important
sunlight.

B78799AM 7-245
Error Recovery
Tube Robots

• DxA.MR056
• DxA.MR058
• DxA.MR059
• DxA.MR062
• DxA.MR065
• DxA.MR064
• DxA.MR087
• DxA.MR088
Tube Inspection Unit Error
Warning

Warning
Caution
from the magnets.

3 If there is a tube, remove it.
Note
Sample Search.
7-246 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Tube Robots
removed.
5 Clean the tube inspection unit camera.


• DxA.MU001
• DxA.MU005
• DxA.MU007
• DxA.MU009
• DxA.MU010
• DxA.MU011
• DxA.MU012
• DxA.MU013
• DxA.MU014
Tube Inspection Unit Needs Service

The tube inspection unit needs service.

• DxA.MU002
• DxA.MU003
• DxA.MU004
• DxA.MU006
• DxA.MU008
• DxA.MU015
• DxA.MU016
Counterbalance Rope Is Broken
1 The axis needs repairing. Contact your local Beckman Coulter Service Representative.
B78799AM 7-247
Error Recovery
Tube Robots

• DxA.MR085
• DxA.DE041
• DxA.RE073
Inspect the Motion of the Tube Robot
Warning

Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
any obstructions.

7-248 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Tube Robots
• DxA.C040
• DxA.C041
• DxA.C050
• DxA.C061
• DxA.C063
• DxA.C101
• DxA.DE007
• DxA.DE009
• DxA.DE018
• DxA.MR017
• DxA.MR019
• DxA.RB005
• DxA.RB006
• DxA.RE009
• DxA.RE011
• DxA.RE014
Inspect Motion of the Tube Robot 2
Warning

Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
B78799AM 7-249
Error Recovery
Tube Robots
any obstructions.


• DxA.MR066
Liquid Level Detection Communication Error
The liquid level detection firmware needs to be updated.

• DxA.MR083
Tube Inspection Unit Error - Inspect Gripper
Warning

Warning
7-250 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Tube Robots
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

Note


• DxA.MR035
Tube Fill Level Exceeded
Warning

B78799AM 7-251
Error Recovery
Tube Robots
Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

4 If a sample tube is in the gripper or beneath the gripper, remove it.

Note
Sample Search.
7-252 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Tube Robots
removed.


• DxA.MR081
Tube Gripping Error 1
Warning

Warning
Warning

Caution
B78799AM 7-253
Error Recovery
Tube Robots
from the magnets.

Note
Sample Search.
removed.

7-254 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Tube Robots

• DxA.MR033
Warning

Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

Note
Sample Search.
B78799AM 7-255
Error Recovery
Tube Robots
removed.

Note


• DxA.MR034
Warning

Warning
7-256 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Tube Robots
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

Note
Sample Search.
removed.
B78799AM 7-257
Error Recovery
Tube Robots


• DxA.MR038
• DxA.MR047
• DxA.MR048
• DxA.MR050
• DxA.MR070
Tube Placement Error - Unknown Tube State
Warning

Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.
7-258 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Tube Robots

Note
Sample Search.
removed.

8 Inspect the top mirror for damage. If the mirror is damaged, contact your local Beckman
Coulter Service Representative.

B78799AM 7-259
Error Recovery
Tube Robots

• DxA.MR037
Tube Placement Error with Tube in Gripper 1
Warning

Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

Note
Sample Search.
7-260 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Tube Robots
removed.

9 Inspect the top mirror for damage. If the mirror is damaged, contact your local Beckman
Coulter Service Representative.


• DxA.MR021
• DxA.MR024
• DxA.MR032
B78799AM 7-261
Error Recovery
Tube Robots
Tube Placement Error with Tube in Gripper 2
Warning

Warning
Warning

Caution
from the magnets.

Note
Sample Search.
removed.
7-262 B78799AM
7
Error Recovery
Tube Robots

Note


• DxA.MR022
B78799AM 7-263
Error Recovery
Tube Robots
7-264 B78799AM
CHAPTER 8
Specifications
DxA System Specifications
This section summarizes DxA 5000 information such as size, required clearances, power
requirements, and temperature requirements. For additional information on other
configurations, contact your Beckman Coulter representative.
Installation
• Before installing the system, refer to the System Specifications for the installation
requirements.
• A Beckman Coulter Field Service Engineer must be present when the system is
removed from the shipping crates.
• A qualified Beckman Coulter Field Service Engineer must install the system. If the
system must be relocated, contact Beckman Coulter Customer Support.
• A Beckman Coulter Field Service Engineer performs the applicable system verification
for your DxA 5000 system.
Placement
The floor surface upon which the system rests should be free from vibration.
Warning
Risk of incorrect results. Do not expose the system to direct sunlight or severe drafts.
Environmental Requirements
Table 17 Temperature and Humidity
Specification Requirement
Temperature 16°C to 32°C (with connected ECSD: 16°C to 27°C)
Air quality Laboratory environment standard
Humidity 20% to 80% relative humidity (RH) non-condensing
Operational 0 lux to 10,000 lux

lighting
Operational 0 m to 2,000 m above sea level

altitude
B78799AM 8-1
Specifications
Recommended Clearances
The table below indicates the minimum recommended clearances around the DxA
modules.
Table 18 Physical Clearances for Installation: Minimum Recommended Distance
Location Dimensions
Front 120 cm 47.2 in
Back 100 cm 39.4 in
Sides 60 cm 23.6 in
Required Clearances
The table below indicates the minimum required clearances around the DxA modules.
Table 19 Physical Clearances for Installation: Minimum Required Distance
Location Dimensions
Front side of a module 120 cm 47.2 in
Back side of a module 65 cm 25.6 in
Back of the track 80 cm (see the note below) 31.5 in
Side of the track 60 cm 23.6 in
Side of the RBU 60 cm 23.6 in
Front side of the ECSD 60 cm 23.6 in
Right side of the ECSD 80 cm 31.5 in
(for the entire height of
the ECSD)
Note
A distance of 65 cm is acceptable if there is only a transport system along the wall. If

there is a module, then the track must be 80cm from the wall, to allow space for the
opening of the module covers.
Figure 438 System Installation Layout
8-2 B78799AM
8
Specifications
Power Requirements
System power requirements:
• Alternating current: 200 VAC to 240 VAC, the server cabinet supports 120 VAC to 240
VAC
• Frequency: 50 Hz or 60 - installation category 2
Table 20 Module Power Requirements
Module Electricity
Voltage (V) Frequency (Hz) Current Rating (A)
Input module 200 to 240 50 or 60 5
Output module 200 to 240 50 or 60 5
Input output module 200 to 240 50 or 60 5
Single centrifuge 200 to 240 50 or 60 5

module (with one
centrifuge device)
Dual centrifuge module 200 to 240 50 or 60 5

(with two centrifuge
devices)
Centrifuge device 200 to 208 50 or 60 11.5
220 to 240 50 11.5
Rack builder 200 to 240 50 or 60 5
Small storage 200 to 240 50 or 60 12
Large storage 200 to 240 50 or 60 12
Server cabinet 200 to 240 50 or 60 <16
Transport 200 to 240 50 or 60 16
Dimensions and Weights

Table 21 Dimensions and Weights of the DxA 5000 System
Module or Dimensions
Component
Height Width Depth Weight
mm in mm in mm in kg lb
Input module 1,835 72.2 1,710 67.3 1,362 53.6 600 1,322.77
Output module 1,835 72.2 1,710 67.3 1,362 53.6 620 1,366.87
Output module with 1,835 72.2 1,710 67.3 1,362 53.6 640 1,410.96
storage rack builder
Input output module 1,835 72.2 1,710 67.3 1,362 53.6 580 1,278.68
B78799AM 8-3
Specifications
Performance Specifications
Table 21 Dimensions and Weights of the DxA 5000 System (Continued)

Module or Dimensions
Component
Height Width Depth Weight
mm in mm in mm in kg lb
Dual centrifuge 1,835 72.2 1,710 67.3 1,362 53.6 945 2,083.37
module
Single centrifuge 1,835 72.2 1,062 41.8 1,362 53.6 600 1,322.77
module
Rack builder 1,835 72.2 1,062 41.8 1,571 61.8 480 1,058.22
Small storage module 2,480 97.64 978 38.5 902 35.5 620 1,366.87
Large storage module 2,480 97.64 1,803 70.9 902 35.5 800 1,763.7
Server cabinet (with 1,050 41.3 730 28.7 800 31.4 220 485.0
monitor) (1,550) (61.0)
End caps 1,740 68.5 95 3.7 880 34.6 23 50.7
As the height of the modules is adjustable, the theoretical maximum height for any of the
modules is the given height + 50mm (2 in).
Service Life
The service life of the DxA system is a minimum of 10 years. For disposal of the system,
contact a Beckman Coulter Representative.
Performance Specifications
The DxA system has a throughput of up to 1200 tubes. The throughput is measured at the
system's input module and is a rounded value.
The DxA 5000 Fit system has a throughput of up to 375 tubes per hour (up to 325 tubes per
hour when connected to a single centrifuge).
When you use customized trays, the throughput is slightly reduced. The reduced
throughput depends on how many tubes are removed from a customized tray, as there is
one additional robot movement for each tube-removal action.
The system throughput will decrease while samples are retrieved from storage regions to
perform previously unavailable instructions or tests. For optimal scheduling, retrieved
samples may be routed through the distribution buffer of the input module before any
further processing.
User-replaceable Parts and Supplies

DxA system accessories: REMISOL Advance software
8-4 B78799AM
8
Specifications
Description Part Number

DxA system racks
6x6 rack C82384
6x14 rack C82385
Distribution region rack (6x14) C19900
Storage rack C82383
Rack builder analyzer racks
AU rack identifier labels (101-200) C12438
AU rack identifier labels (201-300) C12439
AU racks for DxA (pack of 10) C34497
DxH racks kit (pack of 20) B20473
STA R Max racks for DxA (pack of 10) C80752
DxA customized trays
A list of trays is available through your local supplier and your local Beckman Coulter Representative.
DxA system replaceable parts

Tube inspection unit top mirror C09942
Left tube clamp shield B63343
Right tube clamp shield B63344
Intermediate drip shield B67548
Decapper splash protection cover with upper B57017
waste chute
Decapper lower waste chute B85126
Storage rack builder upper waste chute B73263
Lantronix single port device server kit A84912
DxA system consumables
Bode Mikrobac® Tissues (outside the United C26867
States)
Clorox® Disinfecting Wipes (within the United C71022
States)
Box of 6 bags containing 1000 universal push C27703
caps each
Waste bags C62616
Centrifuge replaceable parts
Centrifuge adapter C82386
Centrifuge drawer filter B85476
B78799AM 8-5
Specifications
Description Part Number

Grease for load-bearing bolts C16647
Marine grease 974231
Silicone grease C16650
8-6 B78799AM
APPENDIX A
Open Source Software Notice
Any software or related services provided include the following third-party components
and are subject to the specified license agreement terms, using the software means
agreeing to the applicable Additional Terms for any such Identified Components.
Copyright © 2018 Beckman Coulter Inc. uses third-party software in the development and
operation of DxA. Use of this software is governed by the applicable license agreements.
The notices file containing a copy of all software licenses are specified and links provided in
the tables below. Any source code files for LGPL licensed libraries can be obtained from the
download link provided below.
B78799AM A-1
Table 23 Open Source Software Notice

No. Open Source Notice and Attributions # License Type, Link to License, and
Software, Notes
Package, or
Third Party
Library
1 JSON.NET 4.5.8,
Copyright © 2007 James Newton- MIT License
4.5.11, 6.0.8,
12.03 King
https://www.newtonsoft.com/json
https:// See License Link
www.newtonsof https://github.com/JamesNK/
t.com/json Newtonsoft.Json/blob/master/
LICENSE.md
A-2 B78799AM
A
Table 23 Open Source Software Notice (Continued)

Software, Notes
Package, or
Third Party
Library
2 Open XML SDK © 2013 Microsoft Corporation. All
MIT License
2.5 rights reserved.
https://github.com/OfficeDev/Open-
https://
XML-SDK/blob/master/LICENSE
github.com/
OfficeDev/
Open-XML-SDK
https://
msdn.microsoft
.com/en-us/
library/
bb448854(offic
e.14).aspx
https://
www.microsoft.
com/en-us/
download/
details.aspx?
id=30425
https://
social.msdn.mic
rosoft.com/
Forums/
office/en-US/
0ccd2532-
b934-456e-
aa3d-5241552b
18ef/microsoft-
sdk-for-open-
xml-formats-
can-we-
distribute-it-to-
our-customers?
forum=oxmlsdk
&forum=oxmlsd
k
3 PDFSharp 1.31
Copyright © 2005-2014 empira MIT License
Software GmbH, Troisdorf
(Germany) http://www.pdfsharp.net/
PDFsharp_License.ashx
B78799AM A-3

Software, Notes
Package, or
Third Party
Library
4 PetaPoco
Copyright © 2011-2011 Topten Apache License V2.0
Software
(contact@toptensoftware.com) https://github.com/
CollaboratingPlatypus/PetaPoco/
blob/development/LICENSE.txt
5 Wix Toolset © 2011 Microsoft Corporation. All
Microsoft Reciprocal License (MS-RL)
3.11.1 rights reserved.
http://wixtoolset.org/about/license
https://opensource.org/licenses/ms-
rl
6 JPEG Group 6b http://www.ijg.org/files/

This software is copyright ©
of 27-Mar-1998
http:// 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. License is in the Readme file
www.ijg.org contained in jpegsr6b.zip
7 lwIP, 1.2.0
Copyright © 2001-2004 Swedish BSD License
https://
savannah.nong Institute of Computer Science. All
rights reserved. http://lwip.wikia.com/wiki/License
nu.org/
projects/lwip
8 Open CV 2.0
License Agreement For Open Source 3-Clause BSD License
https:// Computer Vision Library (3-Clause
BSD License) https://opensource.org/licenses/
opencv.org/
BSD-3-Clause
9 Command Line
Copyright © 2005 - 2015 Giacomo MIT License
1.9.71.2
https:// Stelluti Scala & Contributors
https://github.com/
github.com/ commandlineparser/commandline/
gsscoder/ blob/master/License.md
commandline/
tree/
stable-1.9.71.2
A-4 B78799AM
A

Software, Notes
Package, or
Third Party
Library
10 CommonServic Copyright © Microsoft 2008
Microsoft Public License (MS-PL)
eLocator 1.0
https:// https://github.com/unitycontainer/
www.nuget.org
commonservicelocator/blob/master/
/packages/
LICENSE
CommonServic
eLocator/1.0.0 https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/
http:// library/dd203100.aspx
commonservice
locator.codeple
x.com/
11 EPPlus 4.0.4
Copyright © 2007 Free Software GNU Library General Public License
https://
www.nuget.org Foundation, Inc. (LGPL)
/packages/
Copyright 2009- ©Jan Källman. Parts https://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-
EPPlus/4.0.4
of the Interfacecomes from licenses/lgpl-2.1.en.html
http:// ExcelPackage-project
epplus.codeplex
.com/
12 EtherCAT Slave
ETHERCAT SLAVE STACK CODE ETHERCAT SLAVE STACK CODE
Stack Code
(SSC) version LICENSE LICENSE
5.11
Given by Beckhoff Automation http://www.beckhoff.com/forms/
https:// GmbH & Co. KG, Eiserstrasse 5, stack_code/
www.ethercat.o 33415 Verl, Germany EtherCAT_SSC_License_V1.1.pdf
rg/en/
products/
54FA3235E2964
3BC805BDD807
DF199DE.htm
B78799AM A-5

Software, Notes
Package, or
Third Party
Library
13 Hardcodet WPF
Copyright © 2013 Philipp Sumi The Code Project Open License
NotifyIcon 1.0.5
https:// (CPOL) 1.02
www.nuget.org https://www.codeproject.com/info/
/packages/ cpol10.aspx
SignedBuild-
Hardcodet.Notif
yIcon.Wpf/1.0.5
http://
www.hardcodet
.net/projects/
wpf-notifyicon
14 HtmlAgilityPack
Copyright © 2003-20012 Simon Microsoft Public License (Ms-PL)
1.4.9 https://
www.nuget.org Mourier <simon underscore mourier
at hotmail dot com> All rights MIT License
/packages/
HtmlAgilityPack reserved. https://github.com/zzzprojects/html-
/1.4.9 agility-pack/blob/master/LICENSE
http:// *Available under MIT and Ms-PL
htmlagilitypack.
codeplex.com/
15 ICSharpCode.Tr
Copyright © 1991, 1999 Free GNU Lesser General Public License
eeView 2.3.1
https:// Software Foundation, Inc. 2.1
github.com/ https://github.com/icsharpcode/
icsharpcode/ ILSpy/blob/2.3.1/SharpTreeView/
ILSpy/tree/ license.txt
2.3.1/
SharpTreeView
16 Log4Net 2.0.8
Copyright 2001-2006 The Apache Apache License V2.0
http://
logging.apache. Software Foundation. https://logging.apache.org/log4net/
org/log4net/ license.html
download_log4
net.cgi
17 Microsoft Code
CodeContracts MIT License
Contracts,
1.6.60505.10 Copyright © Microsoft Corporation https://github.com/Microsoft/
https:// CodeContracts/blob/master/
github.com/ All rights reserved. LICENSE.txt
Microsoft/
CodeContracts
A-6 B78799AM
A

Software, Notes
Package, or
Third Party
Library
18 Prism 4.1.0.0
Copyright © 2008-2012 Microsoft MS-PL
(nuget) https://
www.nuget.org Corporation. All rights reserved. https://opensource.org/licenses/MS-
/packages/
PL
Prism/4.1.0
http://compositewpf.codeplex.com/
http://
license
prism.codeplex.
com/ *Available under CC BY 3.0 License
and MS-PL
19 Microsoft Unity
Copyright © 2011,2012 Microsoft Microsoft Public License (Ms-PL)
3.0 https://
msdn.microsoft Corporation.
https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/
.com/en-us/ library/dd203100.aspx
Copyright © 2011 Microsoft
library/
Corporation.
dn170416.aspx
Microsoft Unity
2.1.505.2
20 Open DHCP
Copyright © 1989, 1991 Free GNU-GPL V2.0
Server
1.6.0https:// Software Foundation, Inc.
https://www.gnu.org/licenses/
sourceforge.net gpl-2.0.html
/projects/
dhcpserver/
21 Xceed.Wpf.Tool
Copyright © Xceed Software Inc. Microsoft Public License (Ms-PL)
kit 2.0.0
https:// 2010-2013
https://github.com/xceedsoftware/
github.com/ wpftoolkit/blob/master/license.md
xceedsoftware/
wpftoolkit
http://
wpftoolkit.code
plex.com/
22 Rabbit MQ .NET
Copyright can be found at main page Apache License V2.0
Client 5.0.1.0
link
Apache License V2
https://
github.com/ *Available under Apache License V2
rabbitmq/ and Mozilla Public License V1.1
rabbitmq-
dotnet-client
B78799AM A-7

Software, Notes
Package, or
Third Party
Library
23 Rabbit MQ
Copyright can be found at main page Mozilla Public License V1.1
Server 3.7.0
link
https://github.com/rabbitmq/
https://
rabbitmq-server/blob/master/
www.rabbitmq.
LICENSE
com
https://github.com/rabbitmq/
https://
rabbitmq-server/blob/master/
github.com/
LICENSE-MPL-RabbitMQ
rabbitmq/
rabbitmq- DISCLAIMER - Rabbit MQ Server is
server not distributed along with this
software and does not form a part of
this package. Rabbit MQ Server is
provided separately along with the
operating system CD and installed
separately.
24 Erlang OTP
Copyright can be found at main page Apache License V2.0
(Open Telecom
Platform) 20.1 link
https://github.com/erlang/otp/blob/
https:// master/LICENSE.txt
github.com/
erlang/otp
25 Microsoft® SQL
Copyright can be found at main page MICROSOFT SOFTWARE LICENSE
Server®
Compact 4.0 link TERMS
SP1
MICROSOFT SQL SERVER COMPACT
https:// 4.0 SERVICE PACK 1 (SP1)
www.microsoft.
Part of Installation directory:
com/en-us/
download/ EULA_ENU.rtf
details.aspx?
id=30709
A-8 B78799AM
A

Software, Notes
Package, or
Third Party
Library
26
NUnit Copyright © 2018 Charlie Poole, Rob MIT License
Framework3.0. Prouse
0-beta-2 https://raw.githubusercontent.com/
nunit/nunit/master/LICENSE.txt
https://
www.nuget.org http://nunit.org/nuget/nunit3-
/packages/ license.txt
NUnit/3.0.0-
beta-2
http://
nunit.org/
26a
NUnitTestAdapt Copyright © 2002-2004 James W. MIT License
er.WithFramew Newkirk, Michael C. Two, Alexei A.
ork 2.0.0 Vorontsov. https://raw.githubusercontent.com/
nunit/nunit/master/LICENSE.txt
https:// Copyright © 2000-2002 Philip Craig.
www.nuget.org All Rights Reserved. *Available under MIT License and
/packages/ Zlib License
NUnitTestAdapt
er.WithFramew
ork/2.0.0
http://
nunit.org/
index.php?
p=vsTestAdapte
r&r=2.6
27
Prism.Interactiv Copyright © 2008-2012 Microsoft Microsoft Public License (MS-PL)
ity.5.0.0 Corporation. All rights reserved.
https://opensource.org/licenses/MS-
https:// PL
www.nuget.org
/packages/ http://compositewpf.codeplex.com/
Prism.Interactiv license
ity/5.0.0 *Available under CC BY 3.0 License
http:// and MS-PL
prism.codeplex.
com/
B78799AM A-9

Software, Notes
Package, or
Third Party
Library
28
tablefilter0.4.13 Copyright © 2015 Max Guglielmi MIT License
https:// https://github.com/koalyptus/
github.com/ TableFilter/blob/master/LICENSE
koalyptus/
TableFilter
29
JetBrains.Annot Copyright 2007-2012 JetBrains s.r.o. Apache License V2.0
ations 2018.2.3
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
Part of LICENSE-2.0
ReSharper 7.1.3
(Source Code
Generation)
https://
www.nuget.org
/packages/
JetBrains.Annot
ations/
30
Caliburn.Micro. Copyright © 2010 Blue Spire MIT License
Core 2.0.1 Consulting, Inc.
https://raw.githubusercontent.com/
https:// Caliburn-Micro/Caliburn.Micro/
www.nuget.org master/License.txt
/packages/
Caliburn.Micro.
Core/2.0.1
http://
caliburnmicro.c
om/
A-10 B78799AM
A

Software, Notes
Package, or
Third Party
Library
31
MahApps.Metr Copyright © MahApps.Metro Microsoft Public License (MS-PL)
o 1.2.0 2011-2016
http://www.opensource.org/
https:// licenses/MS-PL
www.nuget.org
/packages/
MahApps.Metr
o/1.2.0.0
https://
github.com/
MahApps/
MahApps.Metr
o
32
SharpZipLib Copyright © 2000-2016 SharpZipLib MIT License
1.0.0-alpha2 Contributors
https://github.com/icsharpcode/
https:// SharpZipLib/blob/master/
www.nuget.org LICENSE.txt
/packages/
SharpZipLib/
1.0.0-alpha2
https://
github.com/
icsharpcode/
SharpZipLib
33
Ionic.Zip 1.9.1.8 Copyright © 2006 - 2011 Dino Chiesa Microsoft Public License (Ms-PL)
From Copyright © 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 https://

Dino Chiesa and Microsoft raw.githubusercontent.com/haf/
DotNetZip Corporation DotNetZip.Semverd/master/LICENSE
https://
archive.codeple
x.com/?
p=dotnetzip
B78799AM A-11

Software, Notes
Package, or
Third Party
Library
34
ToggleSwitch Copyright © Eric Jensen 2013 Microsoft Public License (Ms-PL)
1.1.1
http:// PL
toggleswitch.co
deplex.com/
35
Prism.UnityExte Copyright © 2008-2012 Microsoft MS-PL
nsions 4.1.0.0 Corporation. All rights reserved.
https:// PL
www.nuget.org
/packages/ http://compositewpf.codeplex.com/
Prism.UnityExte license
nsions/4.1.0 *Available under CC BY 3.0 License
http:// and MS-PL
prism.codeplex.
com/
36
NTP 4.2.8p15 Copyright © David L. Mills NTP Copyright Notice
1992-2005
https:// OpenSSL License and Copyright
www.meinberg Copyright © 1998-2003 The Notice
global.com/ OpenSSL Project
english/sw/ Original SSLeay License
ntp.htm#ntp_st Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com) Meinberg Installer for NTP on
able Windows Copyright Notice
Copyright © Meinberg Funkuhren
2005 See https://
www.meinbergglobal.com/
english/sw/readme-
ntpinstaller.htm#legal for details.
# Copyright and License notice are included as provided and not translated.
A-12 B78799AM
A
Open Source Software Licenses
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
Copyright © 2004-2017 Apache Software Foundation. All Rights Reserved.
1. Definition
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as
defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner
that is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that
control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the
purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause
the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii)
ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial
ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions
granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but
not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or
translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code,
generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made
available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or
attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is
based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations,
elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of
authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works
that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the
Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the
Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that
is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner
or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright
owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic,
B78799AM A-13
verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including

but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control
systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor
for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication
that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright
owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom
a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the
Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each
Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge,
royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of,
publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such
Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each
Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge,
royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have
made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such
license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are
necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their
Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You
institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in
a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work
constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted
to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is
filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative
Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object
form, provided that You meet the following conditions:
a. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this
License; and
b. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You
changed the files; and
c. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all
copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the
Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative
Works; and
d. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any
Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution
notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not
pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places:
within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the
Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or,
within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-
party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational
purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution
notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum
A-14 B78799AM
A
to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices
cannot be construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide
additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or
distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole,
provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with
the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution
intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under
the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions.
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any
separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such
Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names,
trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for
reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the
content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing,
Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS
IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or
implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-
INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You
are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing
the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this
License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including
negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as
deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be
liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or
consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the
use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of
goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other
commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the
possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative
Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support,
warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this
License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf
and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You
agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability
incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting
any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file
except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
B78799AM A-15
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the
License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing
permissions and limitations under the License.
BSD License
lwIP is licenced under the BSD licence:
Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Swedish Institute of Computer Science. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR `ÀS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The Code Project Open License (CPOL) 1.02

License
THE WORK (AS DEFINED BELOW) IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS CODE
PROJECT OPEN LICENSE ("LICENSE"). THE WORK IS PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT AND/OR
OTHER APPLICABLE LAW. ANY USE OF THE WORK OTHER THAN AS AUTHORIZED UNDER
THIS LICENSE OR COPYRIGHT LAW IS PROHIBITED.
BY EXERCISING ANY RIGHTS TO THE WORK PROVIDED HEREIN, YOU ACCEPT AND AGREE
TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. THE AUTHOR GRANTS YOU THE RIGHTS
CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONSIDERATION OF YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF SUCH TERMS AND
CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ACCEPT AND BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS
LICENSE, YOU CANNOT MAKE ANY USE OF THE WORK.
1. Definitions.
A-16 B78799AM
A
1. "Articles" means, collectively, all articles written by Author which describes how
the Source Code and Executable Files for the Work may be used by a user.
2. "Author" means the individual or entity that offers the Work under the terms of this
License.
3. "Derivative Work"means a work based upon the Work or upon the Work and other
pre-existing works.
4. "Executable Files" refer to the executables, binary files, configuration and any
required data files included in the Work.
5. "Publisher" means the provider of the website, magazine, CD-ROM, DVD or other
medium from or by which the Work is obtained by You.
6. "Source Code" refers to the collection of source code and configuration files used to
create the Executable Files.
7. "Standard Version" refers to such a Work if it has not been modified, or has been
modified in accordance with the consent of the Author, such consent being in the
full discretion of the Author.
8. "Work" refers to the collection of files distributed by the Publisher, including the
Source Code, Executable Files, binaries, data files, documentation, whitepapers and
the Articles.
9. "You" is you, an individual or entity wishing to use the Work and exercise your
rights under this License.
2. Fair Use/Fair Use Rights. Nothing in this License is intended to reduce, limit, or restrict
any rights arising from fair use, fair dealing, first sale or other limitations on the
exclusive rights of the copyright owner under copyright law or other applicable laws.
3. License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, the Author hereby
grants You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive, perpetual (for the duration of the
applicable copyright) license to exercise the rights in the Work as stated below:
1. You may use the standard version of the Source Code or Executable Files in Your
own applications.
2. You may apply bug fixes, portability fixes and other modifications obtained from the
Public Domain or from the Author. A Work modified in such a way shall still be
considered the standard version and will be subject to this License.
3. You may otherwise modify Your copy of this Work (excluding the Articles) in any
way to create a Derivative Work, provided that You insert a prominent notice in
each changed file stating how, when and where You changed that file.
4. You may distribute the standard version of the Executable Files and Source Code or
Derivative Work in aggregate with other (possibly commercial) programs as part of
a larger (possibly commercial) software distribution.
5. The Articles discussing the Work published in any form by the author may not be
distributed or republished without the Author's consent. The author retains
copyright to any such Articles. You may use the Executable Files and Source Code
pursuant to this License but you may not repost or republish or otherwise
distribute or make available the Articles, without the prior written consent of the
Author.
B78799AM A-17
Any subroutines or modules supplied by You and linked into the Source Code or
Executable Files of this Work shall not be considered part of this Work and will not be
subject to the terms of this License.
4. Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Author hereby
grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
(except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, import, and
otherwise transfer the Work.
5. Restrictions. The license granted in Section 3 above is expressly made subject to and
limited by the following restrictions:
1. You agree not to remove any of the original copyright, patent, trademark, and
attribution notices and associated disclaimers that may appear in the Source Code
or Executable Files.
2. You agree not to advertise or in any way imply that this Work is a product of Your
own.
3. The name of the Author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from the Work without the prior written consent of the Author.
4. You agree not to sell, lease, or rent any part of the Work. This does not restrict you
from including the Work or any part of the Work inside a larger software
distribution that itself is being sold. The Work by itself, though, cannot be sold,
leased or rented.
5. You may distribute the Executable Files and Source Code only under the terms of
this License, and You must include a copy of, or the Uniform Resource Identifier for,
this License with every copy of the Executable Files or Source Code You distribute
and ensure that anyone receiving such Executable Files and Source Code agrees that
the terms of this License apply to such Executable Files and/or Source Code. You
may not offer or impose any terms on the Work that alter or restrict the terms of
this License or the recipients' exercise of the rights granted hereunder. You may not
sublicense the Work. You must keep intact all notices that refer to this License and
to the disclaimer of warranties. You may not distribute the Executable Files or
Source Code with any technological measures that control access or use of the Work
in a manner inconsistent with the terms of this License.
6. You agree not to use the Work for illegal, immoral or improper purposes, or on
pages containing illegal, immoral or improper material. The Work is subject to
applicable export laws. You agree to comply with all such laws and regulations that
may apply to the Work after Your receipt of the Work.
6. Representations, Warranties and Disclaimer. THIS WORK IS PROVIDED "AS IS", "WHERE
IS" AND "AS AVAILABLE", WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OR GUARANTEES. YOU, THE USER, ASSUME ALL RISK IN ITS USE,
INCLUDING COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, PATENT INFRINGEMENT, SUITABILITY, ETC.
AUTHOR EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, MERCHANTABLE QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR ANY WARRANTY OF TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, OR
THAT THE WORK (OR ANY PORTION THEREOF) IS CORRECT, USEFUL, BUG-FREE OR
FREE OF VIRUSES. YOU MUST PASS THIS DISCLAIMER ON WHENEVER YOU
DISTRIBUTE THE WORK OR DERIVATIVE WORKS.
A-18 B78799AM
A
7. Indemnity. You agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Author and the
Publisher from and against any claims, suits, losses, damages, liabilities, costs, and
expenses (including reasonable legal or attorneys' fees) resulting from or relating to
any use of the Work by You.
8. Limitation on Liability. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN
NO EVENT WILL THE AUTHOR OR THE PUBLISHER BE LIABLE TO YOU ON ANY LEGAL
THEORY FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS LICENSE OR THE USE OF THE WORK OR
OTHERWISE, EVEN IF THE AUTHOR OR THE PUBLISHER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
9. Termination.
1. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically upon
any breach by You of any term of this License. Individuals or entities who have
received Derivative Works from You under this License, however, will not have their
licenses terminated provided such individuals or entities remain in full compliance
with those licenses. Sections 1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11 will survive any termination of
this License.
2. If You bring a copyright, trademark, patent or any other infringement claim against
any contributor over infringements You claim are made by the Work, your License
from such contributor to the Work ends automatically.
3. Subject to the above terms and conditions, this License is perpetual (for the
duration of the applicable copyright in the Work). Notwithstanding the above, the
Author reserves the right to release the Work under different license terms or to
stop distributing the Work at any time; provided, however that any such election
will not serve to withdraw this License (or any other license that has been, or is
required to be, granted under the terms of this License), and this License will
continue in full force and effect unless terminated as stated above.
10. Publisher. The parties hereby confirm that the Publisher shall not, under any
circumstances, be responsible for and shall not have any liability in respect of the
subject matter of this License. The Publisher makes no warranty whatsoever in
connection with the Work and shall not be liable to You or any party on any legal theory
for any damages whatsoever, including without limitation any general, special,
incidental or consequential damages arising in connection to this license. The Publisher
reserves the right to cease making the Work available to You at any time without notice
11. Miscellaneous
1. This License shall be governed by the laws of the location of the head office of the
Author or if the Author is an individual, the laws of location of the principal place of
residence of the Author.
2. If any provision of this License is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law, it
shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this
License, and without further action by the parties to this License, such provision
shall be reformed to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid
and enforceable.
B78799AM A-19
3. No term or provision of this License shall be deemed waived and no breach

consented to unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing and signed by the
party to be charged with such waiver or consent.
4. This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to
the Work licensed herein. There are no understandings, agreements or
representations with respect to the Work not specified herein. The Author shall not
be bound by any additional provisions that may appear in any communication from
You. This License may not be modified without the mutual written agreement of the
Author and You.
ETHERCAT SLAVE STACK CODE LICENSE

Given by
Beckhoff Automation GmbH & Co. KG Eiserstrasse 5 33415 Verl Germany
("Licensor")
Whereas, you are interested in obtaining a License for using the EtherCAT Slave Stack Code
(SSC).
Whereas, Beckhoff Automation GmbH is the owner of all intellectual property rights
pertaining to the EtherCAT Technology, including but not limited to (a) the following patent
applications and patents: EP1590927, EP1789857, DE102004044764, EP2137893 with
corresponding applications or registrations in various other countries, and (b) the
trademarks "EtherCAT" and "Safety over EtherCAT", with applications or registrations in
the European Community (CTM003122736, CTM006350029, CTM005460563) and
corresponding registrations or applications in various other countries.
Whereas, Beckhoff Automation GmbH granted Licensor the right to license the Intellectual
Property Rights pertaining to the EtherCAT Technology to third parties.
Whereas, Licensor is willing to permit you to create and/or sell or otherwise distribute a
product incorporating the EtherCAT Technology. Whereas, you acknowledge Licensor's
commercially reasonable efforts to keep the number of those EtherCAT Technology
products in the market sold under the trade name "EtherCAT" and not being fully
compatible with the then current version of the EtherCAT Technology at a minimum.
Whereas capitalised terms shall have the meanings given to them in Annex 1
NOW THEREFORE, the License is granted as follows:
1. License
1.1 Subject to your compliance with the terms and conditions of this License, Licensor
hereby grants to you under the Intellectual Property Rights and for the sole purpose of
direct usage within or integration into your EtherCAT products a non-transferable,
worldwide, non-exclusive, royalty-free license
• to use the EtherCAT Slave Stack Code for developing, testing, selling or otherwise
distributing own Products incorporating EtherCAT Technology
• to modify and/or embed the Slave Stack Code in your Product without limitations set
forth in Section 5 a) and 5 b) of the License,
A-20 B78799AM
A
1.2 Your Products shall, at the time those are supplied to each individual of your customer
or otherwise distributed by you, be compatible with the latest version of the pertinent
EtherCAT Technology at that time pursuant to the provisions of Section 3 below.
1.3 Licensor and its Licensors shall exclusively own all intellectual property or proprietary
rights in and pertaining to the EtherCAT Technology including, but not limited to,
inventions, patents, patent applications and disclosures, copyrights, mask work rights,
trade secrets, moral rights, confidential or otherwise proprietary information and know-
how which have been, or will be, acquired or otherwise secured by a party, recognized in
any country or jurisdiction in the world. Other than the limited license granted to you
pursuant to this License, you shall not acquire any rights in or pertaining to the EtherCAT
Technology.
2. Royalties
The EtherCAT Slave Stack Code License is royalty free.
3. Conformance Test Procedure
3.1 All Products shall undergo tests according to the then current Conformance Test Policy
issued from time to time by the EtherCAT Technology Group to ensure that those Products
are compatible with the latest version of the EtherCAT Technology. These tests shall be
completed with a positive result ("compatible") before any of the Products may be sold,
delivered or otherwise distributed to your customers.
3.2 In case a modification of the EtherCAT Technology results in a Product which was
compatible with the pre-existing version of the EtherCAT Technology to be incompatible
after the modification, you shall within twelve (12) months from the date the Product
became incompatible modify such Product and adapt it to the latest version of the
EtherCAT Technology. After such modified Product has passed the Conformance Test
pursuant to Section 3.1 with a positive result, you shall have the right to sell, deliver or
otherwise distribute this Product to your customers and any sale and delivery of the
incompatible Product during the twelve (12) months period shall be deemed permitted.
3.3 Notwithstanding to the limitations set forth in Sections 3.1 and 3.2, you shall have the
right to continue to supply Existing Customers with Products containing the version of the
EtherCAT Technology they initially received.
4. Trademark License
4.1 You acknowledge that Beckhoff Automation GmbH is the sole proprietary owner of the
Trademarks and Licensor is licensee of such rights and entitled to sublicense the
Trademarks. Subject to your compliance with the terms and conditions of this License,
Licensor hereby grants to you under the Intellectual Property Rights a non-transferable,
worldwide, non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use the Trademarks for marketing and sale
of Products manufactured in compliance with the license granted pursuant to Section 1
hereof, always provided that such Products shall at the time they are supplied to each
individual of your customer or are otherwise de facto distributed by you or your customers,
be fully compatible with the latest version of the EtherCAT Technology at the time.
4.2 You shall not use the Trademarks licensed under this or any other License or Agreement
from Licensor to apply for your own intellectual property rights, trade marks or domain
names containing such Trademarks. You shall not use or register the Trademarks as a
B78799AM A-21
component of your company name, trade name or a similar designation of your business or
enterprise or as a component of a domain name or a product name.
4.3 You shall not use the Trademarks for Products incorporating pre-existing versions or
derivatives of the EtherCAT Technology which are not fully compatible with the latest
version of the EtherCAT Technology at the time they are supplied by you to your customers.
4.4 After the expiration of the twelve (12) months period pursuant to Section 3.2, you shall
no longer use the Trademarks for those Products incorporating pre-existing versions of the
EtherCAT Technology which are not fully compatible with the latest version of the EtherCAT
Technology at the time they are de facto supplied to Existing Customers.
5. License Restrictions
Except as expressly permitted by this License or mandatory provisions of applicable law,

you may not
a) modify the EtherCAT Slave Stack Code or use content of the EtherCAT Slave Stack Code to
create, manufacture, distribute or sell products containing EtherCAT Technology
b) reproduce the EtherCAT Slave Stack Code or its components;
c) create derivative works of the EtherCAT Slave Stack Code or use content of the EtherCAT
Slave Stack Code to create, manufacture, distribute or sell products containing derivatives
of the EtherCAT Technology
d) sublicense, rent, lease, loan, timeshare, sell, distribute, disclose, publish, assign or
transfer any rights, grant a security interest in, transfer possession of the Slave Stack Code
or its components;
e) alter or remove any of Licensor's copyright or proprietary rights notices or legends

appearing on or in the Slave Stack Code.
6. Distribution of Products containing EtherCAT Technology Family outside this

License
You shall not create and sell or otherwise distribute a Product, except as expressly
permitted under this License or under any other EtherCAT License Agreement entered into
by you. Any attempt otherwise to create, to sell or otherwise to distribute such products or
a product containing a modification of the Intellectual Property Rights provided hereunder
automatically terminates the license granted herein.
7. No Right to Sublicense
7.1 You shall not be permitted to grant sublicenses to any third party, unless otherwise
explicitly agreed upon hereunder. Except for the limited license granted under this License,
Beckhoff Automation GmbH and Licensor shall retain all right, title and interest in and to
the Intellectual Property Rights. You shall not alter, modify, obscure or remove any
copyright, logo, trademark, trade name or other proprietary markings or confidentiality
legends or any serial numbers pertaining to Safety-over-EtherCAT Technology.
7.2 You may grant sublicenses to any third party only upon prior written agreement with
Licensor.
A-22 B78799AM
A
7.3 To the extent Licensee is permitted to grant sublicenses under this Agreement, Licensee
shall impose on the Sub-Licensee the same obligations as imposed on Licensee under this
Agreement and shall ensure that the Sub-Licensee meets all obligations set forth herein.
Licensee shall assume full responsibility for the performance of all obligations so imposed
on its Sub-Licensees.
8. Marking
You shall prominently display the trademark "EtherCAT" combined with the registration
symbol ® and patent references for the EtherCAT Technology and other markings on any
Product and shall reproduce such marking in the respective product manual in accordance
with the EtherCAT Marking Rules as published from time to time by the EtherCAT
Technology Group. You are permitted to make and take all reasonable steps necessary to
protect Beckhoff Automation GmbH or Licensor's related proprietary rights, provided,
however, you obtain the prior written consent of Licensor for any of such steps.
9. Limited Obligation of Licensor
You confirm that this License does not create any obligation of Licensor to supply you with
any additional information, code or protocol. Additionally any of the above as well as
support, maintenance, installation and training do not form part of Licensor's obligation
hereunder but may be separately purchased at Licensor's then current rates to the extent
offered by Licensor, save and except that during a period of twelve (12) months from the
date of this License Licensor shall provide you with its telephone support to the extent
available and free of charge.
10. Term and Termination
10.1 This License shall continue for an indefinite period. It may only be revoked or returned
by either party with thirty (30) days written notice in the event that the other party is in
fundamental breach of any provision of this License. Upon termination, the rights licensed
to you shall automatically revert to Licensor and you shall: (i) not distribute or use the
Intellectual Property Rights or the EtherCAT Technology for any purpose whatsoever; and
(ii) immediately return to Licensor all material provided by Licensor or its Licensors under
this License.
10.2 The EtherCAT Technology comprises i.a. the use of patents owned by other members
of the EtherCAT Technology Group and licensed to Beckhoff Automation GmbH and
sublicensed to Licensor with the Licensor's with the right to sublicense to the members of
the EtherCAT Technology Group, only. The term of the license relating to these patents shall
therefore end if you cease to be a member of EtherCAT Technology Group.
11. Limited Warranty ("Gewährleistung")
11.1 Nothing herein shall constitute a guarantee ("Garantie") from Licensor. Licensor
warrants ("gewahrleistet") that at the time this License becomes effective the EtherCAT
Slave Stack Code is substantially in accordance with the product specifications as published
by Licensor and that Licensor is not aware of rights of third parties which prevent Licensor
from the due performance of its obligations pursuant to this License. Other than this limited
warranty Licensor hereby excludes and you waive any and all other warranties or
representations. In particular Licensor does not warrant that the EtherCAT Technology fits
for any general or particular purpose.
B78799AM A-23
11.2 In case of updates, upgrades and the delivery of a new version of the EtherCAT Slave
Stack Code, the limited warranty set forth in Section 11.1 shall be restricted to the new
features of the update, upgrade or new version compared with the previous version release.
11.3 Any of your warranty claims are time barred twelve (12) months after accepting of this
License or commencement of the additional statutory limitation period pursuant 11.2.
12. Limited Remedies
12.1 Except for Licensor's liability according to the German Product Liability Act and except
Licensor's liability for personal injuries due to its fault, you are entitled to damages only in
accordance with the provisions of this section without abandonment of the respective
applicable legal requirements.
12.2 Licensor is liable only for the faulty breach of fundamental contractual obligations or
for the breach of any other contractual obligation, if Licensor acts deliberately or grossly
negligent. In case of a slightly negligent breach of fundamental contractual obligations the
amount of damages is limited to the foreseeable damage which is intrinsic to the contract
on the date this License becomes effective.
12.3 Licensor is not liable for loss of profit or damage to reputation. The amount of
damages arising from other breaches of obligations is limited to an amount of 2.000,00
Euro.
12.4 The remedies available to you in case of a significant deviation from the product
specifications published by Licensor shall be limited to the supply of a proper version of the
EtherCAT Slave Stack Code. In case Licensor supplies a defective EtherCAT Slave Stack Code
Component twice or such supply does not cure the pertinent breach of this License, you are
entitled to terminate this License immediately.
13. Indemnification of Licensor
13.1 You shall, at your own expense, defend any suit instituted against Licensor which
results or arises from (i) an implementation of the EtherCAT Technology or a component
thereof made by you, or (ii) any other information or documentation provided under this
License as implemented by you, provided such implementation, information or
documentation forms the basis for such suit including but not limited to any product
liability claim by any third party and any allegation that any of the products fail to conform
with requirements of any applicable law.
13.2 You shall indemnify Licensor against any award of damage and costs made against
Licensor by a final judgment of a court of last resort based upon such allegation, provided
that Licensor gives you immediate notice in writing of any notice or claims with such
allegations and permits you through your counsel to defend the same and gives you all
available information, assistance and authority to enable you to assume such defence.
13.3 You shall have control of the defence of any such suit, including appeals from any
judgment therein and any negotiations for the settlement or compromise thereof with full
authority to enter into a binding settlement agreement or compromise.
13.4 For purposes of clarification it is stated that you shall have no obligations under this
Section 13 to Licensor in the event the sole basis for a suit instituted against Licensor is the
allegation that the EtherCAT Slave Stack Code in the form provided by Licensor to you
under this License infringes upon the rights of the claimant.
A-24 B78799AM
A
14. Use of Names of the Parties by the other Party
14.1 You may disclose that you are a licensed user of the EtherCAT Technology in your
advertising, press, promotion and similar public disclosures relating to the Product;
provided, however, that such advertising, promotion or similar public disclosures shall not
indicate that Licensor in any way endorses the Products, unless Licensor authorised you to
do so in writing prior to such disclosure.
14.2 You agree that Licensor may use your name and may disclose that you are a licensee of
Licensor's products in Licensor's advertising, press, promotions and similar public
disclosures with respect to the EtherCAT Technology; provided, however, such advertising,
promotion or similar public disclosures shall not indicate that you in any way endorses any
Licensor products, without prior written permission from you.
15. Independent Contractors
You and Licensor hereto are independent parties and no one shall have the right or
authority - expressed or implied - to bind the other in any way whatsoever. Nothing
contained herein shall be construed as creating any agency, employment relationship,
partnership or other form of joint enterprise between the parties.
16. Export Restrictions
Each party shall adhere to all applicable export laws and regulations, including those
administered by the U.S. Department of Commerce (U.S. Export Administration Regulations
15 CFR 730 et seq.), and shall not export, re-export, resell, transfer, or disclose, directly or
indirectly, any technical data or products received from the other, or the direct product of
such technical data or products, to any proscribed person, entity, or country, or foreign
national thereof, unless properly authorized by the U.S. government.
17. Governing Law
This License shall be governed by and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the
Federal Republic of Germany, without reference to conflict of laws´ rules. In case the English
legal meaning differs from the German legal meaning of this License and its terms, the
German meaning shall prevail. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sales of Goods (CSIG) shall not be applicable.
18. Arbitration
Any dispute, controversy or claim arising out of or relating to this License or the breach,
expiration, termination or validity of this License shall finally settled under the Rules of
Arbitration of the International Chamber of Commerce by one or more arbitrators
appointed in accordance with said Rules. The place of arbitration shall be Dusseldorf,
Germany. The language of the proceedings shall be German or English. However, it shall not
be necessary to translate English language documents.
19. General
If any provision or provisions of this License are determined to be invalid, illegal or

unenforceable, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions of this
License shall remain unaffected or impaired thereby. This License may not be assigned or
otherwise transferred by you without prior written consent by Licensor. Any notices
required by this License shall be provided to the addresses set forth above by registered
mail, return receipt requested. This License constitutes the entire, complete, final and
B78799AM A-25
exclusive statement of the agreement between Licensor and you, which supersedes all
proposals, oral or written, and all other communications between the parties relating to the
subject matter of this License. No waiver, alteration or modification of the provisions of this
License will be valid unless made in writing and signed by a corporate officer of Licensor.
This applies also for a change of this section 19. End of Document
Annex 1 Definitions
1.1. "EtherCAT Slave Stack Code" means EtherCAT Slave software providing the higher level
slave functionality and interface between the EtherCAT Slave Controller and the Product
hardware and software and all modifications, updates, enhancements and upgrades
thereto, to the extent any of the foregoing are provided by Licensor under this License, in its
sole discretion, and full or partial copies thereof.
1.2. "EtherCAT Patents" means the patent rights owned and licensed by Licensor including
but not limited to the following German patent applications and patents: EP1590927,
EP1789857, DE102004044764, DE102007017835 with corresponding applications or
registrations in various other countries.
1.3. "EtherCAT Slave" means a network node making use of the slave part of the EtherCAT
Technology and being operational on the EtherCAT.
1.4. "EtherCAT Slave Controller" (ESC) means any semiconductor chip or chip assembly
such as, but not limited to, ASIC, structured ASIC or FPGA which contains the EtherCAT
Slave data link layer.
1.5. "EtherCAT Technology" means Ethernet control & automation technology, which is a
serial communication link developed and owned by Beckhoff Automation GmbH and
licensed to Licensor, specified in IEC 61158 and IEC 61784 (and its successors) and
compatible with the functional model as published from time to time on the official website
of the EtherCAT Technology Group (www.ethercat.org). The technology consists of a master
("EtherCAT Master"), a slave ("EtherCAT Slave") and a safety part ("Safetyover-EtherCAT").
1.6. "Existing Customer" means a customer who received a Product which was compatible
to a version of the EtherCAT Technology at the time the Product was first supplied to such
customer.
1.7. "Intellectual Property Rights" means the EtherCAT Patents, Trademarks, together with
all copyrights and all other proprietary rights owned or acquired by Beckhoff Automation
GmbH in and to the EtherCAT Technology, to the extent they are necessary to execute this
License.
1.8. "Product" means any product made by you which contains EtherCAT Technology or
technology created by at least partially making use of the EtherCAT Technology.
1.9. "Trademarks" means the trademarks "EtherCAT" and "Safety over EtherCAT", with
applications or registrations in the European Community (CTM003122736,
CTM006350029, CTM005460563) and corresponding registrations or applications in
various other countries.
A-26 B78799AM
A
GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1

License steward: Free Software Foundation
SPDX short identifier: LGPL-2.1
Further resources on LGPL-2.1
GNU Lesser General Public License
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright © 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this
license document, but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the
GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change
it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to
share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated
software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors
who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about
whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in
any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General
Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of
free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can
get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free
programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you
these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give
the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or
can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete
object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making
changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they
know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we
offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify
the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the
free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients
B78799AM A-27
should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's
reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We
wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by
obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent
license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use
specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General
Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain
designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use
this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free
programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the
combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original
library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire
combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax
criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the
user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free
software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These
disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries.
However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest
possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-
free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library
does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by
limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater
number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the
GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU
operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does
ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the
wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay
close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that
uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter
must be combined with the library in order to run.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a
notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed
under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License"). Each
licensee is addressed as "you".
A-28 B78799AM
A
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be

conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and
data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been
distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or
any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a
portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term
"modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to
it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains,
plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License;
they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted,
and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on
the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is
true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as
you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately
publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep
intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and
distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your
option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a
work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under
the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a. The modified work must itself be a software library.

b. You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you
changed the files and the date of any change.
c. You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties
under the terms of this License.
d. If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be
supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument
passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to
ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the
facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains
meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is
entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d
requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must
B78799AM A-29
be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still
compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections

of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do
not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when
you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the
Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and
every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work
written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the
Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of
this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that
refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License,
version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary
GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if
you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary
GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made
from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a
program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section
2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above
provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place,
then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies
the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to
work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses
the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and
therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable
that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather
A-30 B78799AM
A
than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License.
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the
Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even
though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work
can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this
to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and
accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then
the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall
under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code
for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also
fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses
the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and
distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit
modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for
debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it
and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of
this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include
the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the
user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
1. Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source

code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which
must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable
linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the
Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library
and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library.
(It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified
definitions.)
2. Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable
mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on
the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the
executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if
the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with
the version that the work was made with.
3. Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the
same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more
than the cost of performing this distribution.
B78799AM A-31
4. If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated

place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same
place.
5. Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have
already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must
include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from
it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include
anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the
major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which
the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other
proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a
contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an
executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a
single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and
distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work
based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and
provided that you do these two things:
a. Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the
Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed
under the terms of the Sections above.
b. Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work
based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined
form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as
expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate
your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However,
nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative
works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore,
by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you
indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for
copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with
or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any
further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not
responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any
other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by
court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they
do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to
A-32 B78799AM
A
satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For
example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library
by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you
could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of
the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole
is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other
property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole
purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous
contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance
on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or
she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence

of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by
patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the
Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation
excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries
not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in
the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser
General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to
the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version
number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option
of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version
published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license
version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose
distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for
permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write
to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision
will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free
software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR
THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
B78799AM A-33
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR
LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
JPEG Group 6b
The Independent JPEG Group's JPEG software
==========================================
README for release 6b of 27-Mar-1998 ====================================
This distribution contains the sixth public release of the Independent JPEG Group's free
JPEG software. You are welcome to redistribute this software and to use it for any purpose,
subject to the conditions under LEGAL ISSUES, below. Serious users of this software
(particularly those incorporating it into larger programs) should contact IJG at jpeg-
info@uunet.uu.net to be added to our electronic mailing list. Mailing list members are
notified of updates and have a chance to participate in technical discussions, etc. This
software is the work of Tom Lane, Philip Gladstone, Jim Boucher, Lee Crocker, Julian
Minguillon, Luis Ortiz, George Phillips, Davide Rossi, Guido Vollbeding, Ge' Weijers, and
other members of the Independent JPEG Group. IJG is not affiliated with the official ISO
JPEG standards committee.
DOCUMENTATION ROADMAP
=====================
This file contains the following sections:
OVERVIEW General description of JPEG and the IJG software.
LEGAL ISSUES Copyright, lack of warranty, terms of distribution.
REFERENCES Where to learn more about JPEG.
ARCHIVE LOCATIONS Where to find newer versions of this software.
RELATED SOFTWARE Other stuff you should get.
FILE FORMAT WARS Software *not* to get.
TO DO Plans for future IJG releases.
Other documentation files in the distribution are:

A-34 B78799AM
A
User documentation:
install.doc How to configure and install the IJG software.
usage.doc Usage instructions for cjpeg, djpeg, jpegtran, rdjpgcom, and wrjpgcom. *.1 Unix-
style man pages for programs (same info as usage.doc).
wizard.doc Advanced usage instructions for JPEG wizards only.
change.log Version-to-version change highlights.
Programmer and internal documentation:
libjpeg.doc How to use the JPEG library in your own programs.
example.c Sample code for calling the JPEG library.
structure.doc Overview of the JPEG library's internal structure.
filelist.doc Road map of IJG files.
coderules.doc Coding style rules --- please read if you contribute code.
Please read at least the files install.doc and usage.doc. Useful information can also be found
in the JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article. See ARCHIVE LOCATIONS below to
find out where to obtain the FAQ article.
If you want to understand how the JPEG code works, we suggest reading one or more of the
REFERENCES, then looking at the documentation files (in roughly the order listed) before
diving into the code.
OVERVIEW
========
This package contains C software to implement JPEG image compression and

decompression. JPEG (pronounced "jay-peg") is a standardized compression method for
full-color and gray-scale images. JPEG is intended for compressing "real-world" scenes; line
drawings, cartoons and other non-realistic images are not its strong suit. JPEG is lossy,
meaning that the output image is not exactly identical to the input image. Hence you must
not use JPEG if you have to have identical output bits. However, on typical photographic
images, very good compression levels can be obtained with no visible change, and
remarkably high compression levels are possible if you can tolerate a low-quality image. For
more details, see the references, or just experiment with various compression settings.
This software implements JPEG baseline, extended-sequential, and progressive

compression processes. Provision is made for supporting all variants of these processes,
although some uncommon parameter settings aren't implemented yet. For legal reasons,
we are not distributing code for the arithmetic-coding variants of JPEG; see LEGAL ISSUES.
We have made no provision for supporting the hierarchical or lossless processes defined in
the standard.
We provide a set of library routines for reading and writing JPEG image files, plus two
sample applications "cjpeg" and "djpeg", which use the library to perform conversion
between JPEG and some other popular image file formats. The library is intended to be
reused in other applications.
B78799AM A-35
In order to support file conversion and viewing software, we have included considerable
functionality beyond the bare JPEG coding/decoding capability; for example, the color
quantization modules are not strictly part of JPEG decoding, but they are essential for
output to colormapped file formats or colormapped displays. These extra functions can be
compiled out of the library if not required for a particular application. We have also
included "jpegtran", a utility for lossless transcoding between different JPEG processes, and
"rdjpgcom" and "wrjpgcom", two simple applications for inserting and extracting textual
comments in JFIF files.
The emphasis in designing this software has been on achieving portability and flexibility,
while also making it fast enough to be useful. In particular, the software is not intended to
be read as a tutorial on JPEG. (See the REFERENCES section for introductory material.)
Rather, it is intended to be reliable, portable, industrial-strength code. We do not claim to
have achieved that goal in every aspect of the software, but we strive for it.
We welcome the use of this software as a component of commercial products. No royalty is

required, but we do ask for an acknowledgement in product documentation, as described
under LEGAL ISSUES.
LEGAL ISSUES
============
In plain English:
1. We don't promise that this software works. (But if you find any bugs, please let us know!)
2. You can use this software for whatever you want. You don't have to pay us.
3. You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it in a program, you must
acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you've used the IJG code.
In legalese:
The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either express or implied, with

respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a particular
purpose. This software is provided "AS IS", and you, its user, assume the entire risk as to its
quality and accuracy.
This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. All Rights Reserved except as
specified below.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software (or portions
thereof) for any purpose, without fee, subject to these conditions:
(1) If any part of the source code for this software is distributed, then this README file
must be included, with this copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered; and any additions,
deletions, or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation.
(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying documentation must state
that "this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group".
A-36 B78799AM
A
(3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts full responsibility
for any undesirable consequences; the authors accept NO LIABILITY for damages of any
kind.
These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code, not just to
the unmodified library. If you use our work, you ought to acknowledge us.
Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author's name or company name in
advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it. This software
may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG Group's software".
We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of commercial
products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor.
ansi2knr.c is included in this distribution by permission of L. Peter Deutsch, sole proprietor
of its copyright holder, Aladdin Enterprises of Menlo Park, CA.
ansi2knr.c is NOT covered by the above copyright and conditions, but instead by the usual
distribution terms of the Free Software Foundation; principally, that you must include
source code if you redistribute it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for full details.) However, since
ansi2knr.c is not needed as part of any program generated from the IJG code, this does not
limit you more than the foregoing paragraphs do.
The Unix configuration script "configure" was produced with GNU Autoconf. It is copyright
by the Free Software Foundation but is freely distributable. The same holds for its
supporting scripts (config.guess, config.sub, ltconfig, ltmain.sh). Another support script,
install-sh, is copyright by M.I.T. but is also freely distributable.
It appears that the arithmetic coding option of the JPEG spec is covered by patents owned
by IBM, AT&T, and Mitsubishi. Hence arithmetic coding cannot legally be used without
obtaining one or more licenses. For this reason, support for arithmetic coding has been
removed from the free JPEG software. (Since arithmetic coding provides only a marginal
gain over the unpatented Huffman mode, it is unlikely that very many implementations will
support it.) So far as we are aware, there are no patent restrictions on the remaining code.
The IJG distribution formerly included code to read and write GIF files. To avoid
entanglement with the Unisys LZW patent, GIF reading support has been removed
altogether, and the GIF writer has been simplified to produce "uncompressed GIFs". This
technique does not use the LZW algorithm; the resulting GIF files are larger than usual, but
are readable by all standard GIF decoders.
We are required to state that "The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright
property of CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of CompuServe
Incorporated."
REFERENCES
==========
We highly recommend reading one or more of these references before trying to understand
the innards of the JPEG software.
The best short technical introduction to the JPEG compression algorithm is Wallace,
Gregory K. "The JPEG Still Picture Compression Standard", Communications of the ACM,
April 1991 (vol. 34 no. 4), pp. 30-44. (Adjacent articles in that issue discuss MPEG motion
picture compression, applications of JPEG, and related topics.) If you don't have the CACM
B78799AM A-37
issue handy, a PostScript file containing a revised version of Wallace's article is available at
ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/wallace.ps.gz. The file (actually a preprint for an article that
appeared in IEEE Trans. Consumer Electronics) omits the sample images that appeared in
CACM, but it includes corrections and some added material. Note: the Wallace article is
copyright ACM and IEEE, and it may not be used for commercial purposes.
A somewhat less technical, more leisurely introduction to JPEG can be found in "The Data
Compression Book" by Mark Nelson and Jean-loup Gailly, published by M&T Books (New
York), 2nd ed. 1996, ISBN 1-55851-434-1. This book provides good explanations and
example C code for a multitude of compression methods including JPEG. It is an excellent
source if you are comfortable reading C code but don't know much about data compression
in general. The book's JPEG sample code is far from industrial-strength, but when you are
ready to look at a full implementation, you've got one here...
The best full description of JPEG is the textbook "JPEG Still Image Data Compression
Standard" by William B. Pennebaker and Joan L. Mitchell, published by Van Nostrand
Reinhold, 1993, ISBN 0-442-01272-1. Price US$59.95, 638 pp. The book includes the
complete text of the ISO JPEG standards (DIS 10918-1 and draft DIS 10918-2). This is by far
the most complete exposition of JPEG in existence, and we highly recommend it. The JPEG
standard itself is not available electronically; you must order a paper copy through ISO or
ITU. (Unless you feel a need to own a certified official copy, we recommend buying the
Pennebaker and Mitchell book instead; it's much cheaper and includes a great deal of useful
explanatory material.) In the USA, copies of the standard may be ordered from ANSI Sales at
(212) 642-4900, or from Global Engineering Documents at (800) 854-7179. (ANSI doesn't
take credit card orders, but Global does.) It's not cheap: as of 1992, ANSI was charging $95
for Part 1 and $47 for Part 2, plus 7% shipping/handling. The standard is divided into two
parts, Part 1 being the actual specification, while Part 2 covers compliance testing methods.
Part 1 is titled "Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone Still Images, Part 1:
Requirements and guidelines" and has document numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-1, ITU-T T.81.
Part 2 is titled "Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone Still Images, Part 2:
Compliance testing" and has document numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-2, ITU-T T.83.
Some extensions to the original JPEG standard are defined in JPEG Part 3, a newer ISO
standard numbered ISO/IEC IS 10918-3 and ITU-T T.84. IJG currently does not support any
Part 3 extensions.
The JPEG standard does not specify all details of an interchangeable file format. For the
omitted details we follow the "JFIF" conventions, revision 1.02. A copy of the JFIF spec is
available from: Literature Department C-Cube Microsystems, Inc. 1778 McCarthy Blvd.
Milpitas, CA 95035 phone (408) 944-6300, fax (408) 944-6314
A PostScript version of this document is available by FTP at ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/

jfif.ps.gz. There is also a plain text version at ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jfif.txt.gz, but it
is missing the figures.
The TIFF 6.0 file format specification can be obtained by FTP from ftp://ftp.sgi.com/
graphics/tiff/TIFF6.ps.gz. The JPEG incorporation scheme found in the TIFF 6.0 spec of 3-
June-92 has a number of serious problems. IJG does not recommend use of the TIFF 6.0
design (TIFF Compression tag 6). Instead, we recommend the JPEG design proposed by
TIFF Technical Note #2 (Compression tag 7). Copies of this Note can be obtained from
ftp.sgi.com or from ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/. It is expected that the next revision of
the TIFF spec will replace the 6.0 JPEG design with the Note's design. Although IJG's own
A-38 B78799AM
A
code does not support TIFF/JPEG, the free libtiff library uses our library to implement
TIFF/JPEG per the Note. libtiff is available from ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/tiff/.
ARCHIVE LOCATIONS
=================
The "official" archive site for this software is ftp.uu.net (Internet address 192.48.96.9). The
most recent released version can always be found there in directory graphics/jpeg. This
particular version will be archived as ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jpegsrc.v6b.tar.gz. If
you don't have direct Internet access, UUNET's archives are also available via UUCP; contact
help@uunet.uu.net for information on retrieving files that way.
Numerous Internet sites maintain copies of the UUNET files. However, only ftp.uu.net is
guaranteed to have the latest official version.
You can also obtain this software in DOS-compatible "zip" archive format from the SimTel
archives (ftp://ftp.simtel.net/pub/simtelnet/msdos/graphics/), or on CompuServe in the
Graphics Support forum (GO CIS:GRAPHSUP), library 12 "JPEG Tools". Again, these versions
may sometimes lag behind the ftp.uu.net release.
The JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article is a useful source of general information
about JPEG. It is updated constantly and therefore is not included in this distribution. The
FAQ is posted every two weeks to Usenet newsgroups comp.graphics.misc, news.answers,
and other groups. It is available on the World Wide Web at http://www.faqs.org/faqs/jpeg-
faq/ and other news.answers archive sites, including the official news.answers archive at
rtfm.mit.edu: ftp://rtfm.mit.edu/pub/usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/. If you don't have
Web or FTP access, send e-mail to mail-server@rtfm.mit.edu with body
send usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/part1
send usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/part2
RELATED SOFTWARE
================
Numerous viewing and image manipulation programs now support JPEG. (Quite a few of
them use this library to do so.) The JPEG FAQ described above lists some of the more
popular free and shareware viewers, and tells where to obtain them on Internet.
If you are on a Unix machine, we highly recommend Jef Poskanzer's free PBMPLUS
software, which provides many useful operations on PPM-format image files. In particular,
it can convert PPM images to and from a wide range of other formats, thus making cjpeg/
djpeg considerably more useful. The latest version is distributed by the NetPBM group, and
is available from numerous sites, notably ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/graphics/graphics/
packages/NetPBM/. Unfortunately PBMPLUS/NETPBM is not nearly as portable as the IJG
software is; you are likely to have difficulty making it work on any non-Unix machine.
A different free JPEG implementation, written by the PVRG group at Stanford, is available
from ftp://havefun.stanford.edu/pub/jpeg/. This program is designed for research and
experimentation rather than production use; it is slower, harder to use, and less portable
than the IJG code, but it is easier to read and modify. Also, the PVRG code supports lossless
JPEG, which we do not. (On the other hand, it doesn't do progressive JPEG.)
B78799AM A-39
FILE FORMAT WARS
================ Some JPEG programs produce files that are not compatible with our
library. The root of the problem is that the ISO JPEG committee failed to specify a concrete
file format. Some vendors "filled in the blanks" on their own, creating proprietary formats
that no one else could read. (For example, none of the early commercial JPEG
implementations for the Macintosh were able to exchange compressed files.)
The file format we have adopted is called JFIF (see REFERENCES). This format has been
agreed to by a number of major commercial JPEG vendors, and it has become the de facto
standard. JFIF is a minimal or "low end" representation. We recommend the use of TIFF/
JPEG (TIFF revision 6.0 as modified by TIFF Technical Note #2) for "high end" applications
that need to record a lot of additional data about an image. TIFF/JPEG is fairly new and not
yet widely supported, unfortunately.
The upcoming JPEG Part 3 standard defines a file format called SPIFF. SPIFF is
interoperable with JFIF, in the sense that most JFIF decoders should be able to read the
most common variant of SPIFF. SPIFF has some technical advantages over JFIF, but its major
claim to fame is simply that it is an official standard rather than an informal one. At this
point it is unclear whether SPIFF will supersede JFIF or whether JFIF will remain the de-
facto standard. IJG intends to support SPIFF once the standard is frozen, but we have not
decided whether it should become our default output format or not. (In any case, our
decoder will remain capable of reading JFIF indefinitely.)
Various proprietary file formats incorporating JPEG compression also exist. We have little
or no sympathy for the existence of these formats. Indeed, one of the original reasons for
developing this free software was to help force convergence on common, open format
standards for JPEG files. Don't use a proprietary file format!
TO DO
=====
The major thrust for v7 will probably be improvement of visual quality. The current method
for scaling the quantization tables is known not to be very good at low Q values. We also
intend to investigate block boundary smoothing, "poor man's variable quantization", and
other means of improving quality-vs-file-size performance without sacrificing
compatibility.
In future versions, we are considering supporting some of the upcoming JPEG Part 3
extensions --- principally, variable quantization and the SPIFF file format.
As always, speeding things up is of great interest.
Please send bug reports, offers of help, etc. to jpeg-info@uunet.uu.net.
Microsoft Public License (MS-PL)

This license governs use of the accompanying software. If you use the software, you accept
this license. If you do not accept the license, do not use the software.
1. Definitions
A-40 B78799AM
A
The terms "reproduce," "reproduction," "derivative works," and "distribution" have the
same meaning here as under U.S. copyright law.
A "contribution" is the original software, or any additions or changes to the software.
A "contributor" is any person that distributes its contribution under this license.
"Licensed patents" are a contributor's patent claims that read directly on its
contribution.
2. Grant of Rights
a. Copyright Grant- Subject to the terms of this license, including the license
conditions and limitations in section 3, each contributor grants you a non-exclusive,
worldwide, royalty-free copyright license to reproduce its contribution, prepare
derivative works of its contribution, and distribute its contribution or any derivative
works that you create.
b. Patent Grant- Subject to the terms of this license, including the license conditions
and limitations in section 3, each contributor grants you a non-exclusive,
worldwide, royalty-free license under its licensed patents to make, have made, use,
sell, offer for sale, import, and/or otherwise dispose of its contribution in the
software or derivative works of the contribution in the software.
3. Conditions and Limitations
a. No Trademark License- This license does not grant you rights to use any
contributors' name, logo, or trademarks.
b. If you bring a patent claim against any contributor over patents that you claim are
infringed by the software, your patent license from such contributor to the software
ends automatically.
c. If you distribute any portion of the software, you must retain all copyright, patent,
trademark, and attribution notices that are present in the software.
d. If you distribute any portion of the software in source code form, you may do so
only under this license by including a complete copy of this license with your
distribution. If you distribute any portion of the software in compiled or object code
form, you may only do so under a license that complies with this license.
e. The software is licensed "as-is." You bear the risk of using it. The contributors give
no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. You may have additional consumer
rights under your local laws which this license cannot change. To the extent
permitted under your local laws, the contributors exclude the implied warranties of
merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose and non-infringement.
Mozilla Public License
MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 1.1
---------------
1. Definitions.
B78799AM A-41
1.0.1. "Commercial Use" means distribution or otherwise making the
Covered Code available to a third party.
1.1. "Contributor" means each entity that creates or contributes to
the creation of Modifications.
1.2. "Contributor Version" means the combination of the Original
Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor, and the Modifications
made by that particular Contributor.
1.3. "Covered Code" means the Original Code or Modifications or the
combination of the Original Code and Modifications, in each case
including portions thereof.
1.4. "Electronic Distribution Mechanism" means a mechanism generally
accepted in the software development community for the electronic
transfer of data.
1.5. "Executable" means Covered Code in any form other than Source
Code.
1.6. "Initial Developer" means the individual or entity identified
as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit
A.
1.7. "Larger Work" means a work which combines Covered Code or
portions thereof with code not governed by the terms of this License.
1.8. "License" means this document.
1.8.1. "Licensable" means having the right to grant, to the maximum
extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant or
subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed herein.
1.9. "Modifications" means any addition to or deletion from the
substance or structure of either the Original Code or any previous
Modifications. When Covered Code is released as a series of files, a
Modification is:
A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file
containing Original Code or previous Modifications.
A-42 B78799AM
A
B. Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code or
previous Modifications.
1.10. "Original Code" means Source Code of computer software code
which is described in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A as
Original Code, and which, at the time of its release under this
License is not already Covered Code governed by this License.
1.10.1. "Patent Claims" means any patent claim(s), now owned or
hereafter acquired, including without limitation, method, process,
and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by grantor.
1.11. "Source Code" means the preferred form of the Covered Code for
making modifications to it, including all modules it contains, plus
any associated interface definition files, scripts used to control
compilation and installation of an Executable, or source code
differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another
well known, available Covered Code of the Contributor's choice. The
Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form, provided the
appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available
for no charge.
1.12. "You" (or "Your") means an individual or a legal entity
exercising rights under, and complying with all of the terms of, this
License or a future version of this License issued under Section 6.1.
For legal entities, "You" includes any entity which controls, is
controlled by, or is under common control with You. For purposes of
this definition, "control" means (a) the power, direct or indirect,
to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by
contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty percent
(50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such
entity.
2. Source Code License.
2.1. The Initial Developer Grant.
B78799AM A-43
The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free,
non-exclusive license, subject to third party intellectual property
claims:
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or
trademark) Licensable by Initial Developer to use, reproduce,
modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Original
Code (or portions thereof) with or without Modifications, and/or
as part of a Larger Work; and
(b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making, using or
selling of Original Code, to make, have made, use, practice,
sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the
Original Code (or portions thereof).
(c) the licenses granted in this Section 2.1(a) and (b) are
effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes
Original Code under the terms of this License.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no patent license is
granted: 1) for code that You delete from the Original Code; 2)
separate from the Original Code; or 3) for infringements caused
by: i) the modification of the Original Code or ii) the
combination of the Original Code with other software or devices.
2.2. Contributor Grant.
Subject to third party intellectual property claims, each Contributor
hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or
trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to use, reproduce, modify,
display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Modifications
created by such Contributor (or portions thereof) either on an
unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as Covered Code
and/or as part of a Larger Work; and
(b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or
A-44 B78799AM
A
selling of Modifications made by that Contributor either alone
and/or in combination with its Contributor Version (or portions
of such combination), to make, use, sell, offer for sale, have
made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1) Modifications made by that
Contributor (or portions thereof); and 2) the combination of
Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor
Version (or portions of such combination).
(c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b) are
effective on the date Contributor first makes Commercial Use of
the Covered Code.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) above, no patent license is
granted: 1) for any code that Contributor has deleted from the
Contributor Version; 2) separate from the Contributor Version;
3) for infringements caused by: i) third party modifications of
Contributor Version or ii) the combination of Modifications made
by that Contributor with other software (except as part of the
Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4) under Patent Claims
infringed by Covered Code in the absence of Modifications made by
that Contributor.
3. Distribution Obligations.
3.1. Application of License.
The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are
governed by the terms of this License, including without limitation
Section 2.2. The Source Code version of Covered Code may be
distributed only under the terms of this License or a future version
of this License released under Section 6.1, and You must include a
copy of this License with every copy of the Source Code You
distribute. You may not offer or impose any terms on any Source Code
version that alters or restricts the applicable version of this
License or the recipients' rights hereunder. However, You may include
B78799AM A-45
an additional document offering the additional rights described in
Section 3.5.
3.2. Availability of Source Code.
Any Modification which You create or to which You contribute must be
made available in Source Code form under the terms of this License
either on the same media as an Executable version or via an accepted
Electronic Distribution Mechanism to anyone to whom you made an
Executable version available; and if made available via Electronic
Distribution Mechanism, must remain available for at least twelve (12)
months after the date it initially became available, or at least six
(6) months after a subsequent version of that particular Modification
has been made available to such recipients. You are responsible for
ensuring that the Source Code version remains available even if the
Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party.
3.3. Description of Modifications.
You must cause all Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a
file documenting the changes You made to create that Covered Code and
the date of any change. You must include a prominent statement that
the Modification is derived, directly or indirectly, from Original
Code provided by the Initial Developer and including the name of the
Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in any notice in an
Executable version or related documentation in which You describe the
origin or ownership of the Covered Code.
3.4. Intellectual Property Matters
(a) Third Party Claims.
If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party's
intellectual property rights is required to exercise the rights
granted by such Contributor under Sections 2.1 or 2.2,
Contributor must include a text file with the Source Code
distribution titled "LEGAL" which describes the claim and the
A-46 B78799AM
A
party making the claim in sufficient detail that a recipient will
know whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such knowledge after
the Modification is made available as described in Section 3.2,
Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies
Contributor makes available thereafter and shall take other steps
(such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups)
reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered
Code that new knowledge has been obtained.
(b) Contributor APIs.
If Contributor's Modifications include an application programming
interface and Contributor has knowledge of patent licenses which
are reasonably necessary to implement that API, Contributor must
also include this information in the LEGAL file.
(c) Representations.
Contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to
Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor believes that Contributor's
Modifications are Contributor's original creation(s) and/or
Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by
this License.
3.5. Required Notices.
You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file of the Source
Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in a particular Source
Code file due to its structure, then You must include such notice in a
location (such as a relevant directory) where a user would be likely
to look for such a notice. If You created one or more Modification(s)
You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in
Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License in any documentation
for the Source Code where You describe recipients' rights or ownership
rights relating to Covered Code. You may choose to offer, and to
charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability
B78799AM A-47
obligations to one or more recipients of Covered Code. However, You
may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of the Initial
Developer or any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than
any such warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligation is
offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial
Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the
Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of warranty,
support, indemnity or liability terms You offer.
3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions.
You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the
requirements of Section 3.1-3.5 have been met for that Covered Code,
and if You include a notice stating that the Source Code version of
the Covered Code is available under the terms of this License,
including a description of how and where You have fulfilled the
obligations of Section 3.2. The notice must be conspicuously included
in any notice in an Executable version, related documentation or
collateral in which You describe recipients' rights relating to the
Covered Code. You may distribute the Executable version of Covered
Code or ownership rights under a license of Your choice, which may
contain terms different from this License, provided that You are in
compliance with the terms of this License and that the license for the
Executable version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient's
rights in the Source Code version from the rights set forth in this
License. If You distribute the Executable version under a different
license You must make it absolutely clear that any terms which differ
from this License are offered by You alone, not by the Initial
Developer or any Contributor. You hereby agree to indemnify the
Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by
the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such
terms You offer.
A-48 B78799AM
A
3.7. Larger Works.
You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code
not governed by the terms of this License and distribute the Larger
Work as a single product. In such a case, You must make sure the
requirements of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code.
4. Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation.
If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this
License with respect to some or all of the Covered Code due to
statute, judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a) comply with
the terms of this License to the maximum extent possible; and (b)
describe the limitations and the code they affect. Such description
must be included in the LEGAL file described in Section 3.4 and must
be included with all distributions of the Source Code. Except to the
extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such description must be
sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to
understand it.
5. Application of this License.
This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has
attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related Covered Code.
6. Versions of the License.
6.1. New Versions.
Netscape Communications Corporation ("Netscape") may publish revised
and/or new versions of the License from time to time. Each version
will be given a distinguishing version number.
6.2. Effect of New Versions.
Once Covered Code has been published under a particular version of the
License, You may always continue to use it under the terms of that
version. You may also choose to use such Covered Code under the terms
of any subsequent version of the License published by Netscape. No one
other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms applicable to
B78799AM A-49
Covered Code created under this License.
6.3. Derivative Works.
If You create or use a modified version of this License (which you may
only do in order to apply it to code which is not already Covered Code
governed by this License), You must (a) rename Your license so that
the phrases "Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL", "Netscape",
"MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar phrase do not appear in your
license (except to note that your license differs from this License)
and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your version of the license
contains terms which differ from the Mozilla Public License and
Netscape Public License. (Filling in the name of the Initial
Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in
Exhibit A shall not of themselves be deemed to be modifications of
this License.)
7. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY.
COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE COVERED CODE IS FREE OF
DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE
IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT,
YOU (NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE
COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER
OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF
ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
8. TERMINATION.
8.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate
automatically if You fail to comply with terms herein and fail to cure
such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. All
sublicenses to the Covered Code which are properly granted shall
A-50 B78799AM
A
survive any termination of this License. Provisions which, by their
nature, must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License
shall survive.
8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement
claim (excluding declatory judgment actions) against Initial Developer
or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom
You file such action is referred to as "Participant") alleging that:
(a) such Participant's Contributor Version directly or indirectly
infringes any patent, then any and all rights granted by such
Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this License
shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant terminate prospectively,
unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice You either: (i)
agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually agreeable reasonable
royalty for Your past and future use of Modifications made by such
Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to
the Contributor Version against such Participant. If within 60 days
of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not
mutually agreed upon in writing by the parties or the litigation claim
is not withdrawn, the rights granted by Participant to You under
Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate at the expiration of
the 60 day notice period specified above.
(b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such Participant's
Contributor Version, directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then
any rights granted to You by such Participant under Sections 2.1(b)
and 2.2(b) are revoked effective as of the date You first made, used,
sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications made by that
Participant.
8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant
alleging that such Participant's Contributor Version directly or
indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is resolved (such as
B78799AM A-51
by license or settlement) prior to the initiation of patent
infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the licenses
granted by such Participant under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken
into account in determining the amount or value of any payment or
license.
8.4. In the event of termination under Sections 8.1 or 8.2 above,
all end user license agreements (excluding distributors and resellers)
which have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder
prior to termination shall survive termination.
9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL
DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE,
OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY
CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL,
WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER
COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN
INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY
RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW
PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO
THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS.
The Covered Code is a "commercial item," as that term is defined in
48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of "commercial computer
software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such
terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48
C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995),
A-52 B78799AM
A
all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those
rights set forth herein.
11. MISCELLANEOUS.
This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject
matter hereof. If any provision of this License is held to be
unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent
necessary to make it enforceable. This License shall be governed by
California law provisions (except to the extent applicable law, if
any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflict-of-law provisions.
With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of,
or an entity chartered or registered to do business in the United
States of America, any litigation relating to this License shall be
subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern
District of California, with venue lying in Santa Clara County,
California, with the losing party responsible for costs, including
without limitation, court costs and reasonable attorneys' fees and
expenses. The application of the United Nations Convention on
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded.
Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract
shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply to this
License.
12. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS.
As between Initial Developer and the Contributors, each party is
responsible for claims and damages arising, directly or indirectly,
out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to
work with Initial Developer and Contributors to distribute such
responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is intended or
shall be deemed to constitute any admission of liability.
13. MULTIPLE-LICENSED CODE.
Initial Developer may designate portions of the Covered Code as
B78799AM A-53
"Multiple-Licensed". "Multiple-Licensed" means that the Initial
Developer permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under
Your choice of the NPL or the alternative licenses, if any, specified
by the Initial Developer in the file described in Exhibit A.
EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.
``The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License
Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in
compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS"
basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the
License for the specific language governing rights and limitations
under the License.
The Original Code is RabbitMQ.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Pivotal Software, Inc.
Copyright (c) 2007-2016 Pivotal Software, Inc. All rights reserved.''
[NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of
the notices in the Source Code files of the Original Code. You should
use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the
Original Code Source Code for Your Modifications.]
The MIT License (MIT)

Copyright © 2014 OxyPlot contributors
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software
and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without
restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom
the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
A-54 B78799AM
A
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,

ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
NTP Copyright Notice and Associated Licenses

NTP Copyright Notice
Copyright © David L. Mills 1992-2005
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any
purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice
appears in all copies and that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear
in supporting documentation, and that the name University of Delaware not be used in
advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written
prior permission. The University of Delaware makes no representations about the
suitability this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied
warranty.
OpenSSL License and Copyright Notice
LICENSE ISSUES
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL
License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit.
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source
licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-
core@openssl.org.
OpenSSL License
Copyright © 1998-2003 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the
following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For
written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
B78799AM A-55
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL"
appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT `ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).

This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The

implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for
commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The
following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash,
DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this
distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be
removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of
the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program
startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
A-56 B78799AM
A
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the
following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by
Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)".
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are
not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps
directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG `ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this
code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another
distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
Meinberg Installer for NTP on Windows Copyright Notice
Copyright © Meinberg Funkuhren 2005
Meinberg Funkuhren
Werner Meinberg
Auf der Landwehr 22
31812 Bad Pyrmont
Germany
www.meinberg.de info@meinberg.de
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any
purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice
appears in all copies and that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear
in supporting documentation, and that the name Meinberg Funkuhren (Meinberg Radio
Clocks) not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software
without specific, written prior permission. Meinberg Funkuhren makes no representations
about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express
or implied warranty.
B78799AM A-57
Beckman Coulter End-User License Agreement
Important
READ THIS END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT:
THIS END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("Agreement") GOVERNS THE USE OF CERTAIN

COMPUTER PROGRAMS CONTAINED IN THE BECKMAN COULTER, INC. ("BCI") PRODUCT
PROVIDED BY BCI OR ON BEHALF OF BCI ("BCI Product"). ACCEPTANCE OF THE PRICE
QUOTE (BY SUBMISSION OF A PURCHASE ORDER OR OTHERWISE) FOR OR USE OF THE
BCI PRODUCT CONSTITUTES ASSENT AND ACCEPTANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT BY YOU
AND THE BUSINESS ENTITY ON WHOSE BEHALF THE BCI PRODUCT IS PROVIDED
(collectively "You" or "Your") AND SIGNIFIES YOUR AGREEMENT TO BE BOUND BY THE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. BCI'S ACCEPTANCE OF AN ORDER FOR
THE BCI PRODUCT IS CONDITIONAL UPON YOUR ASSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS
AGREEMENT TO THE EXCLUSION OF ALL OTHER TERMS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH
ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT, YOU DO NOT HAVE THE
RIGHT TO AND MAY NOT USE THE BCI PRODUCT OR THE COMPUTER PROGRAMS
CONTAINED IN THE BCI PRODUCT.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Subject to all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, BCI
grants to You a non-exclusive, non-sublicensable and non-transferable license ("
License ") to use the computer programs, including any updates or upgrades (in object
code form only) contained in the BCI Product ("Programs") and the associated user
documentation (" Documentation ")(together with the Programs referred to herein,
collectively, as the (" Software ")) only as incorporated within the BCI Product and only
in accordance with the Documentation. You have no right to receive, use or examine any
source code or design documentation relating to the Programs. The Software is licensed
and not sold. As between the parties, BCI and its licensors retains all right, title and
interest in and to the Software and any and all derivative works, except as expressly and
unambiguously licensed herein, and BCI reserves all rights in the Software not granted
to You. In order to use the Software, You may be required to input a registration number
or product authorization key and register Your copy of the Software with BCI to obtain
the necessary license key or license file. Except as otherwise expressly provided under
the Agreement, You shall only use the Software in connection with the use of BCI
Product provided to You from BCI or a third party on BCI's behalf and only for Your
internal business purposes.
2. RESTRICTIONS. Other than as expressly permitted under applicable law, You shall not
(and shall not allow others to): (i) copy the Software, except as reasonably required to
use the Programs strictly in accordance with this Agreement, (ii) alter, adapt, translate
or create derivative works based upon the Software, or include the Programs in any
other products or software, (iii) decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer or otherwise
attempt to discover or reconstruct the source code (or underlying ideas, sequence,
structure organization or algorithms) of any of the Programs, or attempt to do so,
except to the limited extent the foregoing is expressly permitted by applicable law, in
which case You must first notify BCI in writing and request interoperability information
regarding the Programs, (iv) provide, rent, loan or lease the Software to any other party
or provide any information services to any other party through the use of the Software,
whether in the form of a timesharing service, service bureau or other information
processing service, (v) remove, modify or obscure any product identification, copyright
A-58 B78799AM
A
notice, trademark, and/or any other proprietary legend contained in the Software, (vi)
disseminate performance information or analysis relating to the Programs (vii) use the
Programs in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance in which the
failure of the Programs could lead to death, personal injury or environmental damage,
or (viii) tamper with, bypass, circumvent, or alter the security features of the Program.
You hereby acknowledge and agree that the Program may stop working and become
unusable for tampering of the security management technology.
3. TERMINATION. The License is effective until terminated. You may terminate the
Agreement and the License at any time by destroying all copies of the Program. Your
rights under this License will terminate automatically without notice if You fail to
comply with any provision of this Agreement. Within fourteen (14) days following
termination, You shall cease all use of, and destroy, all copies of the Software in Your
possession or control and so certify to BCI in writing. Except for the License, the terms
of this Agreement shall survive termination. Termination is not an exclusive remedy
and all other remedies will be available to BCI whether or not the License is terminated.
4. PRODUCT SUPPORT. Please refer to the BCI support number provided in the
Documentation for the BCI Product for information regarding support of the BCI
Product.
5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, THE
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND BCI
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS OF TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY,
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON
INFRINGEMENT. BCI DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL BE ERROR-
FREE, THAT USE OF THE PROGRAMS WILL BE FREE FROM INTERRUPTION OR OTHER
FAILURES, THAT ANY ERRORS OR DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED
OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL SATISFY YOUR SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS. YOU
ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT BCI DOES NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE, OR MAKE
ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE PERFORMANCE, USE OR RESULTS OF THE
USE OF THE SOFTWARE (INCLUDING IDENTIFIED COMPONENTS) OR ITS
CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS, OR OTHERWISE. YOU
ASSUME THE ENTIRE RISK ASSOCIATED WITH YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY IS AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS AGREEMENT. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS, SO THE FOREGOING DISCLAIMER MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN THE
EVENT THE DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS NOT ENFORCEABLE UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED TO NINETY (90)
DAYS FOLLOWING DELIVERY OF THE BCI PRODUCT.
6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING ELSE IN THIS
AGREEMENT, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, NEITHER BCI OR ITS
LICENSORS SHALL BE LIABLE WITH RESPECT TO ANY SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS
AGREEMENT UNDER ANY CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER
LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY FOR LOSS OF OR INTERRUPTION TO BUSINESS; LOSS
OF PROFITS OR GOOD WILL; LOSS OF USE; LOSS OR DAMAGE TO OR CORRUPTION OF
DATA; DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER SOFTWARE, HARDWARE OR OTHER EQUIPMENT;
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS TO OR ALTERATIONS OF DATA; UNAUTHORIZED
DISCLOSURE OF SENSITIVE, CONFIDENTIAL OR PROPRIETARY INFORMATION; ANY
COSTS OF PROCURING SUBSTITUTE GOODS, SERVICES, TECHNOLOGY OR RIGHTS; ANY
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES; OR
ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (US$250.00). THE
B78799AM A-59
LIMITATIONS IN THIS SECTION 6 SHALL NOT LIMIT BCI'S LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR
BODILY INJURY SOLELY RESULTING FORM BCI'S NEGLIGENCE, WILLFUL MISCONDUCT
OR FRAUDULENT MISREPRESENTATION.
7. U.S. GOVERNMENT USERS. The Software is a "commercial item" consisting of
"commercial computer software" and/or "commercial computer software
documentation" as such terms are defined in the Federal Acquisition Regulations
("FAR") section 2.101, and the Defense Federal Acquisition Regulations ("DFAR")
section 252.227-7014(a)(I) and DFAR section 252.227-7014(a)(5). Consistent with FAR
section 12.212 and DFAR section 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, any use of the
Software by or on behalf of an agency or other instrumentality of the U.S. Government
shall be governed solely by the terms of this Agreement and shall be prohibited except
to the extent expressly permitted by the terms of this Agreement. You will ensure that
each copy of the Software used by or for the U.S. Government is labeled to reflect the
foregoing.
8. EXPORT. Software, including technical data, is subject to U.S. export control laws,
including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated regulations, and may be
subject to export or import regulations in other countries. You agree to comply strictly
with all such regulations and acknowledge that you have the responsibility to obtain
licenses to export, re-export, or import Software.
9. THIRD PARTY COMPONENTS; ADDITIONAL TERMS. The Software may contain or be
delivered with one or more components, which may include third-party components,
identified by BCI in the Documentation, readme.txt file, third-party click-accept or on
www.beckman.com/thirdpartysoftware (the "Identified Component(s)") as being
subject to different license agreement terms, disclaimers of warranties, limited
warranties or other terms and conditions (collectively, "Additional Terms") than those
set forth herein. You agree to the applicable Additional Terms for any such Identified
Component(s). Such Identified Components are the sole responsibility of the licensor of
that Identified Component. BCI is not responsible for any Identified Component,
whether or not BCI reviewed or modified such component.
10. CONFIDENTIALITY. The Software embodies logic, design, architecture, algorithms and
coding methodology which constitute valuable confidential information that is
proprietary to BCI and its licensors. You agree to safeguard the right to access the
Software using the same standard of care which You use for Your similar confidential
materials, but in no event less than reasonable care. You agree not to provide or to
otherwise make available in any form the Software, or any portion thereof, to any
person other than to Your employees or contractors with a need to know, without the
prior written consent of BCI.
11. MISCELLANEOUS. You may not assign this Agreement or any of Your rights hereunder
without BCI's prior written consent and any attempt to do so without such consent
shall be null and void. No failure to exercise any right hereunder will operate as a
waiver thereof. If any provision of this Agreement shall be adjudged by any court of
competent jurisdiction to be unenforceable or invalid, that provision shall be limited or
eliminated to the minimum extent necessary so that this Agreement shall otherwise
remain in full force and effect and enforceable. This Agreement shall be construed in
accordance with the laws of the State of California and the United States without regard
to conflicts of laws provisions thereof and without regard to the United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods. The sole and exclusive
jurisdiction and venue for any actions related to the subject matter hereof shall be the
state and U.S. federal courts located in the County of Orange, California. You irrevocably
A-60 B78799AM
A
submit to the jurisdiction of such courts and consent to venue in such forum with
respect to any action or proceeding that relates to this Agreement. The prevailing party
in any action to enforce this Agreement shall be entitled to recover its reasonable costs
and expenses including reasonable attorneys' fees. No amendment to or modification of
this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a duly authorized officer
of BCI. This Agreement is in the English language only, which language shall be
controlling and any revision of this Agreement in any other language shall not be
binding. Both parties agree that this Agreement is the complete and exclusive statement
of the mutual understanding of the parties relating to the subject matter of this
Agreement. BCI reserves the right at any time to modify this Agreement in its sole
discretion, without liability to You. This Agreement, as amended, will be effective upon
use of the BCI Products, or Software and effective for all existing users immediately
after posting of any amended terms on the BCI website.
B78799AM A-61
A-62 B78799AM
APPENDIX B
DxA Trademarks
Trademarks
The following trademark statements are provided in their legally required languages.
REMISOL Advance
REMISOL Advance and REMISOL are trademarks of Normand-Info SAS in the USA and other
countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Used under
license.
®
EtherCAT
®
EtherCAT is a registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff
Automation GmbH, Germany.
®
Mikrobac
®
Mikrobac is a registered trademark of Bode Chemie GmbH, Hamburg, Germany.
®
Clorox
®
Clorox is a registered trademark of The Clorox Company, Oakland, California, USA.
®
BitLocker
®
BitLocker is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation, Redmond, Washington,
USA.
SYSMEXTM
SYSMEXTM is a trademark or registered trademark of SYSMEX CORPORATION.
STAGOTM
STAGOTM and STA R MAXTM are trademarks or registered trademarks of Diagnostica Stago
SAS.
B78799AM B-1
DxA Trademarks
Trademarks
B-2 B78799AM
Glossary
absorbent tissue — Disposable wipe that error rack — A rack for holding samples in
can absorb liquids and solids. question.
bar code — An optical machine-readable Laboratory Automation — A system of
representation of data relating to the information and hardware technology
object to which it is attached. Linear or that allows operation of the clinical
1-D bar codes systematically represent laboratory process without significant
data by varying the widths and spacings operator intervention.
of parallel lines. 2-D bar codes use
rectangles, dots, hexagons and other Liquid Level Detection (LLD) — A function
geometric patterns in two dimensions. to detect the surface of a fluid or the
interface between layers of a fluid.
biohazard — A biological agent or
condition that is a hazard to humans or input area —
the environment. The area into which samples are
centrifuge — A device that applies introduced into the system.
centrifugal force to separate particles in
suspension in a sample by spinning it in module — A standardized assembly with
a rotor. well-defined interfaces and
functionality, that provides a major
centrifuge adapter — A device that holds service to a larger system and can be
tubes of all sizes and is shuttled to and used together with other modules to
from the inside of the centrifuge. form a complete system.
console — The computer and all offline analyzer — Analyzer that is not
peripheral devices required to interface connected to the DxA system.
with the system modules and analyzers.
operator — A user with basic skills who
consumable — An object or substance operates a system, instrument, analyzer
that is consumed during a process. or device under normal, everyday
counterbalance rope — The rope hooked circumstances.
to the magnetic spring used to output area — The area from which
counterbalance the weight of the samples exit the system.
gripper on the Z-axis.
primary tube — A container into which
customized tray — A customized tray the sample is collected.
comprises a DxA-specific tray and
analyzer racks. push cap — Universal seal for open
(primary and secondary) sample tubes.
decapper — The module that
automatically removes a cap from a push cap feeder — The component of a
sample tube. recapper module that supplies/feeds
caps (or more specifically 'push caps')
direct track sampling — The process by for placing onto a tube.
which an analyzer aspirates the sample
while the tube remains on the track. rack — Sample container holder designed
to support multiple sample containers
diverter — The mechanism that diverts during processing by an instrument.
sample tube carriers from lane to lane
on the track system.
B78799AM Glossary-1
Glossary
rack builder module (RBU) — A device transport — A conveyor for moving

that loads and unloads samples to and samples between modules on an
from analyzer racks. automation system.
recapper — The device that automatically tube inspection unit (TIU) — A device
puts a cap on a sample tube. that characterizes a clinical sample tube
via an imaging process.
robot — An automated device that
performs an action. waste container — The waste container
into which the system puts the
robot door — The door that you open to biohazard waste.
access the inside of a robotic unit.
sample — The preferred generic term for
a small part of anything intended as
representative of the whole (e.g.,
serum, plasma, red blood cells, urine).
sample carrier — A carrier that holds one
sample tube as it moves on the track.
sample ID — An identifier unique to a
sample. A patient ID or donor ID may be
associated with many sample IDs.
sample in question — Samples where an
error occurred.
sample tube — The generic term for a
tube containing the patient or donor
sample.
secondary container — A container into
which a portion of a patient sample is
transferred.
storage area — The area in which
samples are stored.
storage module — A module that
prepares samples to be stored in an
environmentally controlled device to
protect sample integrity.
storage rack builder — A device
responsible for loading/unloading
sample tubes from storage racks and for
moving the racks to and from the
storage module.
subsystem — A functional grouping of
Subassemblies that combine to perform
a clearly separated function.
Glossary-2 B78799AM
www.beckmancoulter.com
© 2022 Beckman Coulter, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.

Dxa5000 Ifu

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dxa5000 Ifu

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dxa5000 Ifu

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instructions for Use

For In Vitro Diagnostic Use

Find us on the World Wide Web at:

Customized Trays, 1-63

Decapper: Empty the Waste Container, 3-44

Create and Copy a Discipline, 4-17

Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Intermediate Drip Shield and

Decapper: Inspect and Clean the Cover of the Motor Driver

Finish the Task, 5-109

Maintenance Monthly - Storage Module, 5-154

2-Year Maintenance - Input Output Module, 5-199

Communication Not Established 4, 7-3

General Communication Failure, 7-20

Adapter Handler Motion Failed 4, 7-67

Cap Gripping Axis Motion Error 6, 7-110

Cap Error 3, 7-199

Sample Tube Processing Error , 7-232

ETHERCAT SLAVE STACK CODE LICENSE, A-20

B78799AM, August 2022

B78799AL, June 2022

• Updated the System Configuration chapter, as follows:

B78799AK, March 2022

B78799AJ, November 2021

— Minimum Sample Volume is now referred to as Sample Volume

B78799AH, June 2021

B78799AG, December 2020

B78799AF, August 2020

B78799AE, April 2020

B78799AD, August 2019

• Updated the Maintenance chapter to include the simplified maintenance workflow

B78799AC, May 2019

B78799AB, February 2019

Initial Issue, B78799AA, May 2018

The customer is responsible for routine preventive maintenance procedures. Repairs

Telephone Service: USA and Canada

Telephone Service: International

For the Russian Market Only

Alerts for Warning, Caution, Important, Note, and Tip

Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can cause minor or

Important indicates important information to follow.

Note indicates notable information to follow.

Tip indicates information to consider.

Respond to and acknowledge all instrument event and error messages.

California Proposition 65 Warning Statement. This product can expose you to

The use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those

ISO 15223-1. Medical devices - Symbols to be used with medical

Warning; Biological hazard

This symbol indicates a warning of a biological hazard.

Supplemental Product-Specific Manufacturer Information

This symbol indicates a caution to operate only with all covers in

This symbol indicates the use of biohazardous materials in the area.

Wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, eye

Warning; Laser Beam

This symbol indicates a warning of a laser beam.

Supplemental Product-Specific Manufacturer Information

Warning, Hot Surface

This symbol indicates a warning of a hot surface.

Supplemental Product-Specific Manufacturer Information

This symbol indicates that there is a hot surface or component (such

This symbol indicates the medical device manufacturer.